Boeing 757-767 Study Guide

For Training Purposes Only

Caveat Emptor
This Study Guide is for training purposes only and does not replace any official publication. Every
effort has been made to ensure accuracy, but there is no guarantee and no liability. Always
remember that Delta publications have priority over anything here and be sure to compare the date
on the Study Guide with the dates on current Delta manuals since it always takes a while to update
the Study Guide after the manuals change. Furthermore, be aware this Study Guide doesn’t cover
everything we need to know to safely operate the airplane. There is plenty in the manuals that isn’t
covered here. Finally, please remember this Study Guide is a collection of both procedures and
techniques, with no distinction between the two. It would be unwise to argue with your instructor
or evaluator if he or she tries to show you another way to do something.

Do not download this Study Guide from websites other than www.convectivedigital.com. Other
people have created slide shows, eBooks and even executable files from this Study Guide without
permission and they may contain malware.

Comments and suggestions are always welcome and please be sure to let me know if you find
errors or if the Training Department changes the way we should do things. There’s a feedback link
on the website.

Fly safe!

UPDATE JUNE 29, 2020:

MY NAME IS JEFF RICKETS, CURRENTLY I AM CAPTAIN 7ER IN ATL. CAPTAIN
DAVE COLLETT HAS PASSED ON THIS GEM OF A DOCUMENT TO ME TO UPDATE
AND TRY TO GIVE THE 757/767 PILOTS OF DELTA A GREAT GUIDE FOR INITIAL
AND RECURRENT TRAINING. I HAVE ALWAYS USED THIS DOCUMENT AND
WHEN DAVE ASKED FOR A PILOT TO STEP UP AND KEEP THIS GOING AFTER HE
RETIRED, I VOLUNTEERED. I WILL TRY AS BEST I CAN TO FILL THE SHOES OF
CAPTAIN COLLETT. AS ALWAYS YOUR SUGGESTIONS ARE WELCOME. DAVE
HAS ALLOWED ME TO JUST POST TO HIS WEBSITE SO UPDATES SHOULD BE
SEAMLESS.

1
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Memory Items

Aborted Engine Start Fuel Control switch (affected side) – CUTOFF

Airspeed Unreliable (757) Autopilot Disengage switch – Push

Autothrottle ARM switch – Off
Flight Director switches (both) – Off
If necessary to stabilize the aircraft, set the following gear up
pitch attitude and thrust:
Flaps extended – 10º and 75% N1
Flaps up – 4º and 75% N1

Airspeed Unreliable (767) Autopilot Disengage switch – Push

Autothrottle ARM switch – Off
Flight Director switches (both) – Off
If necessary to stabilize the aircraft, set the following gear up
pitch attitude and thrust:
Flaps extended – 10º and 80% N1
Flaps up – 4º and 75% N1

Cabin Altitude or Rapid Don the oxygen masks.

Depressurization Establish crew communications.

Dual Engine Failure Engine Start selectors (both) – FLT

Thrust Levers (both) – Idle
Fuel Control switches (both) – CUTOFF, then RUN

Engine Fire or Engine Severe Autothrottle ARM switch – OFF

Damage or Separation Thrust Lever (affected side) – Confirm – Idle

Engine Limit or Surge or Stall Autothrottle ARM switch – OFF

Thrust Lever (affected side) – Confirm – Retard until engine
indications stay within limits or the thrust lever is at Idle

2
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Evacuation Flow Use the checklist if possible.
If using the checklist is not possible, use this flow pattern:
Stop – set the parking brake
Configure – open the outflow valve
Shutdown – cut off both Fuel Control switches
Evacuate – away from any fire

3
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Recall Limitations

Automatic Landing Maximum allowable wind speeds when landing weather minima
are predicated on autoland operations (e.g. CAT II autoland or
CAT III):
Maximum Headwind – 25 knots
Maximum Crosswind – 25 knots*
Maximum Tailwind – 10 knots
* The Boeing AFM low visibility autoland crosswind limitation
is 25 knots. To both initiate and land, Delta Ops Specs further
restricts CAT II and CAT III low visibility operations to a
15knot crosswind limit. For CAT I or higher visibility, the
autoland crosswind limit is 40 knots.

Autopilot After takeoff, the autopilot must not be engaged below

200 ft. AGL.

Use of aileron trim with the autopilot engaged is prohibited.

Flight Controls The maximum altitude with aps extended is 20,000 feet.

Maximum Operating Altitude 757: 42,000 feet pressure altitude.

767: 43,000 feet pressure altitude.

Maximum Takeoff and Landing 10 knots or as permitted by Company Pages.

Tailwind Component

Takeoff and Landing Crosswind 40 knots, including gusts.

Limit The crosswind component may be further limited by low
visibility approaches, autolands or contamination.
Refer to 5.16.3, Guidelines for Takeoff on Contaminated
Runways or Landing with Braking Action Less than Good.

Turbulent Air Penetration Speed 290 KIAS/.78 Mach, whichever is lower.

Weather Radar Avoid weather radar operation in a hangar

4
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
fl
 Non-Recall Limitations

ACARS ACARS is limited to the transmission and receipt of messages which

will not create an unsafe condition if the message is improperly
received, however Pre-Departure, Digital ATIS, Oceanic Clearances,
Weight and Balance, and Takeoff Data messages can be transmitted
and received over ACARS if they are verified per approved
operational procedures.

Air Conditioning/Pressurization When the airplane is electrically powered for more than 20 minutes on
the ground and the outside air temperature is 34ºC (94ºF) or greater,
equipment cooling must be provided in accordance with the table in
the Limitations section of Volume 1.

APU Limitations The starter duty cycle is a maximum of 3 consecutive starts or start
attempts within a 60-minute period.
In flight, APU bleed air is available up to approximately 17,000 feet.

Automatic Landing Do not use the autopilot below 100 feet radio altitude at airport pressure
altitudes above 8,400 feet.
Autoland is authorized for Flaps 25 or Flaps 30 landing only.
Do not autoland the aircraft when ground speed exceeds 165 knots.

Door Mounted Escape Slides Entry door evacuation slide systems must be armed and engagement of
the girt bar with the door sill verified prior to taxi, takeoff or landing
whenever passengers are carried.

EGT Limitations EGT limitations vary by airplane and engine. Refer to the Limitations
section of Volume 1.
757: If start EGT surpasses 485ºC (red radial) but does not exceed
545ºC, engine shut down is not required. Make a logbook entry and
contact MCC prior to dispatch for further guidance.
767: If maximum engine start limits are exceeded, shut down the
engine. Maintenance action is required prior to further operation.

Engine Ignition Continuous ignition must be on (Engine Start Selector in the CONT
position) while operating in severe turbulence.
Continuous ignition is automatically provided with the flap lever out of
the UP position or in icing conditions when engine anti-ice is on.

5
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Indicating The flight crew shall not blank the engine vibration display during
takeoff.

Engine Limit Display Markings Minimum and maximum limits are red.
Caution limits are amber.

Engine Starter Duty Cycle Continuous for 5 minutes.

Cool for 30 seconds per minute of operation.

Flight Controls Full application of pitch, roll, or yaw controls should be confined to
speeds below the maneuvering speed. Rapid and large alternating
control inputs, especially in combination with large changes in pitch,
roll, or yaw, and full control inputs in more than one axis at the same
time should be avoided as they may result in structural failures at any
speed, including below the maneuvering speed.

Flight Deck Access System Verify that an operational check of the Flight Deck Access System has
been accomplished according to approved procedures once each flight
day.

Fuel Use of Jet B and JP4 is prohibited.

The maximum fuel temperature is 49ºC (120ºF).
The maximum fuel imbalance for dispatch is 1,500 pounds.
The minimum inflight fuel tank temperature for Jet A is -37ºC. Other
fuels have lower minimum temperatures and are listed in the
Limitations section of Volume 1. These temperatures are 3 degrees
above the fuel freeze point.
Intentional dry running of a center tank fuel pump (CTR L Fuel Pump
or CTR R Fuel Pump message displayed on EICAS) is prohibited.

GPWS Do not use the terrain display for navigation.

Terrain awareness alerting and terrain display functions are prohibited
within 15 nm of takeoff, approach or landing on a runway or airport
not contained in the GPWS airport database. Crews will be notified of
those runways/airports via EFB or flight plan remarks.
Look-ahead and terrain alerting and display functions must be inhibited
by selecting the Ground Proximity Terrain Override switch to OVRD
if:
• the FMS is operating in IRS NAV only
• prior to takeoff, FMS position updating is not accomplished or
actual runway position is not verified by ensuring, with the 5 or
10 nm range selected on the EFIS control panel, the airplane is
displayed at the appropriate point on the runway symbol

6
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 HF Radios Do not operate HF radios during refueling operations.

Logbook Entry A logbook entry is required any time an aircraft limitation is exceeded,
e.g., an overweight landing, engine exceedance, etc.

Maximum Takeoff and Landing Altitude 8,400 feet pressure altitude for most airplanes.
9,500 feet pressure altitude for ships 636, 638, 640-641 and 68156817.

N2 Control Mode (757 Only) Takeoff in N2 control mode (ENG LIM PROT light illuminated) is not
permitted.

Reverse Thrust Reverse thrust is for ground use only.

Backing the airplane with reverse thrust is prohibited.

Runway Slope ± 2%

RVSM Altimeter Cross Check Limits Standby altimeters do not meet altimeter accuracy requirements of
RVSM airspace.
On the ground, the standby altimeter must be within ± 75 feet of the
Captain's and First Officer's altimeters.
The maximum allowable in-flight difference between the Captain’s and
First Officer’s altimeters for RVSM operation is 200 feet.
The maximum allowable difference between the Captain’s or First
Officer’s altimeter and field elevation is 75 feet at all field elevations.
The maximum allowable difference between the Captain’s and First
Officer’s altimeters on the ground varies by airplane and field
elevation, but if they are within 25 feet of each other they satisfy the
most restrictive condition.

Weather Radar Avoid weather radar operation in a hangar or within 50 feet (15.25
meters) of fueling operations or a fuel spill.
Avoid weather radar operation when personnel are within the area
normally enclosed by the aircraft nose radome.
The hangar recommendation does not apply to the weather radar test
mode.

7
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Weight Limitations Maximum weight limitations vary by airplane and tail number. Refer to
the Limitations section of Volume 1.
On the 757, if the main tanks are not full, center tank fuel may not
exceed 2,000 pounds.
On the 767, the center tank may contain up to 22,000 pounds of fuel
with less than full main tanks provided center tank weight plus actual
zero fuel weight does not exceed the maximum zero fuel weight and
center of gravity limits are observed.
On the 767ER, with the fuel jettison system installed and activated,
total fuel must not be less than 10,300 pounds in the main tanks.
Weights may be further restricted by field length limits, climb limits,
tire speed limits, brake energy limits, obstacle clearance, or enroute
and landing requirements.

8
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Maneuvers

NORMAL TAKEOFF PROFILE (Distant/ICAO NADP 2)

Confirm alignment with the intended departure runway on the HSI.
Release brakes and advance thrust levers until the command sector settles at approximately 1.1 EPR/70% N1.
Ensure that both engines are accelerating symmetrically and then simultaneously call for N1/EPR and continue
pushing the thrust levers forward toward the takeoff power setting. Maintain light forward pressure on the control
column until approximately 80 knots.
At approximately 70% N1/1.1 EPR: “N1” or “EPR” as appropriate. [PF]
Verify takeoff thrust is set by approximately 80 knots and adjust as necessary.
After takeoff thrust is set, the Captain’s hand must be on the thrust levers until V1.
At 80 knots: “80 knots, Throttle Hold, Thrust Normal.” [PM]
At appropriate speeds: “V1” and “Rotate.” [PM]
Rotate toward 15º nose up at 2 to 2½ degrees per second. Do not follow the flight director pitch bar. Early or rapid
rotation may cause a tail strike. Late, slow, or under-rotation increases takeoff roll.
After a positive rate of climb: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming a positive rate of climb on the altimeter: “Gear Up.” [PF]
Follow the flight director only after liftoff and away from the ground. The flight director initially commands
V2 + 15 knots or liftoff speed + 15 knots, whichever is greater.
Above 400' AGL: Verify LNAV or “Heading Select.” [PF] Call for Heading Select if necessary. LNAV is usually
armed before takeoff and will engage above 50' AGL and within 2.5 nm of the active leg, so action is usually not
necessary at this time.
For an immediate turn after takeoff, maintain initial climb speed with takeoff flaps while maneuvering.
At 1,000' AFE: “Climb Power.” [PF]
On a Flaps 15 or Flaps 20 takeoff, when 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
On a Flaps 20 takeoff, do not call for or select Flaps 15. Retract the flaps directly to Flaps 5.
At the first SWB with Flaps 5 and accelerating: “Flaps 1.” [PF]
At 20 knots below the second SWB with Flaps 1 and accelerating: “Flaps Up, After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]
(Sources: GS, Volume 1 Section 3.4.13, FCTM Chapter 3, Volume 2 Chapter 4)

SPECIAL TAKEOFF PROFILE (Close-In/ICAO NADP 1)

This is a common noise abatement takeoff in Asia and Europe.
Ensure “3000” is set on the ACCEL HT line on Takeoff Ref page 2. It should load automatically with the TDU.
At 1,500' AFE or as required by Company Pages: “Climb Power.” [PF]
Maintain V2 + 15 to V2 + 25 until 3,000' AFE and then follow the flight director to lower the nose and accelerate.
Retract the flaps on the speed schedule.
Engine failure, windshear or any non-normal affecting safety of flight cancels the noise abatement procedure.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 3.10.7)

TAKEOFF WITH VNAV INOPERATIVE

At 1,000' AFE: “Flight Level Change, Bug Clean Speed, Climb Power.” [PF]
Accelerate to clean speed and retract flaps on the speed schedule.
At 2,500' AFE: “Bug 250 knots.” [PF]
In Class B airspace, 250 knots may be used instead of clean speed at 1,000' AFE if desired.
(Sources: GS, FARs)

9
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
LOW ALTITUDE HOLD DOWN
If altitude capture occurs before the flaps are fully retracted on takeoff.
• if altitude capture occurs before CLB power is selected, the Thrust Management Computer will remain in
Takeoff, the autothrottles will remain in Throttle Hold, and the airplane will quickly accelerate and overspeed
the flaps unless pilot action is taken. Either manually retard the throttles to prevent flap overspeed or select
CLB power, bug clean speed, engage the autothrottles in SPD and then retract flaps on the speed schedule. The
callout for the latter option is:
“Climb Power, Bug Clean Speed, Autothrottles – Speed.” (CBS) [PF]
• if altitude capture occurs after CLB power is selected, the autothrottles will engage in Speed mode, the MCP
speed window will open to the current airspeed, and the autothrottles will retard to maintain the current
airspeed. In this case, simply rotate the speed bug to clean speed, ensure the autothrottles are in SPD mode and
retract the flaps on schedule.
In Class B airspace, 250 knots may be used instead of clean speed if desired.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 4.1.4, FARs)

FMS CLIMB PAGE ANOMALY

Occasionally, the FMC may erroneously sense an engine failure during single-engine taxi and trigger the FMS
Climb Page Anomaly after takeoff. This anomaly causes the Command Bug to slew to Vref + 80 knots (clean
speed), the Climb page to revert to a Vref + 80 climb, and prevents the selection of CLB thrust and VNAV. In
addition, fuel and time data will not display on the PROG or LEGS DATA pages. Flight Level Change and Vertical
Speed will function normally however.
To recover you must convince the FMS that both engines are operating (assuming they really are).
On the CLB page:
• select and execute the ALL ENG prompt
• if the ALL ENG prompt is not displayed
▪ select ENG OUT
▪ select ALL ENG and execute CLB thrust
▪ engage VNAV
(Source: GS, Volume 1 Section 5.11.8.8)

IF THE FLAPS OR SLATS DO NOT RETRACT AFTER TAKEOFF

After determining the flaps or slats have failed to move: “Flight Level Change, Bug 180 knots.” [PF]
Climb at 180 knots with existing flaps, complete the After Takeoff Checklist and then refer to the QRH.
180 knots is just an arbitrary airspeed that should be above V2 + 15 and is below Flaps 5, 15 and 20 limit speeds.
Other airspeeds may be used, provided both the minimum maneuvering speed and the flap limit speed for the
existing (not selected) flap and slat positions are protected.
(Source: GS)

10
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
REJECTED TAKEOFF
Prior to 80 knots, reject the takeoff for: After 80 knots and before V1, reject only for:
• Master Caution or Master Warning activation • engine failure
• system failures (not component failures) • fire or fire warning
• unusual noise or vibration • predictive windshear caution or warning
• tire failure • if the airplane is unsafe or unable to fly
• abnormally slow acceleration (“Fire, failure, fear or shear”)
• takeoff configuration warning
• a side window opening After V1, reject only:
• engine failure • if the airplane is unsafe or unable to fly
• fire or fire warning
• predictive windshear caution or warning Note: 80 KIAS is the boundary between a low-speed
• if the airplane is unsafe or unable to fly and a high-speed rejected takeoff.

11
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Indications for situations that would require a high-speed abort between 80 knots and V1:
• engine failure – the primary indication will be a directional control problem with supportive indications from
the engine instruments and EICAS messages. There may be a loud bang if the engine failure is preceded by a
compressor stall.
• fire or fire warning – an engine, APU, wheel well or cargo fire indication will be accompanied by Master
Warning lights, the fire bell and EICAS messages. A fire in the cockpit, cabin or lav will have smoke and
fumes as the primary indication, although 757-300 aircraft also have a LAV SMOKE light on the overhead
panel.
• predictive windshear (if installed) – a predictive windshear warning will be indicated by the Master Warning
light, the red windshear light on the center panel, red WINDSHEAR on the ADI and HSI, and the “Windshear
Ahead” aural warning. A predictive windshear caution will be indicated by an amber WINDSHEAR on the
HSI, an amber and black PWS symbol on the weather radar and the “Monitor Radar Display” aural alert. Be
aware that predictive windshear warnings are inhibited at 100 knots and will not display until 50' RA after
takeoff, so, therefore, a new predictive windshear warning can trigger an abort above 80 knots only if it occurs
between 80 and 100 knots. Furthermore, predictive windshear cautions are inhibited at 80 knots and will not
display until 400' RA, so a new predictive windshear caution cannot trigger an abort above 80 knots.
• airplane is unsafe or unable to fly – there is no definitive list so the Captain must evaluate each situation
individually, however EICAS indications should be used only as supportive information in conjunction with
other primary abnormal indications
• in summary, above 80 knots, abort only for severe directional control problems (engine failure), a fire warning,
predictive windshear or if the airplane won’t fly. EICAS messages alone should never be the only reason to
initiate a high-speed abort.

Indications for situations that normally would not require a high-speed abort above 80 knots:
• be aware that a component failure is not the same as a system failure. For example, a generator tripping off is a
component failure. An EICAS message would display, but the Master Caution light would not illuminate and
an abort below 80 knots would normally not be required. An AC bus off, however, is a system failure and
would illuminate the Master Caution light and require an abort below 80 knots.
• generator failure – the instruments will blank momentarily and numerous EICAS messages will appear, but
there will be no directional control problems or engine instrument abnormalities
• blown tire – a loud bang and light to moderate directional control problems without engine indication
abnormalities indicates a blown tire. Continue the takeoff unless an engine ingested parts of the tire causing an
engine failure or fire. Be alert for flap problems if an exploding tire damaged the flaps or slats.
• compressor stall – compressor stalls can be minor or severe. A severe compressor stall, indicated by a loud
bang, directional control problems and abnormal engine indications (basically, an engine failure), would
warrant an abort above 80 knots, but a few pops without supporting engine indications could be a blown tire or
some other problem. Continue the takeoff and figure it out at a safe altitude.
• flight deck window opening – a flight deck window opening does not warrant an abort above 80 knots.
Continue the takeoff, refer to the QRH and close the window at a safe altitude. Be aware it may be necessary to
completely open the window prior to closing.
• airspeed bugs not set – forgetting to set the airspeed bugs does not warrant an abort at any airspeed. The PM
should announce V1 and VR at the appropriate airspeeds and the PF should continue flying. If neither pilot
remembers V1 and VR, just rotate 5-10 knots prior to V2, which should be set on the Mode Control Panel.

12
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Captain actions:
• if the Captain is making the takeoff, announce “Abort!”
• if the First Officer is making the takeoff, announce “Abort, I have the aircraft!” and take positive control
• close the thrust levers and disconnect the autothrottles
• apply maximum manual braking or RTO braking
• apply maximum reverse thrust consistent with conditions
• raise the speedbrake lever if necessary. Speedbrakes should have extended when reverse thrust was selected.
The Captain also has the option to manually deploy the speedbrakes prior to selecting reverse thrust.
• continue maximum braking until certain the airplane will stop on the runway
• if maintaining directional control is difficult during reverse thrust operation, reduce thrust to reverse idle or
forward idle if required, regain control and then reapply reverse thrust as necessary. Do not attempt to maintain
directional control by using asymmetrical reverse thrust.

First Officer actions:

• if making the takeoff, maintain control until the Captain makes a positive control input and states “I have the
aircraft”
• verify thrust levers closed, autothrottles disengaged, max or RTO brakes applied and reverse thrust applied
• check speedbrakes and call “Speedbrakes Up” or “No Speedbrakes,” as appropriate
• call out any omitted items
• call out “80 knots”

Once the takeoff roll has begun, any movement of the thrust levers towards idle requires an RTO.
The Captain has sole responsibility for the decision to reject the takeoff and the decision must be made in time to
start the rejected takeoff maneuver by V1. The “80 knots” call on the takeoff roll is a clear announcement of
entering the high-speed regime where it is generally safer to continue.
The rejected takeoff procedure must begin no later than V1. There is no built-in decision or reaction time, therefore
the decision to stop must be made sufficiently prior to V1 for the procedure to begin no later than V1.
If operational, RTO braking will provide maximum braking if aborting above 85 knots ground speed. If aborting
prior to 85 knots, use manual braking.
Braking provides the primary stopping force and speedbrakes must be extended for efficient braking.
The braking action associated with an RTO is more severe than pilots experience in normal service.
For a rejected takeoff below 80 knots (before Throttle Hold), make sure the autothrottles are disconnected or else
they will advance to takeoff power when released unless reverse thrust was selected. For consistency, disconnect
the autothrottles on all rejected takeoffs.
Consider wind direction. Stop with any fire on the downwind side of the aircraft.
If fire trucks are requested, stop on the runway for easier evacuation and better access for fire trucks and rescue
vehicles. In many cases the airport authority must make a FOD sweep after an aborted takeoff anyway, so clearing
the runway right away might not help with traffic flow anyway.

Post RTO considerations:

• once stopping is assured, notify ATC and request fire trucks if needed. Fire trucks are recommended after a
high-speed abort in case of a brake fire.
• consider not setting the parking brake to facilitate brake cooling and reduce the possibility of brakes fusing, but
you may need to set the brakes to ensure the safety of ground personnel approaching the airplane or if directed
by the Evacuation checklist
• ensure the PAs to the flight attendants and passengers are completed (see below)
• accomplish any required memory items
• complete the non-normal checklist in the QRH for the condition that caused the rejected takeoff
• refer to “Rejected Takeoff – Post RTO Considerations” in Section 0 of the QRH
• refer to “Brake Cooling Following Rejected Takeoff” in the Abnormal section of the ODM
• ensure all passengers are seated, all doors are closed and ground personnel and equipment are clear before
taxiing
• complete the After Landing checklist
• refer to RTO Policy in Chapter 2 of the FOM

13
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Either the Captain, First Officer or Relief Pilot must notify the tower, request emergency equipment if necessary, and
make a PA to the flight attendants and passengers as soon as practical. The Captain should assign these duties
during the non-normals portion of his briefing.
• in low visibility conditions the tower might not see the RTO and might not stop operations on the runway or
roll fire trucks if you need them, so you must be sure to alert them with a radio call. The First Officer usually
makes this radio call since the Captain is now Pilot Flying and the First Officer should make the call only after
stopping is assured.
• the following PA is always required after a rejected takeoff: “This is the Captain. We have discontinued the
takeoff. Please remain seated with your seat belt fastened.” If assigned this duty, the First Officer or Relief
Pilot will identify himself as the Captain.
• if an evacuation is not required, make a second PA explaining the situation when conditions permit. If
emergency vehicles have been dispatched, advise the passengers they may be visible outside the aircraft.
• if an evacuation is required make the “Easy Victor, Easy Victor, Easy Victor” PA as part of the Evacuation
checklist, which directs the flight attendants to prepare for evacuation. That PA must be followed within 30
seconds with either an evacuation PA (“This is the Captain. Evacuate, evacuate.”) or a remain-seated PA (“This
is the Captain. Remain seated with your seat belt fastened.”) as described in the FOM Chapter 11 and Chapter
17.

Most domestic airports do not have a hot brakes area and brake cooling will occur at the gate. Check with local ops.
Ground crews should not approach the wheels from the side (i.e. do not face the wheel hubs).
Refer to “Brake Cooling Following Rejected Takeoff” in the Abnormal section of the ODM, not to “Brake Cooling
Following Landing.” Both are in the Abnormal section, so make sure you use the correct one. Use V1 for the abort
speed if the actual speed is unknown. If installed, it is acceptable to use the Brake Temperature Monitoring System
to determine brake cooling times.
Don’t forget normal checklists like the After Landing checklist after all RTOs and the Taxi and Before Takeoff
checklists if planning another takeoff.
Notify the dispatcher and Duty Pilot after all rejected takeoffs. Any rejected takeoff above 80 knots requires
approval from a Chief Pilot or the Flight Operations SOF through the Duty Pilot to continue.
If the rejected takeoff was for a mechanical problem, make a logbook entry and comply with the MEL if necessary.
The flight may continue after complying with all MEL restrictions and limitations. The logbook entry must
explicitly state an RTO was performed.
Be sure to file an ASR after all rejected takeoffs. Be aware that tower reports them to the FAA too.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 3.8, QRH Chapter 0, FOM Sections 2.3.14, 11.2.4 and 17.6)

PASSENGER EVACUATION (“Stop – Configure – Shutdown – Evacuate”)

Memorize the evacuation flow. Use the checklist on the back cover of the QRH if at all possible, but know the
correct steps of the flow in case the cockpit is dark or full of smoke.
• Stop – set the parking brake. Consider stopping with any fire on the downwind side.
• Configure – open the outflow valve (select Manual then Climb and hold until open)
• Shutdown – cut off both Fuel Control switches
• Evacuate – away from any fire. Notify the cabin to evacuate and advise the tower.
When using the checklist, upon hearing “Easy Victor,” the flight attendants will instruct the passengers to remain
seated and then prepare for evacuation (assume their stations, look out the windows for fire, turn on emergency
lights, etc.). The flight crew should shortly follow up the Easy Victor command with either the evacuation
command or the remain seated command. If there is no follow up command within 30 seconds, the flight
attendants will attempt to contact the flight deck for instructions. In a life threatening situation, flight attendants
may initiate an evacuation without instructions.
The correct follow-up PA for evacuation is “This is the Captain. Evacuate. Evacuate.” If certain exits are unusable
due to fire, etc., state the direction of egress, e.g. “This is the Captain. Using the right exits only, evacuate,
evacuate.” State the egress direction before using the word “evacuate” to help ensure it is heard and understood.
The correct follow-up PA if the evacuation is cancelled is “This is the Captain. Remain seated with your seat belt
fastened.”

14
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
As stated in the checklist, discharge engine or APU fire bottles if a fire warning occurs. In addition,
• if an engine fire warning light is not illuminated, but a fire indication exists or a fire is reported in or near an
engine, discharge both available fire bottle(s) into the affected engine
• if the APU fire warning light is not illuminated, but a fire indication exists or a fire is reported in or near the
APU, discharge the APU bottle(s)
• halon is designed to extinguish a fire and has very little or no fire prevention capability in the engine nacelles.
It dissipates quickly into the atmosphere so there is no reason to discharge the engine or APU fire bottles for
evacuations not involving fire indications near an engine or APU (e.g., cargo fire, bomb threat, etc.).
If evacuating at the gate, inform ramp personnel so they can assist.
It is not necessary to lower the speedbrakes or flaps as part of the evacuation checklist because the inboard spoilers
will automatically blow down when the overwing exits are opened on the 767. On the 757, the spoilers are too far
away from the exits to be a factor. Lowering the flaps is not necessary because the wing slides will deploy.
The First Officer and Relief Pilot (if installed) will exit from a forward exit and assist from outside. The Captain will
exit from a rear exit after all passengers are off, if possible. If smoke is present, the Captain should take a PBE and
fire extinguisher as he proceeds to the rear of the aircraft.
Move all passengers away from fire equipment, away from any possible fire or explosion and off paved surfaces.
Passengers will probably be milling around without direction, so think about how you will control them. As a
technique, after he has completed evacuation duties, consider assigning the First Officer the task of selecting a safe
location, standing on it and then motioning passengers toward himself. Have the flight attendants herd passengers
to the First Officer. It may also be convenient to have the First Officer on one side of the airplane, a flight
attendant or the Relief Pilot on the other side and herd the passengers into two groups.
Do not allow passengers to return to the aircraft or depart the site until directed.
The Captain will attempt to ascertain the location and status of all crewmembers and ensure that the appropriate
checklist (post-emergency, post-incident, or post-accident) is accomplished.
(Sources: GS, QRH Back Cover, QRH NNCI, FOM Section 17.6, FCTM Section 8.4 and 8.5)

STABILIZED APPROACH
A stabilized approach is defined as maintaining a stable speed, descent rate, and lateral flight path while in the
landing configuration.
To ensure a stabilized approach, arrive at 1,000' AFE fully configured and on speed with a stable descent rate and
thrust setting, and with the Landing checklist complete. To accomplish this:
• begin final configuration (lower landing gear, etc.) when descending through 2,000' AFE
• complete the Landing checklist by 1,000' AFE
At any altitude, if the following stabilized approach criteria cannot be established and maintained, initiate a go-
around. Do not attempt to land from an unstable approach.
• Descent rate should never exceed the current aircraft altitude. For example, passing 2000' AFE, the maximum
descent rate would be 2000 fpm, then reducing to 1,000 fpm by 1000' AFE
• No lower than 1000' AFE:
▪ be fully configured for landing with landing gear and landing flaps extended
▪ maintain a stabilized descent rate not to exceed 1,000 fpm
▪ be aligned with the intended landing runway
• No lower than 500' AFE:
▪ be on target airspeed
▪ the engines must be stabilized at the thrust setting required to maintain the desired airspeed and rate of
descent
• Crossing the Runway Threshold:
▪ positioned to make a normal landing in the touchdown zone
A circling maneuver and some published approaches, such as the River Visual at DCA, may require a planned
deviation to the lateral stabilized approach criteria and some published approaches require higher than standard
descent rates. Verbalize all planned deviations during the approach briefing.
In the event of a momentary descent rate exceedance, you may proceed as long as the exceedance is verbally
acknowledged and corrective action is initiated immediately.
The speedbrake may be used while fully configured, but it must be stowed by 1,000' AFE.
(Source: GS, Volume 1 Section 3.3.5)

15
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
TWO ENGINE GO-AROUND
On any approach, if a go-around appears likely, the go-around procedure should be verbally reviewed.
Any crewmember may call for a go-around and the call must be honored.
When a go-around is required: “Go Around, Flaps 20.” [PF]
Press a G/A switch and advance power. The autothrottles will engage if not already engaged unless the A/T ARM
switch is off. Ensure G/A is displayed on the ADI for pitch, roll and autothrottle modes.
Rotate toward 15º nose up and follow the flight director.
After setting flaps and verifying proper FMA annunciation: “Go-Around Verified.” [PM]
Both pilots should verify rotation to go-around pitch attitude, go-around thrust setting and proper FMA mode
annunciation. Verify thrust is sufficient for the go-around or adjust as necessary.
After a positive rate of climb: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming a positive rate of climb on the altimeter: “Gear Up.” [PF]
Maintain Vref 25/30 + speed additive (orange bug) minimum.
The pitch bar initially commands the MCP airspeed or the airspeed at the time of G/A engagement, whichever is
higher.
The roll bar initially commands the ground track at the time of G/A engagement.
The autothrottles provide at least a 2,000 fpm rate of climb. Be aware that Boeing expects the pitch bar to be
followed. If the pilot manually flies below the pitch bar the autothrottles may detect less than a 2,000 fpm climb
and continue to add power resulting in an overspeed.
If full thrust is required, manually advance the thrust levers to maximum go-around thrust.
Report the missed approach to ATC. [PM] If conditions permit, the PM should report the missed approach and
receive a clearance before the PF calls for a roll mode so you know whether to fly the published missed approach
procedure, runway heading, or some other clearance.
At 400' RA: “Heading Select” or “LNAV.” [PF] Call for the appropriate roll mode.
At 1,000' AFE: “Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
Set the airspeed command bug to Flaps 5 speed (first SWB) at 1,000' AFE and follow the flight director pitch bar as
it lowers the nose to accelerate. Do not call for or select Flight Level Change. Stay in G/A for pitch and power. (If
you’re pushing a square button on the MCP at 1,000' AFE on a go-around, you’re doing something wrong.)
At 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
“After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]
Verify the airplane levels off at the selected altitude and the proper airspeed is maintained.
Normally fly the missed approach with Flaps 5 and at Flaps 5 airspeed if returning to the destination airport for
another approach. The flaps may be fully retracted on the speed schedule if desired or if diverting to an alternate
airport, but Flaps 5 speed will keep the aircraft slow enough to enter holding at low altitude if necessary. The
maximum holding speed at 6,000' MSL and below is 200 knots. If diverting to an alternate airport, however, select
Flight Level Change or VNAV and Climb Power and fully retract the flaps on the speed schedule.
If executing a published missed approach procedure, make sure you set the correct missed approach altitude in the
MCP window. Occasionally there is an intermediate level off until a certain point or until intercepting a certain
radial before climbing to a higher altitude. In that case, setting the higher altitude in the MCP window will cause
the airplane to ignore the intermediate altitude and climb directly to the higher altitude since the pitch mode will be
G/A, resulting in an altitude bust. Initially set the lower altitude in the MCP window instead.
If executing a go-around from a visual approach, climb straight ahead and then follow ATC instructions. Normally
set the missed approach altitude from a backup instrument approach in the MCP window on visual approaches.
The autopilot will not engage in G/A mode. If the autopilot is engaged with the flight director in G/A for both pitch
and roll, it will engage in Vertical Speed and Heading Hold. If, however, another roll mode was engaged at
400' RA (e.g. Heading Select or LNAV), the flight director will be in G/A for pitch and the selected mode for roll.
In that case, when the autopilot is engaged, it will engage in Vertical Speed and the existing roll mode. In all cases,
make the necessary changes on the MCP to fly the correct vertical and horizontal path after engaging the autopilot.
The easiest method is to engage the autopilot and then immediately select Flight Level Change, assuming the
existing roll mode is still the one desired. Another method is to engage the autopilot and then immediately reselect
Go-Around and then the appropriate roll mode. Either way, you’ll be pushing buttons as soon as you engage the
autopilot.
(Sources: GS, Volume 1 Sections 3.3.6 and 3.4.19, FCTM Section 5.7, FOM Section 4.2.6, Volume 2 Chapter 4)

16
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
GO-AROUND FROM ABOVE ACCELERATION HEIGHT
A go-around initiated above 1,000' AFE without the missed approach altitude set in the MCP window can be
challenging and several techniques are available.
• On all approaches, selecting Go-Around will provide at least a 2,000 fpm climb and the ground track at time of
engagement. Other pitch and roll modes (e.g. Flight Level Change or Altitude Hold and Heading Select, LNAV
or LOC) may then be immediately selected as required. The correct missed approach altitude should be set in
the MCP window before pushing a G/A switch.
• On an ILS approach after the localizer is active but before the glideslope is captured, just select Heading
Select. Approach Mode will disarm and you can then follow ATC instructions.
• On an ILS approach after the localizer and glideslope are active, selecting modes other than Go-Around will
not exit Approach mode.
▪ The only way to exit Approach mode after both the glideslope and localizer are captured is to select Go-
Around or to disconnect the autopilot and cycle both flight directors Off then On. In the latter case, the
flight directors will re-engage in Heading Hold and Vertical Speed and other modes may then be selected as
appropriate.
▪ The preferred technique, however, is to press a Go-Around switch and then immediately press Altitude
Hold. The autopilot will remain engaged and the airplane will level off and maintain the present ground
track and present airspeed. Select LNAV to continue tracking the localizer to the missed approach point and
to fly the missed approach procedure or select Heading Select to fly a clearance issued by ATC. Set the
appropriate altitude in the MCP window and use Flight Level Change or Vertical Speed to climb or descend
to it. Use normal go-around procedures to raise the gear and flaps.
• On an RNAV or V/S approach, simply select Altitude Hold to level off and allow LNAV or LOC to continue
tracking toward the Missed Approach Point. Then set the missed approach altitude in the MCP window and use
Flight Level Change or Vertical Speed to climb or descend to it while honoring constraints on the approach.
Use normal go-around procedures to raise the gear and flaps.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 5.7.5.2)

ENGINE FAILURE ON TAKEOFF (V1 Cut)

At engine failure: Apply rudder to control the yaw. “Step on the good engine.”
At V2 and stable on the runway centerline, rotate to 12º to 13º nose up at a slightly slower than normal rotation rate.
Do not follow the flight director pitch bar during rotation. Early or rapid rotation may cause a tail strike. High
gross weights may require a lower pitch attitude (e.g. 10º nose up).
After a positive rate of climb: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming a positive rate of climb on the altimeter: “Gear Up.” [PF]
Maintain runway centerline visually until IMC or until passing the departure end of the runway.
Follow the flight director after liftoff and away from the ground and maintain V2 to V2 + 15. If an engine fails on
the ground, the pitch bar will command V2 or the airspeed at liftoff, whichever is higher, up to a maximum of
V2 + 15. The roll bar will command the ground track at time of lift off until another roll mode is selected.
Limit bank angle to 15º until airspeed is at least V2 +15. Bank angles up to 30º are permitted at V2 + 15 with takeoff
flaps.
At 400' RA: “Heading Select, Declare an Emergency and Request Runway Heading.” [PF] Call for the
appropriate roll mode and comply with the Company Page, if published. Be aware that Heading Select and runway
heading may not always be the correct path. Refer to Single Engine Notes later in this Study Guide for a
discussion of roll mode following an engine failure. If Heading Select is appropriate, it will be necessary to reset
the heading bug to runway heading if a different departure heading was pre-selected prior to takeoff.
After the airplane is stabilized and away from the ground, apply rudder trim as needed. Fifteen units of rudder trim
into the good engine is usually a good initial setting. The PF may set the rudder trim himself or direct the PM to
set it; however, if the PF directs the PM to set rudder trim, the PF should start moving the trim in the correct
direction first and then ask the PM to finish moving it to 15 units. This reduces the chances of the PM
inadvertently moving the trim in the wrong direction.
At 1,000' AFE: “Vertical Speed +200, Disarm VNAV, Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
Follow the flight director and lower the nose to accelerate.
The Pilot Flying should call for a vertical speed between 0 and +200 fpm depending on conditions. High gross
weights and/or high pressure altitudes may necessitate a vertical speed of zero to ensure acceleration. Bug Flaps 5
speed (SWB) at this time as an airspeed target.
On a Flaps 15 or Flaps 20 takeoff, when 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
17
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
At the first SWB: “Flight Level Change, Bug Flaps 5 Speed, Select and Set Continuous Power.” [PF]
The MCP airspeed will jump to the existing airspeed when Flight Level Change is pressed. Adjust to Flaps 5 speed
(first SWB) if necessary. The PM should select CON on the TMSP and manually adjust the operating throttle since
the autothrottles will be in Throttle Hold at this time and will not move. It is also acceptable to call for and bug an
airspeed a few knots above Flaps 5 speed to provide a pad in case you get a little slow when manually controlling
the throttle while maneuvering for the approach. For example, if Flaps 5 speed is 171 knots, call “Flight Level
Change, Bug 180, Select and Set Continuous Power.” Fly the proper airspeed on final approach however.
“Autothrottles Off, Autopilot On.” [PF]
The A/T ARM switch should be turned off prior to level off. Engage the autopilot after applying rudder trim. Always
use the highest level of automation available.
During level off, manually reduce power on the operating engine and adjust to maintain the desired airspeed. Rudder
pressure and/or rudder trim will change as power is changed. Ten units of rudder trim is recommended for level
flight.
Flaps may be retracted on the speed schedule if desired or if diverting to an alternate airport, but normally stay at
Flaps 5 if returning to the departure airport.
“After Takeoff Checklist, Engine Failure Checklist.” [PF] Refer to Single Engine Notes for a discussion of
checklist order.
Notify flight attendants, passengers, ATC and Flight Control (“two in, two out”) on downwind leg, time permitting.
After the approach is set up and briefed: “Descent Checklist, Approach Checklist.” [PF]
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 3.12)

SINGLE ENGINE GO-AROUND

On any approach, if a go-around appears likely, the go-around procedure should be verbally reviewed.
When a go-around is required: “Go Around, Flaps 5.” [PF]
Press a G/A switch and manually firewall the throttle if the EEC is protecting the engine. The A/T ARM switch
should be off at this time and the autothrottles will not engage.
Apply rudder as power increases if on a manual or single autopilot go-around. If making a multiple-autopilot go-
around from an ILS, the rudder is initially controlled by the autopilots, but be prepared to apply rudder at the first
change of either pitch or roll mode since autopilot rudder control will be terminated and the rudder will quickly
move to its trimmed position.
Rotate toward 12º nose up and follow the flight director.
Ensure G/A is displayed on the ADI for pitch and roll modes. The autothrottle mode should be blank.
After setting flaps and verifying proper FMA annunciation: “Go-Around Verified.” [PM]
After a positive rate of climb: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming a positive rate of climb on the altimeter: “Gear Up.” [PF]
Maintain Vref 20 + speed additive (orange bug) minimum.
The pitch bar initially commands the MCP airspeed or the airspeed at the time of G/A engagement, whichever is
higher.
The roll bar initially commands the ground track at the time of G/A engagement.
Report the missed approach to ATC. [PM]
At 400' RA: “Stay in Go-Around” or “Heading Select” or “LNAV.” [PF] Call for the appropriate roll mode. Be
aware that autopilot rudder control will be terminated at this time if another roll mode is selected during a missed
approach from a coupled ILS. Comply with engine-out missed approach or engine-out rejected landing procedures
on the Company Page, if published. Refer to Single Engine Notes for a discussion of roll mode on a single-engine
missed approach.
At 1,000' AFE: “Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
Set the airspeed command bug to Flaps 5 speed (first SWB) at 1,000' AFE or as published on the Company Page and
follow the flight director pitch bar as it lowers the nose to accelerate. Do not call for or select Flight Level Change;
stay in G/A for pitch. (If you’re pushing a square button on the MCP at 1,000' AFE on a go-around, you’re doing
something wrong.)
“After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]
Engage the autopilot after applying rudder trim if it’s not already engaged. Always use the highest level of
automation available. The autopilot will not engage in G/A mode however. If the autopilot is engaged with the
flight director in G/A for both pitch and roll, it will engage in Vertical Speed and Heading Hold. If another roll
mode was engaged at 400' RA (e.g. Heading Select or LNAV), the flight director will be in G/A for pitch and the
selected mode for roll. In that case, when the autopilot is engaged, it will engage in Vertical Speed and the existing
18
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 roll mode. In all cases, make the necessary changes on the MCP to fly the correct vertical and horizontal path after
engaging the autopilot. The easiest method is to engage the autopilot and then immediately select Flight Level
Change, assuming the existing roll mode is still the one desired. Another method is to engage the autopilot and
then immediately reselect Go-Around and then the appropriate roll mode. Either way, you’ll be pushing buttons as
soon as you engage the autopilot.
After the flaps are retracted to the desired position and at or above the flap maneuvering speed, select Flight Level
Change or VNAV. Continuous thrust may be selected if desired. Verify the airplane levels off at the selected
altitude and manually adjust thrust to maintain the proper airspeed.
Flaps may be fully retracted on the speed schedule if desired or if diverting to an alternate airport.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 5.6.15, Volume 2 Chapter 4)

SINGLE ENGINE NOTES

A takeoff alternate is required if the weather is below CAT I minimums.
After initial rudder input is applied on takeoff, lock your heel to the floor and hold. Initially keep the rudder constant
and control ground track with ailerons after airborne. Attempting to use both rudder and ailerons during the initial
climb on a V1 Cut can easily result in a nasty PIO at low altitude. Don’t go there.
To aid in aircraft control, do not rotate until heading is stable and airspeed is equal to or greater than VR. Rotation at
V2 is recommended. Use visual references to maintain runway centerline as long as possible.
During rotation, the rising nose will block airflow to the tail making the rudder less effective. Be ready for an
increase in yaw during initial rotation and apply aileron (preferred) or additional rudder as necessary.
Imagine a 747 waiting to cross the runway and don’t drift into it after airborne. Maintain runway centerline visually
and “fly through the goalposts” at the departure end.
Departure priorities after an engine failure on takeoff:
1. Company Pages – Engine Out Departure Procedure
2. ATC clearance
3. Depart on course
Departure priorities for an engine-out missed approach/rejected landing:
1. Company Pages Missed Approach/Rejected Landing table – Engine Out
2. ATC clearance
3. Published Missed Approach Procedure
If an engine fails, fly the correct path, declare an emergency and inform tower of your intentions.
Selecting the correct roll mode at 400' RA and flying the correct path after an engine failure can be critical for
obstacle clearance. Review and brief the Company Pages prior to every takeoff and every approach so you know
what roll mode to select and what path to fly if an engine fails. Do not just automatically fly straight ahead. LNAV
or Heading Select and a turn may be required to avoid terrain or restricted airspace (e.g. P-56 at DCA).
If obstacle clearance is not a factor, however, you can fly either runway heading or a straight-out departure. If you
fly runway heading you must maintain runway heading ±10º to meet Qualification Standards in the simulator. If
you fly a straight-out departure you must follow the extended runway centerline on the HSI ±10º. When hand
flying, flying runway heading is easier because you don’t have to compensate for wind. If you get off the heading
all you need to do is correct back to it. In contrast, if you fly a straight-out departure and get off the extended
runway centerline displayed on the HSI, you must correct back to the centerline and then compensate for wind to
stay on it. If multiple autopilots are engaged, as they usually would be during a single-engine missed approach
from an ILS, however, flying a straight-out departure is easier because you can leave the autopilot in G/A and it
will follow the ground track at time of G/A engagement, which should be pretty close to the runway centerline.
This avoids having to engage Heading Select or LNAV at 400' RA and losing autopilot rudder control which
would require rudder input to prevent the airplane from rolling. Of course, when another pitch or roll mode is
selected later in the missed approach or when the autopilot transitions to Altitude Capture approaching the missed
approach altitude, autopilot rudder control will be terminated and rudder input will be necessary, but that’s better
than at 400' AGL. As a technique, therefore, if obstacle clearance is not a factor, coordinate runway heading if an
engine fails on takeoff and coordinate a straight-out departure in the event of a missed approach if you’ll be flying
a single-engine ILS with the autopilot engaged, as you probably would in the real world.
Both the appropriate non-normal checklist and the After Takeoff checklist must be completed and the order is at the
Captain’s discretion and depends on the circumstances. For a simple engine failure, completing the After Takeoff
checklist first is recommended because you will catch configuration errors and it’s a more normal flow pattern. If
the engine is burning or surging, however, completing the Engine Fire or Engine Severe Damage or Separation
checklist or the Engine Limit or Surge or Stall checklist first would be more appropriate.
19
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
If an engine fails after takeoff below 1,000 feet AFE, apply rudder, lower pitch to approximately 10º nose up,
maintain V2 to V2 + 15 and apply normal V1 Cut procedures at 1,000' AFE (“Vertical Speed +200, Disarm VNAV
Bug Flaps 5 Speed,” etc.). Use caution for rapidly decreasing airspeed.
If an engine fails on climb out above 1,000 feet AFE, don’t do the V1 Cut procedures. Just apply rudder and lower
the nose to maintain the airspeed for whatever flaps are extended.
Use the autopilot on approach at least until reaching visual conditions. The autopilot and flight director are required
on all ILS approaches when the visibility is below RVR 4000 or ¾ mile and may be used until just prior to the
flare on a single-engine ILS if desired.
A CAT I approach (ILS or non-precision) to a hand-flown landing is the lowest authorized approach on single
engine. Autoland is not authorized with an engine inoperative.
To control airspeed, watch the little drum inside the airspeed indicator and manually adjust the thrust lever to make
the drum rotate or stop rotating as necessary. The airspeed drum provides better information than the airspeed
pointer. Also keep an eye on the Fast/Slow indicator in the ADI. The Fast/Slow indicator is anticipatory and will
show the airspeed trend before the airspeed actually changes.
Keep the rudder trimmed or the autopilot will disconnect and the airplane will roll abruptly. Watch the yoke angle,
which is a measure of autopilot aileron input, for indications of needed rudder trim and adjust as necessary. In the
simulator, however, it’s often difficult to trim the rudder and usually best just to set standard rudder trim settings
based on phase of flight. Set 15 units on climb out, set 10 units in level flight, and set 5 units on final approach.
The PF may ask the PM to set the rudder trim to 5, 10 or 15 units, as appropriate, but the PF should move the rudder
trim in the correct direction first so the PM doesn’t get confused and move it the wrong way. (It happens.)
The Fuel Config light will probably illuminate on downwind due to a fuel imbalance. The light must be noted and
the imbalance checked, but it is not necessary to balance the fuel. The airplane will be fully controllable even with
the imbalance so leave all the fuel pumps on and the fuel crossfeed valve closed. Don’t just open the crossfeed
valve and leave it open (like we used to do) because it’s possible for a strong pump on the wrong side to make the
imbalance worse. If diverting to another airport, however, balancing fuel enroute would be appropriate. Be aware
that if the Fuel Config EICAS message illuminates, it’s a Caution-level message and requires the QRH procedure
to balance the fuel. That is, if you notice a fuel imbalance prior to the EICAS message, you can just balance the
fuel on your own, but if the EICAS message illuminates, it requires the QRH. Not a big deal because you know
why there is a fuel imbalance, but you may get debriefed on it in the sim if you don’t use the QRH.
On a single-engine ILS, lower the gear and select Flaps 20 at 1½ dots on the glideslope.
The airplane will balloon when flaps are extended, especially when extending to Flaps 20. If hand flying, be ready to
compensate with forward control column pressure to maintain altitude. To meet Qualification Standards, you must
control the balloon and intercept the glideslope within 100 feet of your assigned glideslope intercept altitude.
If diverting, select and execute the ENG OUT prompt on the CLB or CRZ page.
On a single-engine missed approach from a coupled ILS, the autopilot is controlling the rudder. Rudder trim may be
pre-set to 15 units below 400' RA or to 10 units prior to level off so it will be approximately correct when rudder
control is terminated. If rudder trim is not preset, however, be ready to control the rudder manually when autopilot
control terminates.
ACARS automatically sends a message to the Company if a fuel control switch is moved to cutoff during flight.
Do not attempt to restart the engine unless a greater emergency exists.

Approximate Single Engine Rudder Trim Approximate Single Engine Power Settings
• 15 units on initial climb out • 757: 1.13 EPR on downwind, 1.08 EPR on final
• 10 units in level flight • 767 PW Engines: 1.21 EPR on downwind, 1.10 EPR on final
• 5 units on final approach • 767 GE Engines: 87% N1 on downwind, 69% N1 on final

20
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
ENGINE-OUT DRIFTDOWN
Engine-out driftdown procedures are required to be common knowledge.
Aviate
• A/T ARM Switch – OFF
• Continuous Thrust – press CON on the TMSP and firewall the good engine
• rudder trim – apply approximately 7 units of rudder trim into the good engine
• accomplish memory items, if required
• set MCP altitude to below engine-out driftdown altitude. Approximately FL200 may be used initially
• select the ENG OUT prompt on the FMS VNAV Cruise page and execute. Do not execute the ENG OUT
prompt prior to setting a lower altitude in the MCP window or the autopilot will engage in Altitude Hold, the
airplane will not descend, and the airspeed will decrease rapidly. If you make this error, just set the lower
altitude in the MCP window and press VNAV.
Navigate
• if accomplishing a driftdown in Oceanic airspace, enter an offset of R5 on the FMS Route page and execute
• if already deviating left of course for weather, an offset of L5 may be used
• update the desired speed and altitude in the FMS and on the MCP. The FMS and MCP should agree. If you
don’t make changes in the FMS, the airplane will level off at the FMS single-engine driftdown altitude instead
of at your planned altitude based on a 290 KIAS cruise.
• remain in Max Continuous Thrust after level off until the airplane accelerates to single-engine long range
cruise airspeed and then maintain airspeed with manual thrust adjustments
• accomplish the Driftdown checklist in QRH Section 0
• accomplish other QRH procedures as necessary
Communicate
• transmit MAYDAY or PAN-PAN three times on 121.5 and 123.45
• exterior lights – ON
• transponder – 7700 or as assigned
When conditions permit notify:
• ATC via CPDLC, VHF, HF or SATCOM
• Flight Control
• Flight Attendants (2 in, 2 out)
• Passengers
When below FL290 or after an ATC clearance is received:
• proceed to a diversion airport
• maintain a flight level ± 500 feet and do not exceed FL285 until an ATC clearance is received
A possible flow pattern for the initial steps is top-to-bottom, top-to-middle. That is, autothrottles off, set CON and
firewall the engine, apply rudder trim (top-to-bottom) and then set FL200, execute the driftdown, execute the
offset if necessary (top-to-middle). Then clean up with the Quick Reference Card and the QRH.
As a technique, the PF can turn off the A/T Arm switch, set Continuous thrust and apply rudder trim while the PM
can set the driftdown altitude on the MCP, start the driftdown in the FMS and start the R5 offset if required.
(Sources: GS, QRH Chapter 0, FCTM Section 4.2.10 & 8.3.7, Airway Manual Section 3.4.1, Quick Reference Card)

WINDSHEAR ESCAPE MANEUVER (“Push – Push – Click – Click”)

Less than a third of the 757/767 fleet has Predictive Windshear installed, but the entire fleet has a Reactive
Windshear system installed that warns when the airplane is actually in windshear.
See the section on Rejected Takeoff for a description of Predictive Windshear inhibits on takeoff.
During both takeoff and approach, a Predictive Windshear Caution indicates windshear within 3 miles and not
directly ahead of the airplane.
During takeoff, a Predictive Windshear Warning indicates windshear directly ahead of the airplane within 3 miles.
During approach, a Predictive Windshear Warning indicates windshear directly ahead of the airplane within 1.5
miles.

21
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
For a Predictive Windshear Caution (“Monitor Radar Display”), maneuver as required to avoid the windshear. If the
Caution occurs on takeoff roll, abort the takeoff.
For a Predictive Windshear Warning (“Windshear Ahead”):
• if on takeoff roll, abort the takeoff
• if after takeoff, perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver
• if on approach, perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver or a normal go-around at the pilot’s discretion

If windshear is encountered on takeoff prior to V1, there may not be sufficient runway remaining to stop if an RTO
is initiated at V1. If the decision is made to continue the takeoff, apply maximum thrust. At VR, rotate at a normal
rate toward a 15º pitch attitude. Once airborne, perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver.
If windshear is encountered near the normal rotation speed on takeoff and airspeed suddenly decreases, there may
not be sufficient runway left to accelerate back to the normal takeoff speed. If there is insufficient runway left to
stop, apply maximum thrust and initiate a normal rotation at least 2,000 feet before the end of the runway even if
airspeed is low. Higher than normal attitudes may be required to lift off in the remaining runway.
If windshear is encountered in flight, perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver.

The following are indications the airplane is actually encountering windshear:

• Reactive Windshear Warning (a two-tone siren followed by “Windshear, Windshear, Windshear”)
• unacceptable flight path deviations recognized as uncontrolled changes from normal steady state flight
conditions below 1,000 feet AGL in excess of any of the following:
▪ ± 15 knots indicated airspeed
▪ ± 500 fpm vertical speed
▪ ± 5 degrees pitch attitude
▪ 1 dot displacement from the glideslope
▪ unusual thrust lever position for a significant period of time

To perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver:

• Push – push either G/A switch. When engaged, go-around mode will automatically provide windshear
guidance on the flight director when necessary. An “airplane in windshear” warning is not required.
• Push – aggressively apply max thrust. Firewall if the EECs are protecting the engines. If terrain contact is
imminent, firewall the thrust levers even if the EECs are not protecting the engines.
• Click – disconnect the autopilot
• Click – disconnect the autothrottles. Do not push G/A again after the autothrottles are disconnected.
• simultaneously roll wings level, rotate toward 15º ANU and then follow flight director guidance
• retract the speedbrakes if extended but do not change gear or flap configuration
The order of steps above is slightly different than in the FCTM, but this is what the Training Department teaches
because it's a much more natural sequence and easier to remember. Besides, all steps should be completed
simultaneously, except that the G/A switch must be pushed prior to disconnecting the autothrottles. If a G/A switch
is pressed after the autothrottles are disconnected, the autothrottles will re-engage and reduce power, which you
seriously don’t want. If you make this error, just disconnect the autothrottles again and firewall the throttles. Make
sure you have full power.
The PM should call out the radio altitude and flight path trend. He should not call out the airspeed or actual vertical
speed, just the radio altitude in feet and whether the airplane is climbing or descending. (e.g. “Five hundred feet,
descending. Two hundred feet, climbing.”)
Do not attempt to regain lost airspeed until out of the windshear.
If following flight director guidance does not stop the sink rate and ground impact is a factor, increase pitch to
slightly below the PLI. The PLI indicates stick shaker and just below the PLI is L/D Max.
Respect the stick shaker. Intermittent stick shaker or initial buffet is the upper limit. Do not stall.
In reality, the flight director doesn’t know when the airplane is in windshear. It just has three go-around sub-modes;
speed, pitch and AOA. If the flight director can't maintain the requested airspeed with a 2,000 fpm climb at max
goaround thrust, it reverts to pitch mode, automatically pitches the aircraft to 15º ANU and disregards airspeed. If
it then senses a vertical speed of less than 600 fpm, it abandons 15º ANU and commands a pitch of one degree
below the PLI, if available. That's why it's important to follow flight director guidance during a windshear event in
order to properly manage the aircraft's energy. In addition, the flight director doesn't know where the ground is, so
it's important for the PM to call out any trend toward terrain. There is still that one degree of pitch below the PLI
the PF can use to avoid hitting the ground.

22
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
There are several techniques to return the airplane to normal flight when out of the windshear, but the important
thing is to fly the airplane and avoid overspeeding the flaps if you can.
One method for recovering from the Windshear Escape Maneuver is to:
• pull the throttles back approximately half way
• set the pitch to 15º ANU
• continue with what you were doing:
▪ if you encountered windshear on takeoff, continue with a normal takeoff. Call for “Climb Power” to break
Throttle Hold if necessary, gear up if necessary, and a roll mode such as LNAV or Heading Select at
400' AFE. Retract the flaps on the speed schedule.
▪ if you encountered windshear on final approach, continue with a normal go-around. Push a Go-Around
button, call "Go-Around, Flaps 20,” a roll mode at 400' AFE, and bug Flaps 5 speed when at 1,000' AFE.
Retract the flaps to Flaps 5 when 20 knots below the first single white bug.
• report the windshear using the word “PIREP” to make sure it gets disseminated
• complete the After Takeoff checklist
Another method that works following both windshear on departure and windshear on approach is to:
• pull the throttles back approximately half way
• set the pitch to 15º ANU
• “Climb Power”
• “Flight Level Change”
• "Bug (Speed)" Call for the desired airspeed in the MCP window based on flap setting
• retract the gear and retract the flaps on the speed schedule as necessary
• report the windshear using the word “PIREP” to make sure it gets disseminated
• complete the After Takeoff checklist
Using this technique, Climb Power will break Throttle Hold if the windshear occurred right after takeoff. Flight
Level Change and setting the desired airspeed (e.g. Flaps 5 speed) in the MCP window will reprogram the pitch
mode of the flight director to seek the altitude in the MCP window and reengage the autothrottles. Flight Level
Change will also use the 125 second rule to avoid large power increases or decreases, but be aware that Flight
Level Change will not protect you from overspeeding the flaps if you set the wrong airspeed or don’t follow the
pitch bar.
Retract the gear and flaps on the speed schedule using extreme caution not to overspeed the flaps since Flight Level
Change will not protect flap speeds.
Be aware that on a windshear recovery with the airplane in the landing configuration (Flaps 25 or 30), raising the
gear prior to retracting the flaps to 20 will cause a configuration warning siren. Try to remember to call for
Flaps 20 prior to raising the gear but if you get the warning siren, just retract the flaps and it will stop.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 7.14, Volume 1 Differences)

TERRAIN AVOIDANCE MANUEVER (“Firewall – 20 Degrees”)

If a Ground Proximity Caution of any kind occurs, immediately correct the flight path or initiate a go-around.
• Too Low Flaps and Too Low Gear Cautions always require a go-around
The below glideslope deviation alert may be cancelled or inhibited for:
• localizer or backcourse approach
• circling approach from an ILS
• when conditions require a deliberate approach below glideslope
• unreliable glideslope signal
Immediately accomplish the terrain avoidance maneuver for either of these conditions:
• a Ground Proximity “Pull Up” Warning of any kind
• unacceptable flight toward terrain

23
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
To execute the terrain avoidance maneuver, simultaneously:
• disconnect the autopilot and autothrottles. Make sure the autothrottles do not re-engage and reduce power.
• aggressively apply max thrust. Firewall if the EECs are protecting the engines. If terrain contact is imminent,
firewall the throttles even if the EECs are not protecting the engines.
• simultaneously roll wings level and initially rotate toward 20º ANU
• do not follow flight director commands and do not engage Go-Around mode
• retract the speedbrakes if extended, but do not change gear or flap configuration
• if terrain remains a threat, continue rotation up to the PLI or stick shaker or initial buffet
The PM should call out the radio altitude and flight path trend. He should not call out the airspeed or actual vertical
speed, just the radio altitude in feet and whether the airplane is climbing or descending. (e.g. “Five hundred feet,
descending. Two hundred feet, climbing.”)
If appropriate, a gentle turn (10-15° of bank) may be initiated toward lower terrain displayed on the HSI.
In all cases, intermittent stick shaker or initial buffet is the upper limit. Do not stall.
During RNAV (RNP) or RNP (AR) operations in close proximity to terrain on departure or approach, crews may
experience occasional momentary terrain Caution-level alerts. If these alerts are of short duration and have ceased,
crews should verify they are on the required path and consider continuing the procedure using LNAV and VNAV.
Depending upon where initiation occurs, the risks of terrain contact while executing a terrain avoidance maneuver
may be higher than continuing on the required track.
Terrain Warnings always require immediate action. The most appropriate crew actions regarding aircraft bank angle
and track during a terrain avoidance maneuver depend on where the maneuver is initiated.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 7.11)

TRAFFIC ALERT AND COLLISION AVOIDANCE (TCAS Advisories)

If a Traffic Advisory (TA) is received, immediately look for traffic using the traffic display as a guide, call out any
conflicting traffic and, if traffic is sighted, maneuver if needed. Maneuvers based solely on a TA may result in
reduced separation, however, and are normally not recommended.
With the exception noted below, compliance with an Resolution Advisory (RA) is required even if the subject
aircraft appears to be in sight and is deemed to be of no threat. There could be multiple threats and the aircraft
observed may not actually be the offending traffic. Compliance with a Resolution Advisory (RA) is always
mandatory unless doing so imposes a greater risk.
• Warning: A Descend RA issued below 1,000' AGL should not be followed
The RA maneuver is a pitch-only maneuver. Continue to follow the planned lateral flight path unless visual contact
with the conflicting traffic requires other action. If an RA occurs during an ATC breakout from a PRM approach,
however, follow the vertical guidance from TCAS and the lateral guidance from the controller.
Complying with RAs may result in brief exceedance of altitude and/or placard limits. However, even at the limits of
the operating envelope, in most cases sufficient performance is available to safely maneuver the aircraft.
Pilots are authorized to deviate from their current ATC clearance to the extent necessary to comply with a TCAS
Resolution Advisory. Inform ATC of a “TCAS RA” as soon as practicable after responding to the RA and then,
once clear of the conflict, advise ATC when you are returning to your previously assigned clearance or to a
subsequently assigned clearance. For example, “Clear of conflict, returning to (assigned clearance)” or “Clear of
conflict, reestablished (assigned clearance).”
Pilots should maintain situational awareness since TCAS may issue RAs in conflict with terrain considerations, such
as during approaches into rising terrain or during an obstacle limited climb. Continue to follow the planned lateral
flight path unless visual contact with the conflicting traffic requires other action.
Windshear, EGPWS, and stall warnings take precedence over TCAS advisories. If stick shaker or initial buffet
occurs during the maneuver, immediately accomplish the Stall or Approach to Stall procedure. If high speed buffet
occurs during the maneuver, relax pitch force as necessary to reduce buffet, but continue the maneuver.
The TA Only mode may be used only when:
• directed by a Company Page
• directed by a non-normal checklist
• directed by a flight plan remark
Pilot actions following a TCAS Advisory:
• Traffic Advisory (TA) – look for the intruder traffic and maneuver if necessary. Maneuvers based solely on a
TA may result in reduced separation, however, and are not recommended.
• Resolution Advisory (RA) – disengage the autopilot and autothrottles and smoothly adjust pitch and thrust to
comply with the required vertical speed. Maintain planned lateral flight path unless visual contact with the
24
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 intruder is established and maneuvering is required. When TCAS advises “Clear of Conflict” smoothly
maneuver back to the ATC-assigned altitude and reengage the autopilot and autothrottles. Do not follow flight
director commands during a Resolution Advisory until clear of the conflict.
• After a Climb RA in the landing configuration and when clear of the conflict, engage the autopilot if desired,
set the speed bug for the planned flap setting, call for “Flaps 20,” call for “Gear Up,” accelerate and retract
flaps on schedule. Complete the After Takeoff checklist.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 7.12, Volume 1 Section 4.3.4)

ILS PRM BREAKOUT

If ATC calls “Traffic Alert” during a PRM approach and directs a breakout:

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring

• disengage the autopilot and initiate a turn to the • turn off both Flight Directors (to exit APP mode)
heading specified by the controller • set the breakout heading and altitude on the MCP
• keep the autothrottles on • communicate with ATC as required
• initiate a climb or descent as directed • turn both Flight Directors back on
• if the maneuver requires a descent, do not exceed • select Heading Select and Vertical Speed of
1,000 fpm. Be aware the airplane may already be approximately ± 1,000 fpm
descending at 800 fpm on the glideslope.

After the airplane is established on the breakout heading and the PM has set the MCP:

Pilot Flying Pilot Monitoring

• reengage the autopilot if desired • make MCP and configuration changes as
• call for or set the speed bug to the appropriate requested by the Pilot Flying
airspeed for the planned flap setting
• call for Flaps 20 if the flaps are at 25 or 30
• call for Gear Up if the landing gear is down
• retract flaps on schedule to the desired setting
• call for the After Takeoff checklist

All breakouts must be hand flown with the autothrottles on.

If performing a descending breakout, delay cleaning up the aircraft until level at the breakout altitude.
If the controller breakout is accompanied by a TCAS Resolution Advisory:
• follow vertical guidance from the Resolution Advisory
• follow horizontal guidance from the controller
(Sources: GS, Volume 1 Section 4.3.4, FCTM Section 5.2.4)

RAPID DESCENT (“Spin – Push – Spin – Pull”)

This maneuver is designed to bring the airplane down smoothly to a safe altitude in minimum time with the least
possible passenger discomfort.
Be deliberate and methodical. Do not rush and do not be distracted from flying the airplane.
If the descent is performed because of a loss of cabin pressure, crewmembers should don oxygen masks and
establish crew communications at the first indication of loss of pressurization. Verify the cabin pressure is
uncontrollable and, if so, begin descent.
The PM should check the lowest safe altitude, notify ATC, obtain a descent clearance and an altimeter setting.
Hack the clock. Passenger oxygen lasts 12 minutes.

25
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Use of the autopilot is recommended and the autothrottles should be left engaged.
• Spin – spin the MCP altitude to a lower altitude. Use caution! The initial descent altitude over mountainous
terrain could be much higher than 10,000 feet.
• Push – push Flight Level Change
• Spin – spin the airspeed up to Mmo/Vmo and adjust to maintain a target speed of Mmo/Vmo.
• Pull – pull the speedbrake lever
Initiate a turn, if required, using Heading Select. If turn radius is a factor, manually select the required bank angle.
Complete the Cabin Altitude or Rapid Depressurization checklist in the QRH.
If structural integrity is in doubt, limit airspeed and avoid high maneuvering loads. Normally the landing gear is left
up but, if structural integrity is in doubt and airspeed must be limited, extending the landing gear may provide a
more satisfactory descent rate. Comply with landing gear placard speeds.
Use engine anti-ice and thrust as required if icing conditions are encountered.
Reduce airspeed to turbulent air penetration speed (290 KIAS/.78 M, whichever is lower) if severe turbulence is
encountered or expected.
When descending at speeds near VMO/MMO with the autopilot engaged, short-term airspeed increases above
VMO/MMO may occur. These are most often due to wind and temperature changes. These short- term increases
are acceptable for this maneuver and the autopilot should adjust the pitch to correct the airspeed to below VMO/
MMO. Do not disconnect the autopilot unless autopilot operation is clearly unacceptable. Any airspeed above
VMO/MMO should be documented in the aircraft logbook.
The lowest safe altitude is published for Critical Terrain Boxes, but for flights over other mountainous terrain (e.g.
the Rocky Mountains), Critical Terrain Boxes are not published and pilots must determine the initial lowest safe
altitude from the MEA or Grid MORA and then find a suitable low altitude airway with an MEA below 10,000
feet. ATC can help with that.
The PM should call out 2,000 feet above and 1,000 feet above the selected level off altitude.
Set the airspeed bug to Long Range Cruise or 300 knots before level off is initiated to aid in a smooth transition to
level flight.
Level off at the lowest safe altitude or 10,000 feet, whichever is higher, and maintain approximately 300 knots or
Long Range Cruise speed.
Make a PA when the descent is complete and oxygen is no longer required. Request cabin and passenger status.
On blended winglet airplanes, speedbrakes will autostow to the 50% flight detent if airspeed exceeds 330 knots
(757) or 320 knots (767). Do not override the autostow function unless airspeed is less than 325 knots (757) or 315
knots (767).
To avoid overspeeding the airplane, use caution when retracting the speedbrakes during descent or level off when
close to Mmo/Vmo. Retract the speedbrakes very slowly or, preferably, reduce airspeed first and then retract the
speedbrakes.
(Sources: GS, FTCM Section 7.5)

ALL-ATTITUDE UPSET RECOVERY STRATEGY (“Push – Roll – Power – Stabilize”)

The All-Attitude Upset Recovery Strategy is a detailed and organized plan of action designed to assist pilots in the
recognition and recovery from loss of control in flight or stalled conditions, collectively referred to as an “upset.”
An upset can generally be defined as unintentionally exceeding the following conditions:
• pitch attitude greater than 25° nose up, or
• pitch attitude greater than 10° nose down, or
• bank angle greater than 45°, or
• within above parameters but flying at airspeeds inappropriate for the conditions
An aircraft stall is characterized by one or more of the following conditions:
• stall warning
• buffeting, which could be heavy
• lack of pitch authority
• lack of roll control
• inability to arrest descent rate

26
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
In the event of an upset or stall:
• RECOGNIZE and CONFIRM the aircraft is in an undesirable state and outside normal parameters before
accomplishing the recovery
• VERBALIZE. Any pilot will verbalize “Upset, Recover” when an upset is recognized. The PF will then
verbalize “Push, Roll, Power, Stabilize” as each step is accomplished during the recovery. The PF should
hesitate momentarily after each step is verbalized to assess the need before executing it. In some cases, a step
will not be necessary and should be verbalized and assessed, but not accomplished.
• RECOVER using the All-Attitude Upset Recovery Strategy:
▪ Disconnect the autopilot and autothrottles. Do not use the flight director.
▪ Push forward on the yoke to reduce the angle of attack. Unload until you feel a slight lightness in the seat
which approximates +0.5 G. Reducing the angle of attack allows a stalled wing to regain lift and prevents
asymmetric G loading. Furthermore, the aircraft rolls much faster when unloaded.
• If pitch control inputs are ineffective during a nose-high recovery, bank angles not to exceed 60° may be
used to obtain a nose-down pitch rate
▪ Roll to the nearest horizon only after unloading to +0.5G. Maintain +0.5 G and do not roll and pull. The
horizon and a little blue or brown will always be visible in the ADI, so roll to parallel the horizon. Rudder
is usually not necessary, but, if aileron control is ineffective, careful use of the rudder to aid roll control and
suppress yaw should be considered, however, rudder that is applied quickly or held too long may result in
loss of lateral and directional control and cause structural damage.
• Warning: Rudder reversals (rapid full rudder deflection from side to side) can quickly lead to
overstressing the aircraft and should be avoided
▪ Power. Assess the aircraft’s energy state and add or reduce power as necessary. Be aware that adding power
during a nose-high upset will cause a pitch up moment due to the underwing mounted engines and may
aggravate the upset. Speedbrakes may be required in a nose-low, rapidly increasing airspeed situation.
▪ Stabilize by setting an appropriate pitch and power setting until stable flight is obtained. Once obtained, the
PF should assess the aircraft configuration and adjust speedbrakes, trim and configuration as necessary.
Both pilots should ensure the recovery is complete and the aircraft is stabilized before addressing why the
upset occurred.
Altitude loss should not be a primary consideration during upset or stall recovery. During nose-high recoveries it
may be necessary to lower the nose below the horizon in order to obtain a safe airspeed. Stay within transport
category G limits to avoid overstressing the aircraft.
The PM should call out airspeed and altitude trends and any trend toward terrain contact.
Post recovery considerations:
• consider declaring an emergency
• turn on landing lights
• coordinate a new clearance with ATC
• assess the condition of cabin crew and passengers
• consider the structural integrity of the aircraft
• consider a diversion and coordinate with dispatch
• make a PA
• complete Normal and Non-Normal Checklists as appropriate
• for guidance on aircraft accidents/incidents, refer to FOM, Chapter 2, Accidents, Incidents and Irregularities
See FCTM Chapter 7 for additional information.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Section 7.7)

27
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
SMOKE AND FUMES
At the beginning of any smoke, fire or fumes event crews should always consider the following:
• protecting themselves (e.g. oxygen masks)
• communicating (flight attendants and ATC)
• diverting
• assessing the situation and available resources
If smoke, fire or fumes are associated with an annunciated checklist (e.g. cargo fire), accomplish that checklist
prior to the Smoke, Fire or Fumes checklist or the Smoke or Fumes Removal checklist.
Many smoke, fire or fumes events involve aircraft equipment or materials readily accessible. Rapid, positive
extinguishing of the source is the key to preventing escalation of the event. Confirmation that the situation has
been resolved is critical. Do not consider flight continuation unless the source is positively identified, confirmed to
be extinguished and the smoke and/or fumes are decreasing.
It may not always be possible to accurately identify the smoke, fire or fumes source due to ambiguous cues, such as
multiple sources. It also may not be possible to determine the difference between electrical smoke/fumes and air
conditioning smoke/fumes by sense of smell. The source identification and elimination steps in the Smoke, Fire or
Fumes checklist will systematically remove the most probable sources.
Indiscriminate depowering of airplane systems is not likely to benefit an unknown smoke, fire or fumes situation.
Such action significantly reduces airplane capabilities without commensurate likelihood of depowering the source.
Warning: Do not activate the passenger oxygen system. It provides no smoke protection for passengers as it mixes
oxygen with cabin air and it is an extreme fire hazard.
Pilots should remain at their stations to fly the aircraft, coordinate with ATC, and accomplish the checklists. The
incapacitation of a pilot fighting a fire would seriously complicate the situation.
After making a preliminary assessment of the smoke, fire or fumes source, the flight crew is reminded that a
diversion may be necessary. Landing at the nearest suitable airport is required if smoke or fire continues. For
smoke that continues or a fire that cannot be positively confirmed to be completely extinguished, the earliest
possible descent, landing and evacuation must be accomplished.
It must be stressed that for smoke that continues or a fire that cannot be positively confirmed to be completely
extinguished, the earliest possible descent, landing, and evacuation must be done.
If a smoke, fire or fumes situation becomes uncontrollable, the flight crew should consider an immediate landing.
Immediate landing implies immediate diversion to a runway. However, in a severe situation, the flight crew should
consider an overweight landing, a tailwind landing, an off-airport landing, or a ditching.
The flight crew should don the oxygen mask anytime smoke, fire or fumes are detected on the flight deck. If smoke,
fire or fumes are detected in another part of the aircraft, flight crew judgment will determine if and when the
oxygen masks are donned.
For a cabin smoke, fire or fumes situation, continuous communications between the flight crew and a designated
flight attendant is essential. Flight attendants should be directed to inspect the entire cabin in an attempt to locate
the smoke, fire or fumes source. Passengers should be moved away from the source.
Without delay or analysis, perform the initial steps of the Smoke, Fire or Fumes checklist to remove the most
probable sources. The flight crew should attempt to identify and eliminate the source, and visually confirm it is
extinguished and the smoke and/or fumes are decreasing.
The Smoke or Fumes Removal checklist should be accomplished only when the smoke or fumes are the greatest
threat or when the source is confirmed to be extinguished. The Smoke or Fumes Removal checklist may change
the airflow and make the situation worse by fanning or masking the ignition source.
(Sources: GS, FCTM Sections 8.12 and 8.13, QRH NNCI 1.3)

28
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
PILOT RESPONSES TO WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

Condition Response

Ground Proximity Caution Immediately adjust the flight path or initiate a go-around. "Too
Multiple Advisories Low Gear" and "Too Low Flaps" Cautions always require a
goaround.

Ground Proximity Warning Immediately accomplish the Terrain Avoidance Maneuver

“Pull Up”

Predictive Windshear Caution Prior to V1 Abort the takeoff

“Monitor Radar Display”

Predictive Windshear Warning Prior to V1 Abort the takeoff

“Windshear Ahead”

Predictive Windshear Caution After Takeoff Maneuver as required to avoid the windshear
“Monitor Radar Display”

Predictive Windshear Warning After Takeoff Perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver
“Windshear Ahead”

Predictive Windshear Caution on Approach Maneuver as required to avoid the windshear

“Monitor Radar Display”

Predictive Windshear Warning on Approach Perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver or a normal go-
“Go-Around, Windshear Ahead” around at the pilot’s discretion

Windshear Encounter Perform the Windshear Escape Maneuver

Microburst Alert Issued by ATC Mandatory go-around. Accomplish the Windshear Escape
for the Landing Runway Maneuver if the flight path becomes marginal.

(Sources: FCTM Sections 7.11.1, 7.14.7, 7.14.8 and 7.14.5, AM 5.2.14)

29
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Callout Summary
NORMAL TAKEOFF PROFILE
At 70% N1/ 1.1 EPR minimum: “N1” or “EPR.” [PF]
At 80 knots: “80 knots, Throttle Hold, Thrust Normal.” [PM]
At appropriate speeds: “V1” and “Rotate.” [PM]
After baro altimeter increase: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming baro altimeter increase: “Gear Up.” [PF]
At 400' RA: Verify LNAV or “Heading Select.” [PF]
At 1,000' AFE: “Climb Power.” [PF]
On a Flaps 15 or Flaps 20 takeoff, when 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
At the first SWB with Flaps 5 and accelerating: “Flaps 1.” [PF]
At 20 knots below the second SWB with Flaps 1 and accelerating: “Flaps Up, After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]

TAKEOFF WITH VNAV INOPERATIVE

At 1,000' AFE: “Flight Level Change, Bug Clean Speed, Climb Power.” [PF]
At 2,500' AFE: “Bug 250 knots.” [PF]

IF FLAPS DO NOT RETRACT AFTER TAKEOFF

“Flight Level Change, Bug 180 knots.” [PF]

LOW ALTITUDE HOLD DOWN

“Climb Power, Bug Clean Speed, Autothrottles – Speed.” [PF] (CBS)

TWO ENGINE GO-AROUND

“Go Around, Flaps 20.” [PF]
“Go-Around Verified.” [PM]
After baro altimeter increase: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming baro altimeter increase: “Gear Up.” [PF]
At 400' RA: “Heading Select” or “LNAV.” [PF]
At 1,000' AFE: “Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
At 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
“After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]

ENGINE FAILURE ON TAKEOFF (V1 Cut)

After baro altimeter increase: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming baro altimeter increase: “Gear Up.” [PF]
At 400' RA: “Heading Select, Declare an Emergency and Request Runway Heading.” [PF]
At 1,000' AFE: “Vertical Speed +200, Disarm VNAV, Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
On a Flaps 15 or Flaps 20 takeoff, when 20 knots below the first SWB and accelerating: “Flaps 5.” [PF]
At the first SWB: “Flight Level Change, Bug Flaps 5 Speed, Select and Set Continuous Power.” [PF]
“Autothrottles Off, Autopilot On.” [PF]
“After Takeoff Checklist, Engine Failure Checklist.” [PF]
“Descent Checklist, Approach Checklist.” [PF]

SINGLE ENGINE GO-AROUND

“Go Around, Flaps 5.” [PF]
“Go-Around Verified.” [PM]
After baro altimeter increase: “Positive Rate.” [PM]
After confirming baro altimeter increase: “Gear Up.” [PF]
At 400' RA: “Stay in Go-Around” or “Heading Select” or “LNAV.” [PF]
At 1,000' AFE: “Bug Flaps 5 Speed.” [PF]
“After Takeoff Checklist.” [PF]

30
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Autoland

Flaps Extended • Arms Go-Around

• Displays Pitch Limit Indicator
• Ignition to selected igniters if Auto is selected on the Engine Start Panel

Approach Mode Selected • Arms G/S and LOC

• Arms the two remaining autopilots
• Bus separation (The center autopilot is powered by the battery/standby system
instead of the left main system.)

Localizer Capture • MCP heading and HSI heading bug slew to the inbound course
• ILS frequency change is inhibited
• ADI LOC scale expands when within ½ dot of the Localizer

Glideslope Capture • Arms Go-Around if G/S capture precedes flap extension

• ILS frequency change is inhibited if G/S capture precedes LOC capture

1500' RA • The two remaining autopilots engage

• Flare and Rollout armed
• Autopilot rudder control engages
• LAND 2 or LAND 3 is displayed on the ASA

500' RA • Runway alignment begins. The autopilot will de-crab the airplane.

330' RA • On the 757-200, two units of nose-up trim are applied if LAND 2 is
annunciated. (100' RA on the 757-300 and 767)

200' RA • Rising Runway symbol comes into view

• Bus Isolation (In the event of a generator failure, the Bus Tie Breakers prevent
a single generator from powering both the left and right AC busses. The
affected bus and autopilot remain unpowered unless the APU is running.)
• ASA is inhibited from changing to NO LAND 3, but can change to NO
AUTOLAND

45' RA • Flare Capture on the 757 (50' RA on the 767)

25' RA • Autothrottles retard to idle on the 757-200 (30' RA on the 757-300 and 15' RA
on the 767)

5' RA • Rollout Capture

• Autopilot levels the wings
• Go-Around inhibited after 2 seconds at 5' RA or below

31
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Touchdown • Autothrottles disengage when reverse thrust is selected
• Rollout mode remains active until autopilots are disengaged. The autopilots use
rudder and nosewheel steering to track the runway centerline.

32
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Facts and Figures
References
V = Volume 1 T = FCTM
II = Volume 2 Q = QRH
F = FOM AIM = Aeronautical Information Manual
A = Airway Manual GS = Ground School/Other

ACARS Arrival Page Data on the Arrival page must be entered within seven minutes of V 5.4.5.2
the In time or it will be lost.
ACARS Delay Codes When a delay occurs and station personnel require feedback from V 5.5.3.2
the flight crew, an uplink message will be sent to the flight via
ACARS 20 minutes after takeoff. Pilots must respond to these
messages. Procedures and codes are in the FOM.
ACARS Digital ATIS If the Digital ATIS altimeter setting numeric value (e.g. 29.82) and V 5.5.2.2
alpha value (e.g. two niner eight two) are different, the crew
must not accept the altimeter setting.
ACARS Inop When ACARS is inoperative, pilots should report out, off, on and F 4.1.1.1
in times, fuel, and position reports through Atlanta Radio using
the format specified in the Airway Manual.
ACARS Inop If takeoff data is required after pushback and ACARS is inop, F 14.7.5
contact the dispatcher for a phone patch to the load planner to
obtain takeoff data for a full power takeoff for one runway and
one flap setting.
ACARS Position Reports Do not send ACARS position reports manually prior to actually GS
crossing the fix or crossing abeam the fix because the report will
be rejected and flight status will not be updated.
ACARS Printer Inop If the ACARS printer is inoperative, pilots may obtain a hard copy F 14.7.3.2
WDR from the gate agent prior to closing the cabin door.
Advising the agent of this requirement early may avoid
unnecessary delay.
Alternatively, the crew may push without a paper WDR as long as
all data can be accurately interpreted on the ACARS display
screen.
Active Waypoint Monitoring Anytime the aircraft is flown in an FMS Nav mode, at least one V 3.3.2
pilot will have the map displayed on the HSI. If the distance is
greater than 320 miles, verify the active waypoint on the
MCDU.
During descent and approach, the map display should have the
active waypoint visible.

33
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Administrative Duties Tasks of an administrative nature (tasks that are not time critical F 10.3.3
and that will distract a crewmember from effectively monitoring
the flight path) should be completed during periods of low
workload. Operationally this means crews should avoid
administrative tasks from takeoff to top of climb and from top of
descent until clear of all runways.
No administrative tasks should be performed after landing until
clear of all active runways. Operational necessity may require
administrative tasks to be performed at a time other than low
workload. This should be understood as the exception and not
the rule.
On flights with relief pilots, an augmented crewmember may
complete administrative tasks during low workload, non-sterile
periods at the discretion of the Captain.
ADS-C and ADS-B ADS-C provides ATC with information about an aircraft's position A 6.3.5
and route conformance using data derived directly from the
FMS and mode control panel using the ACARS network. If the
data link connection is interrupted or momentarily lost and
ADS-C and/or CPDLC disconnects, attempt to logon again. If
unable to re-establish the ADS-C connection, advise ATC and
comply with VHF/HF voice position reporting requirements.
Crews should monitor ADS-C connection when transiting into a
new ATSU. A 6.3.6
ADS-B is transponder-based surveillance technology that supports
radar-like separation standards. ADS-B, though similar in name,
has no commonality with ADS-C, and requires no logon or crew
action. The information transmitted by ADS-B is totally
independent from that transmitted as a result of ADS-C/CPDLC
operations.
Aircraft Control The Captain will ensure the aircraft is under the direct control of F 4.2.1
one pilot at all times. The use of the autoflight system does not
alter this requirement.
Planned transfer of control should occur prior to top of descent in
conjunction with the approach briefing.
During transfer of aircraft control:
• the pilot relinquishing control will state, “You have the
aircraft.”
• the pilot assuming control will state, “I have the aircraft.”
For all approaches, the PF should have a hand on the thrust levers
below 1,000 feet AGL, except as necessary for the performance
of other duties.
No person other than the Captain, First Officer, authorized Relief
Pilot, or line check pilot will manipulate the flight controls
during revenue operations.
Aircraft Depowering At the Captain’s discretion, the aircraft may be temporarily F 28.3.2
depowered at the gate or on a taxiway for a maintenance action
provided pre-coordination is completed with the flight
attendants and a PA is made to the customers. At the gate with
the boarding door open, emergency light activation is
recommended. Off the gate or with the boarding door closed,
emergency lights are required to be illuminated.
Airport Elevation The highest point on an airport’s usable runways measured in feet AIM PCG
above mean sea level.

34
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Airport Reference Point The approximate geometric center of all usable runway surfaces. AIM PCG
Airspeed Bugs: Landing DWB at Vref 25/30 and SWBs at Vref 30 + 40 and Vref 30 + 80. V 3.4.15
Vref 25/30 plus any applicable wind additives in the IAS/MACH
window.
Airspeed Bugs: Non-Normals If a non-normal checklist requires a final approach airspeed GS
different from our normal Flaps 25 or Flaps 30 airspeed (e.g.
single engine or a flap/slat problem), set the airspeed bugs as
soon as you read about it in the QRH so you don’t inadvertently
set the wrong airspeed later.
Airspeed Bugs: Takeoff V2 in the IAS/MACH window. V 3.4.10
SWBs at V1, VR, Vref 30 + 40 and Vref 30 + 80.
Airspeed Bugs: Wind T 1.6.4
Additives Vref 25/30 + 5. The autothrottles will automatically increase speed
Autolanding for gusts if needed.

Half the steady headwind component plus all the gust not to
Not Autolanding exceed Vref 25/30 + 15 with Vref + 5 minimum. (For example,
for a 90º crosswind, the headwind component is zero, but you
still add all the gust, up to 15 knots.) This applies even with the
autothrottles on during the approach if they will be turned off for
landing.

Tailwinds Do not apply wind additives for steady tailwinds or tailwind gusts.
Set the command bug at Vref 25/30 + 5 for with autothrottles
engaged or disengaged.
T 1.6.5
Non-Normals Do not apply wind additives to the adjusted non-normal approach
speed if the autothrottles will be used for landing.
If the autothrottles will be off for landing, wind additives (5 knots
minimum, 15 knots maximum) are also added to approach
speeds adjusted by a non-normal procedure.
Airspeed Changes Notify ATC for any change in true airspeed when it varies by 5% F 4.2.9.3
or 10 knots, whichever is greater.
Airspeed Limit To prevent overspeeds, crews should adjust airspeed or Cost Index T 1.6.2
to maintain a 10 knot buffer from Vmo/Mmo and flap placard
speeds.
Airspeed Limits (US) Be aware of the 200 KIAS/clean speed restriction if being radar GS
vectored for an approach and the controller says you will
temporarily leave Class B airspace. If there is Class B airspace
above you (and there usually is), your max speed is 200 KIAS or
clean speed. You may have to slow down.
Airspeed Limits (US) 250 KIAS below 10,000' MSL within 12 nm of the coast. A 10.2.2
200 KIAS, or minimum speed if greater than 200 knots, at or
below 2,500' AGL within 4 nm of the primary airport in Class C
or D airspace. (Use caution at OGG.)
200 KIAS or clean speed or minimum speed, whichever is greater,
below Class B airspace or in a Class B VFR corridor.
Airway Course For airways, the displayed FMS course may not be identical to the V 5.11.7.7
charted value.

35
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Alternate Airport After Takeoff FAR 121 does not prohibit a flight from continuing to its F 14.1.5.3
destination without an alternate once the flight has departed and
weather conditions deteriorate to the point where an alternate
would have been required for dispatch. The Captain and
dispatcher must discuss the situation and agree to continue to the
destination however. Amending the release to add an alternate is
highly desirable, however.
Alternate Airport Estimate Enter the alternate as the Destination on Progress page 1. V 5.11.7.4
Estimates are for present position direct.
Alternate Airport Minimums Alternate planning for use of GPS approaches must be based on a A 4.1.4
single navigation facility even if there are two or more GPS
approaches to different suitable runways.
Alternate Airport Minimums If the alternate airport has one navigational facility providing a A 4.1.4
straight-in non-precision, CAT I precision, GPS or circling
approach from an IAF, add 400 feet to the MDA or DA and add
1 sm or 1600 m to the visibility minimum.
If the alternate airport has at least two straight-in approaches to
different suitable runways, add 200 feet to the higher DA or
MDA of the two approaches used and add ½ sm or 800 m to the
higher visibility minimum of the two approaches used.

36
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Alternate Airport F 14.1.4
Requirements A takeoff alternate is required anytime a flight is unable to return
Takeoff Alternate to the departure airport for a CAT I approach (precision or non-
precision) or better. The alternate must be within one hour in
still air with an engine out.

A driftdown alternate is required when the aircraft is unable to

Driftdown Alternate clear all terrain along the intended route by 1,000 feet with an
engine inoperative.

Weather minimums for filing alternates will be derived using the

Alternate Airport Weather Alternate Airport Minimums tables in Airway Manual Section
Minimums 4.1. If there is no applicable IFR approach, forecast ceiling and
visibility must permit a descent from the MEA under VFR
conditions.
F 14.1.5
Alternate Required An alternate is required when the weather is below No Alternate
Required minimums and Exception 10332 cannot be applied,
thunderstorms are in the forecast (optional) or arriving at a
European airport with a single usable runway at the expected
time of arrival.
Some destinations will always have an alternate due to airport or
theater characteristics.
No Alternate Required
Domestic
No alternate is required if, for the ETA ±1 hour, the ceiling is
reported or forecast to be at least 2,000 feet and the visibility is
reported or forecast to be at least 3 sm. (“1-2-3” rule.)
International
6 hours or less
No alternate is required if, for the ETA ±1 hour, the ceiling is
reported or forecast to be at least 2,000 feet or 1,500 feet above
the lowest HAT/HAA, whichever is greater, and the visibility is
reported or forecast to be at least 3 sm or 2 sm above the lowest
required visibility, whichever is greater.
Some authorities require an alternate regardless of flight time
however.
When dispatched under Ops Specs B044, an alternate may not be
International required if the redispatch segment is under six hours.
More than 6 hours

International flight segments planned for longer than six hours

Exemption 10332 CAT I require a destination alternate, regardless of weather.
Domestic Only
No alternate is required if, for the ETA ±1 hour, the ceiling will be
at least 1,000 feet above the airport elevation, the visibility will
be at least 3 sm, a CAT I ILS is available, no thunderstorms are
Exemption 10332 CAT II/ forecast, and forecast winds will allow a CAT I approach.
III
Domestic Only No alternate is required if, for the ETA ±1 hour, the ceiling will be
at least 1,000 feet above the airport elevation, the visibility will
be at least 2 sm, a CAT II or CAT III ILS is available, no
thunderstorms are forecast, and forecast winds will allow a CAT
II/III approach.

37
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Alternate Airport No alternate is required if the flight is scheduled for not more than F 14.3.3.6
Requirements six hours and, for at least one hour before and one hour after the
International estimated time of arrival at the destination airport, the
appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or any combination of
them, indicate the ceiling will be:
• at least 1,500 feet above the lowest circling MDA, if a
circling approach is required and authorized for that airport,
or
• at least 1,500 feet above the lowest published instrument
approach minimum or 2,000 feet above the airport elevation,
whichever is greater, and
• the visibility at that airport will be at least three miles, or two
miles more than the lowest applicable visibility minimums,
whichever is greater, for the instrument approach procedures
to be used at the destination airport
An alternate may not be required when dispatched under Ops
Specs B044 if the redispatch segment is under six hours.
Altimetry As a technique when flying international, insert the local transition GS
altitude/transition level on the PRED ETA-ALT line (line 6R) on
a Fix page for departures and arrivals. You will get a reminder
on the map display as you approach the transition and need to
reset your altimeter.
Altimetry When the pressure setting is reported in hectopascals or millibars A 4.5.2
and below 1,000 hectopascals or millibars, all read-backs,
altimeter setting checklist challenges and responses shall include
the word “hectopascals” or “millibars” respectively.
Hectopascals (hPA) has superseded millibars (MB) at most A 4.5.3
locations, but millibars may still be used in some places. (1 hPA
= 1 MB.)
Millimeters (MM) are used in eastern Europe. Millimeters are
incompatible with Delta aircraft altimeters.
Transition altitude is the altitude climbing through which the
altimeters must be set to 29.92 InHG or 1013 hPA (QNE).
Transition level is the flight level descending through which the
altimeters must be reset to the local altimeter setting (QNH).
Anti-Ice The greatest threat of inflight icing is between 0°C and 15°C OAT. A 5.2.20.2
The threat decreases as the OAT decreases to -40°C.
Operations into known severe icing conditions are prohibited. A 5.2.20.4
Anti-Ice Do not use engine anti-ice when OAT (on the ground) is above V 5.16.2
10°C.
Do not use engine or wing anti-ice when TAT (in flight) is above
10°C.
Anti-Ice Icing conditions exist when OAT (on the ground) or TAT (in V 5.16.2
flight) is 10°C or below and:
• visible moisture (clouds, fog with visibility less than 1
statute mile (1600 m), rain, snow, sleet, ice crystals) is
present, or
• ice, snow, slush or standing water is present on the ramps,
taxiways or runways

38
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Ice V 5.16.2.4
Engine Anti-Ice: Ground Engine anti-ice must be selected On (not Auto) immediately after
engine start and remain on during all ground operations when
icing conditions exist or are anticipated except when the
temperature is below -40°C OAT. (The automatic system, if
installed, is inhibited on the ground.)
Do not wait for visual indications of ice. Use at all times during
icing conditions to avoid engine damage or failure.
During single-engine taxi, operate only one pack with the APU
bleed valve closed.
For airplanes with an Auto selector, turn engine anti-ice On after
landing in icing conditions. (The automatic system is inhibited
on the ground and the anti-ice valve will close after landing if
the selector is in Auto.)
Do not use engine anti-ice when the OAT is above 10°C.

Engine Anti-Ice: Inflight 757 – Operate engine anti-ice On when in visible moisture and V 5.16.2.8.1
TAT is +10°C or below. No exceptions. Awareness of entering
an area of IMC at night requires careful monitoring of external
meteorological conditions. Forward facing landing lights can be
used to assist pilots in determining IMC conditions and should
be used to verify in-flight cloud conditions. If any doubt exists,
operate with engine anti-ice On if TAT is +10°C or below.
767 – Engine anti-ice must be Auto or On during all flight
operations when icing conditions exist or are anticipated except
during climb and cruise when the temperature is below -40°C
SAT. Engine anti-ice must be Auto or On prior to and during
descent in icing conditions even when the temperature is below
-40°C SAT. When operating in areas of possible icing, activate
engine anti-ice before entering icing conditions.
Do not use engine anti-ice when the OAT is above 10°C.

Wing Anti-Ice Wing anti-ice is inhibited on the ground on all airplanes. V 5.16.2.8.2
Ice accumulation on the flight deck window frames, windshield
center post, side windows, or windshield wiper arm may be used
as an indication of structural icing conditions and the need to
turn on wing anti-ice.
For aircraft with wing anti-ice selectors, wing anti-ice is automatic
inflight through the ice detection system.
For aircraft with wing anti-ice switches, if the Icing light and Ice
Det On EICAS message illuminate, check for visual indications
of airframe icing. If visual indications of airframe icing exist,
turn the wing anti-ice switch on.
Most aircraft with wing anti-ice switches do not have an ice Differences
detection system installed. On those aircraft, visually monitor
for indications of airframe icing and turn the wing anti-ice
switch on if present.
Do not use wing anti-ice when TAT is above 10ºC.
Anti-Ice (757-300) On 757-300 aircraft, the flaps up maneuver margin to stick shaker V 5.16.2.8.2
is reduced if wing anti-ice is on. Additional airspeed (up to 5
knots) may be added to the flaps up maneuvering speed to
ensure full maneuver margin.

39
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Ice (757) On the 757, when engine anti-ice will be required and OAT is 3°C V 5.16.2.2
or below, perform a visual check for ice buildup on the first
stage of the low pressure compressor (LPC) stator. Refer to
Volume 1 for a graphic.
Anti-Ice After Landing On airplanes with automatic anti-ice systems, the engine anti-ice GS
must be turned on after landing because the automatic system is
inhibited on the ground.
On airplanes with manual anti-ice systems, the wing anti-ice Valve
lights will illuminate after landing if the wing anti-ice is on
because the wing anti-ice valves will automatically close and
disagree with the commanded position.
For both manual and automatic systems, turn the wing anti-ice off
after landing.
Anti-Ice Penalties Pilots must ensure anti-ice penalties are listed on the WDR if F 14.7.1.5.1
ATIS or observed ramp/runway conditions require them. It can
be requested in advance via dispatch/LCC or after WDR via the
TOPR function.
Anti-Ice: Airframe Buffet On some 767s, operations in icing conditions have resulted in V 5.16.2.9.1
higher than normal airframe buffet when landing flaps are
selected. No flight crew action is needed if this occurs.
Anti-Ice: Engine Run Ups V 5.16.2.5
Ground When engine anti-ice is required and the OAT is 3°C or below,
perform engine run ups during ground operations (taxi out,
ground holding, taxi in) to minimize ice build-up. Be sure to
check that the area behind the aircraft is clear.
• 757 – run up the engines to a minimum of 50% N1 for one
second at intervals no greater than 15 minutes. The time
interval may be extended to 30 minutes if operationally
necessary. If the 30 minute limit is exceeded, the engine
must be shut down and inspected for ice. Do not exceed
40% N1 prior to shut down and inspection.
• 767 with P&W Engines – run up the engines to a minimum
of 50% N1 for one second at intervals no greater than 15
minutes
• 767 with GE Engines – run up the engines to a minimum of
60% N1 for 30 seconds at intervals no greater than 30
Takeoff minutes V 5.16.2.7

A standing takeoff is required when engine anti-ice is on and the

OAT is 3°C or below. Hold the brakes and make a static run up
until the engines are stabilized at or above 60% N1and ensure all
engine indications are normal before releasing brakes. This
Inflight applies to all aircraft. V 5.16.2.8.1

767s with GE engines:

• avoid prolonged operation in moderate to severe icing
conditions
• during flight in moderate to severe icing conditions for
prolonged periods with N1 at or below 70% or if fan icing is
suspected due to high engine vibration, increase thrust on
one engine at a time to a minimum of 70% N1 for 10-30
seconds every 10 minutes

40
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Ice: Engine Run Ups Ground operation in icing conditions without the required engine V 5.16.2.5
run-ups may result in severe engine damage and possible surge.
Anti-Ice: Flameout Protection To avoid engine flame out on 767s with GE engines, prior to V 5.16.10
(767 with GE Engines) reducing thrust for descent in visible moisture with TAT below
10ºC, even if the SAT is below 40ºC, turn engine anti-ice on. If
at or below 22,000 feet, turn wing anti-ice on as well. Turn the
switches on even if the airplane has automatic systems.
Do not use engine or wing anti-ice when the TAT is above 10ºC.
Avoid flying directly above significant amber or red radar returns
in IMC.
During airplane descent and ATC permitting, attempt a continuous
descent at idle thrust to decrease exposure to ice crystal
conditions.
Anti-Ice: Freezing Do not take off during heavy ice pellets, moderate or heavy T 2.5.1.10
Precipitation freezing rain.
Anti-Ice: Ice Crystal Icing Exit the ice crystal icing conditions. Request a route change to V 5.15.2.8.1
minimize the time above red and amber radar returns.
Accomplish the Ice Crystal Icing checklist in QRH.
If an in-flight engine surge occurs, a detailed write-up in the
aircraft logbook must be accomplished and suspected ICI noted
as the probable cause.
Anti-Ice: Ice Crystal Icing Exit the ice crystal icing conditions. Request a route change to V 5.16.2.8.1
minimize the time above red and amber radar returns.
Accomplish the Ice Crystal Icing checklist in the QRH.
If an in-flight engine surge occurs, a detailed write-up in the
aircraft logbook must be accomplished and suspected ICI noted
as the probable cause.
Anti-Ice: Ice Crystal Icing Ice crystals may be indicated by: V 5.16.9.1
• appearance of rain on the windscreen at temperatures too
cold for liquid water. The sound is also different than rain.
• light to moderate turbulence
• in IMC with
• no significant airframe icing
• no significant radar returns at altitude, but heavy
precipitation returns below the airplane
• cloud tops above typical cruise altitudes
• smell of ozone or sulfur
• humidity increase
• static discharge around the windshield (St Elmo’s fire)
The ice detection system will not detect ice crystal icing. It is
designed to detect supercooled water only.

41
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Ice: Ice Crystal Icing Particular attention should be exercised when operating in areas V 5.16.9
with very warm tropical conditions, especially in the Pacific
theater. At temperatures below freezing, near convective
weather, the airplane can encounter visible moisture made of
highly concentrated, small ice crystals. Ice crystal icing is
difficult to detect because ice crystals do not cause significant
weather radar returns. They are often found in high
concentrations above and near regions of heavy precipitation.
Ice crystals do not stick to cold aircraft surfaces.
Ice crystals can accumulate in the engine core, aft of the engine
fan. Ice shedding can cause engine vibration, power loss, and
damage. Aircraft have experienced flame out events resulting
from ice accumulation in the low pressure compressor. Avoid
ICI conditions.
Anti-Ice: Ice Crystal Icing Ice crystal icing or TAT probe icing (767) may be indicated by the Q 3.05
airplane in visible moisture and:
• amber or red radar returns below the airplane (you’re above
a thunderstorm)
• appearance of liquid water on the windscreen at temperatures
too cold for rain. The sound is different from rain too.
• light to moderate turbulence
• speckled green returns on the weather radar
• appearance of rain on the windscreen
• small collection of ice particles on the wiper post
• "Shhh" sound
• humid flight deck
• ozone or sulfur smell
• St. Elmo’s fire
• the autothrottles are unable to maintain the selected airspeed
• an erroneous TAT indication or the TAT indication remains
near 0°C
Engine indications of engine ice crystal icing or TAT probe icing
may include:
• the amber max EPR lines or EPR bugs or N1 bugs may
decrease while at constant altitude and airspeed
• the EPR indications are not aligned
• inability to achieve max continuous thrust or max climb
thrust
If ice crystal icing is suspected, complete the QRH procedure and
exit the area if possible.
Anti-Ice: Ice Detection System Some airplanes (both 757s and 767s) do not have an ice detection Differences
system installed and the airframe must be monitored for ice
buildup. Refer to the Differences section of Volume 1 and/or
look for an Icing light on the overhead panel.
If an ice detection system is not installed, the only indication of
airframe icing will be ice buildup near the windscreen.
Anti-Ice: Ice on Flaps After prolonged operation in icing conditions with the flaps V 5.16.2.10
extended, or if airframe ice is observed, or after landing on a
runway contaminated with ice, snow or slush, do not retract the
flaps to less than Flaps 20 until the flap areas have been checked
free of contaminates.
Anti-Ice: Preflight Check Engine anti-ice – Off for manual systems, Auto for auto systems V 3.4.4
Wing anti-ice – Off (both manual and automatic systems)

42
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Ice: Single-Engine Taxi During single-engine taxi with engine anti-ice on, operate only V 5.16.2.4
one pack (with the APU bleed valve closed).
Anti-Ice: Special Winter Certain airports are designated as Special Winter Operations A 5.2.16
Operations Airports (SWOA) Airports (SWOA) and have additional restrictions when snow,
ice or slush is on the runway or if freezing precipitation is falling
and accumulating. These airports are identified in the Company
Pages. Refer to the Airway Manual Weather chapter for
procedures.
Anti-Icing Deicing is the procedure for removing frost, ice, slush or snow T 2.5.1.1
from the aircraft in order to provide clean surfaces.
Anti-icing is a precautionary procedure that provides protection T 2.5.1.2
against the formation of frost or ice and the accumulation of
Deicing snow or slush on treated surfaces of the aircraft for a limited
period of time (holdover time).
Anti-Icing Fluids If no specific fluid manufacturer and type is identified in the post T 2.5.9.1
de/anti-icing report, or if there is no specific holdover table for
the fluid used, or if there is any doubt as to the exact product
applied, crewmembers must default to the FAA generic Type II
or Type IV holdover table.
Anti-Icing Fluids If Type IV fluid was used for overnight protection, it must be T 2.5.2.3
completely removed with Type I fluid prior to departure.
Anti-Icing Fluids Non-certified de/anti-icing fluids may be found at certain T 2.5.4.4
international stations, offline stations and at military bases.
Non-certified Type I fluid is not authorized for takeoff during
active icing conditions. Contact the dispatcher if used.
Non-certified Type II and Type IV fluids are not authorized under
any circumstances.
Anti-Icing Fluids Generally, Type I, II and IV fluids are considered to have the same T 2.5.4.5
effect on braking and steering as water.
Anti-Icing Fluids Use caution when walking on the ramp after de/anti-icing. A T 2.5.4.5
slippery condition may exist especially in dry weather or during
light precipitation.
Anti-Icing Fluids T 2.5.7.5
Loss of Effectiveness (All) Any ice, frost or snow on top of the fluid.
Fluids normally fail first on the leading or trailing edge of the
wing, but will fail first at mid-chord if the airplane is pointing
downwind.
Type I T 2.5.7.6
Frozen precipitation will begin to accumulate just as if the surface
was untreated.
Type II and IV T 2.5.7.7
Gray or white appearance and buildup of ice crystals on or in the
fluid.
Progressive surface freezing.
Snow accumulation.
Dulling of surface reflectivity (loss of gloss or orange peel
appearance).
Ice buildup on the life raft attach points, if installed.

43
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Icing Fluids It is very difficult to distinguish de/anti-icing fluid from hydraulic T 2.5.4.6
fluid since both have a similar texture and color. Contact local
maintenance or MCC through the dispatcher if residual fluid is
observed and cannot be identified.
Anti-Icing Holdover Time OAT is determined by the most current weather report or ATIS. T 2.5.9.2
Type and intensity of the frozen precipitation is determined by the
most current official report.
If a pilot assesses the intensity greater than that being reported, he
will use the heavier precipitation in the holdover tables.
If a pilot assesses the intensity less than that being reported, he
shall request a new observation be taken and reported.
A pilot may act on his own assessment of lesser precipitation
intensity only for snow or ice pellets and only if the intensity is
grossly different from that being reported (e.g. the snow has
stopped).
• the pilot’s assessment must be sent to Flight Control via
ACARS
• a cabin check is required within 5 minutes of takeoff
Pilot assessment of freezing drizzle or freezing rain is not
permitted unless no precipitation is actually falling, however
freezing drizzle and freezing rain adhering to the aircraft are so
hard to detect that if these conditions are reported or anticipated
the aircraft shall be de/anti-iced as a precaution against
encountering these conditions during taxi out.
Anti-Icing Holdover Time Whenever a time range is given, the shorter time is for moderate T 2.5.9.2
precipitation conditions and the longer time is for light
conditions. Holdover time for heavy conditions will be less than
the shortest time in the range.
Anti-Icing Holdover Time Holdover time is the estimated time that anti-icing fluid will T 2.5.1.9
prevent frozen contaminants from forming on treated surfaces.
Holdover time begins when the final fluid application begins and
ends when the fluid loses effectiveness or when the holdover
time extracted from the chart expires.
Anti-Icing: APU Inlet Door The APU inlet door must be free of snow and ice before APU V 5.16.2.2
start.
Anti-Icing: APU Inlet Door Snow, slush or ice ingestion into the APU inlet duct while the V 5.16.5
APU is running can cause serious damage. Ensure the APU inlet
area is clear before starting the APU.
Ingestion of deicing fluid causes objectionable fumes and odors to
enter the airplane.
Anti-Icing: Clean Aircraft Ensure all leading edge devices, all control surfaces, and the upper V 5.16.2.2
Concept wing and winglets (if installed), are free of snow, ice, and frost.
The upper wing surfaces should be confirmed free of frozen
contamination by inspection from the best vantage points.
Anti-Icing: Clean Aircraft Takeoff is prohibited when frost, ice, snow or slush is adhering to T 2.5.1.4
Concept the wings, control surfaces, engine inlets or other critical
surfaces of the aircraft.
Do not rely on airflow during takeoff roll to remove frozen
precipitation that may be adhering to the aircraft.

44
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Icing: Critical Surfaces Critical aircraft surfaces and components are those surfaces which T 2.5.1.6
must be clear of adhering frozen contamination before beginning
takeoff roll. Critical aircraft surfaces include, but may not be
limited to:
• wings, slats, flaps, ailerons, spoilers
• horizontal stabilizer and elevator
• vertical stabilizer and rudder
• pitot heads, static ports, ram-air intakes, engine and flight
instrument probes, other kinds of instrument sensor pickups
• engine and APU inlets and exhausts
• radome.
Anti-Icing: Engines Running Engine running de/anti-icing is authorized at remote locations on T 2.5.6
the airport (e.g. de-ice pad) as noted on the specific Company
Page. At all other stations, engine running de/anti-icing is not
authorized.
The Deicing Coordinator at the remote location is the final
authority in deciding if engine running de/anti-icing will be
accomplished.
Anti-Icing: Engines Running De-icing with the engines running is authorized only at stations V 5.16.6
identified in the Company Pages or flight plan remarks
Anti-Icing: Frost Takeoff with a light coating of frost up to 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick V 5.16.2.2
on the lower wing surfaces due to cold fuel is allowable.
Thin hoar frost is acceptable on the upper surface of the fuselage
provided all vents and ports are clear. Thin hoarfrost is a
uniform white deposit of fine crystalline texture, which usually
occurs on exposed surfaces on a cold and cloudless night, and
which is thin enough to distinguish surface features underneath,
such as paint lines, markings or lettering.
Anti-Icing: Frost If hoar frost extends down to the window area, the fuselage must T 2.5.1.4
be de-iced.
Anti-Icing: Frost Ice or frost on the upper wing surface (which is unacceptable) T 2.5.1.5
caused by a cold-soaked wing should be suspected if:
• frost or ice is observed on the underside of the wing, and
• the airplane arrived with a large amount of fuel in the wing
tanks
Adding warm fuel to the wing tanks is the quickest way to
alleviate a cold-soaked wing condition.
Anti-Icing: Internet The Internet system must be turned off to prevent RF radiation V 5.16.5
exposure to deicing personnel.
Anti-Icing: Landing Gear Gear struts, actuators, doors, tires, brakes, and wheels should be V 5.16.2.2
free of snow or ice.
Anti-Icing: Offline Stations A cabin check is always required if the de/anti-icing crew at a T 2.5.2.5
station has not been trained on Delta procedures.
Anti-Icing: Static Ports Snow or ice immediately forward of static ports may disturb the V 5.16.2.2
airflow over the ports resulting in erroneous readings even when
the ports are clear.

45
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Anti-Skid When manual brakes are applied on a slippery runway, several T 6.7.4.3
skid cycles occur before the antiskid system establishes the right
amount of brake pressure for the most effective braking. If the
pilot modulates the brake pedals, the antiskid system is forced to
readjust the brake pressure to establish optimum braking. During
this readjustment time, braking efficiency is lost.
Anti-Skid Light Some airplanes have an Anti-Skid switch on the overhead panel. II
The Off light in the switch indicates the antiskid is turned off, or
the antiskid is inop due to a fault, or the parking brake valve is
not open with the parking brake released. (The parking brake
valve closes to apply the parking brake, so in the last case, the
valve did not open when the parking brake was released and the
parking brakes are still applied. Do not push back or taxi.)
Approach Categories 757-200: Category C, except Category D for RNP (AR) A 4.4.15.3
757-300 and 767: Category D
Circling: 1000/3 or Category D/highest speed minimums, A 4.4.16.3
whichever is higher.
Approach Categories RNAV (RNP): Category D or highest speed minimums for all V 4.3.8
airplanes.
Approach Charts Inclusion of an approach procedure in the Jeppesen manual does A 4.4.9
not constitute authority for use by Delta pilots.
This is also true for the Jeppesen app on the EFB. There may be
approach charts included for approaches we are not authorized
to fly. The only way to know for sure is to check the Airway
Manual for a list of authorized approaches.
Approach Charts Some foreign approach charts have “full” and “limited” A 4.4.16.12
minimums. Delta is authorized to use full minimums provided a
flight director or autopilot is used to DA(H) or until the
appropriate visual references are obtained.
Touchdown zone and/or centerline lights may be inoperative or
not installed.
Limited minimums do not apply to Delta operations.
Approach Checklist For "Flight and Nav Instruments – Verified" do not just look at the GS
ILS frequency and course in the FMS and compare it to the
radio tuning panel. Use the approach plate instead. The
information in the FMS may be incorrect if there are multiple
ILS approaches to the same runway.

46
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Approach Clearance When cleared for an ILS approach, you may not descend below GS
any step-down altitudes prior to the FAF. In some cases,
following the glideslope prior to the “feather” will take you
below step-down altitudes and may result in a violation or
unsafe terrain clearance. A good technique is to fly the localizer
while complying with the step-down altitudes with VNAV
(preferred), V/S or Flight Level Change and then arm Approach
mode approaching the feather. If you do intercept the glideslope
prior to the feather, monitor raw data to ensure compliance with
the step-down altitudes and deviate from the glideslope if
necessary.
When cleared for a visual approach to an airport in Class B
airspace, you must remain above the floor of the Class B during
the approach. In some cases, following the ILS glideslope prior
to the feather will take you below Class B and, once again, may
result in a violation. (LAS 26L/R and SLC 16L are two
examples.) Therefore, even on a visual approach, comply with
the step-down altitudes on the ILS approach plate.
Class B airspace is depicted the EFB.
Approach Clearance When cleared for an approach and on a published segment of that T 5.1.3
approach, the pilot is authorized to descend to the minimum
altitude for that segment. When cleared for an approach and not
on a published segment of the approach, maintain the last
assigned altitude until crossing the initial approach fix or
established on a published segment of that approach. If
established in a holding pattern at the final approach fix, the
pilot is authorized to descend to the procedure turn altitude when
cleared for the approach.
Approach Clearance Once cleared for a specific approach procedure, execute the entire A 4.4.11
procedure from the point of clearance as depicted on the
approach chart unless a new ATC clearance is received. On
procedures that require alignment with the runway after the DA/
MDA (visual segment) do not maneuver to align prior to the
visual segment without ATC clearance.
Approach Clearance ILS step down fix altitudes prior to the final approach segment are A 4.4.12
mandatory and are often not coincident with the extended
glideslope path. When tracking the glideslope prior to the final
approach segment, use caution to ensure compliance with
charted step down altitude restrictions.
The glideslope does not necessarily correspond with the minimum
altitudes at the step down fixes. If following the glideslope, it is
possible to inadvertently descend below the minimum altitude
before crossing a step down fix.
Approach Minimums Verbalize “Radio” or “Baro,” for the first blank and the numeric V 3.4.16
value for the second blank on the Descent checklist.

47
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Approach Mode To deselect Approach mode: II
• If neither LOC or G/S has captured, push the APP switch
again
• If LOC is captured and G/S is armed, select another roll
mode other than LNAV (e.g. Heading Select)
• If G/S is captured and LOC is armed, select another pitch
mode except VNAV (e.g. Altitude Hold)
• If both LOC and G/S have captured, select G/A mode or
disconnect the autopilot(s) and cycle the F/D switches
Approach Mode Use caution when selecting approach mode prior to localizer T 5.2.3.2
capture. If the glideslope captures prior to the localizer, the
AFDS will command a premature descent. False glideslope
capture and subsequent climbs can also occur prior to localizer
capture with approach mode selected while on an intercept
heading. To avoid unwanted/premature glideslope capture, LOC
may be selected initially, followed by APP once established on
the localizer.
Approach Visibility On all approaches (CAT I, CAT II and CAT III), if the aircraft is A 4.4.16.2
established on the final approach segment and the controlling A 4.4.17.3
visibility decreases below the authorized minima, the approach A 4.4.18.3
may be continued to the applicable AH/DH/MDA for the
approach being conducted.
Specific foreign country exceptions may apply.
Approach Visibility The final approach segment of any instrument approach procedure A 4.4.13
shall not be initiated unless the visibility conditions, and ceiling
when specified “ceiling required,” are reported to be at or above
the minimum authorized for the approach. (You must have the
“weather to the feather.”)
All approaches with less than ½ statute mile or 800 meters
visibility require the use of RVR.
At no time will a pilot operate to lower minima than published for
a particular approach.
APU Bleed If the APU is running and bleed air is not required, ensure the V 3.4.4
APU bleed valve is closed for better fuel efficiency and lower
EGT.
APU Cancel Shutdown If the APU is turned off and the APU Run light is still illuminated II
(during the cool down), turning the switch to Start and releasing
it to On will cancel the shutdown signal and the APU will keep
running.
APU Cold Soaked Start If required during an ETOPS flight, attempt to start the APU prior V 5.7.3.4
to descent between FL270 and FL410 after at least two hours at
cruise altitude. Three start attempts are allowed. The APU must
maintain stable operating speed for at least 5 minutes to be
considered a successful start.
Note the following:
• APU start successful or unsuccessful
• number of start attempts required
• Static Air Temperature
• Flight Level
• peak EGT during start

48
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 APU Fault Reset Turn the APU selector Off, then On (not Start). If the fault light Q 7.11
remains illuminated, do not attempt to start the APU.
APU Fuel Burn 757: 280 pounds per hour MEL
767: 220 pounds per hour 24-00-01
APU Fuel Supply Fuel for the APU is supplied from the left manifold. II
If AC power is not available, a dedicated DC fuel pump is
energized when the APU Selector is placed to On.
If AC power is available, the left forward fuel pump will operate
and the PRESS light will be out if the APU is running regardless
of pump switch position. The DC pump is signaled off.
APU Fuel Valve If the APU Fuel Valve EICAS message is displayed, the APU Fuel Q 7.11
Valve is not in the commanded position. Turn the APU selector
off and do not attempt to start the APU.
APU Inop for Pushback If the APU is inop and an engine was started at the gate with II
external power, the rampers will be unable to open the forward
or aft cargo doors to load late bags after pushback because the
Ground Handling bus will be unpowered. The Ground Handling
bus can only be powered on the ground by either external power
or the APU. The bulk cargo door on the 767 can be opened
manually however.
APU Leaks There should be no leaks from the APU exhaust or drains. GS
APU Operation II
Start APU Up to max altitude (42,000' for the 757 or 43,000' for the 767)
Bleed Air Available Up to 17,000'
Electric Power Available Up to max altitude
APU Policy Start the APU approximately 10 minutes prior to actual pushback F 4.1.2.1
(not scheduled pushback) for all flights unless pre-conditioned
air is unavailable or customer comfort is affected.
Upon arrival, pilots should time the APU start so the APU is ready F 4.1.2.2
for use just prior to the aircraft coming to a stop at the gate.
(Approximately one minute prior to gate arrival.)
Unless local guidance dictates otherwise, do not depart the aircraft
with the APU running.
APU Shutdown on Secure Turn the APU selector off and wait until the Run light V 3.4.23
Checklist extinguishes before turning off the battery.
APU Start The APU Fault light will flash momentarily during start as the fuel II
valve opens.
The Run light will flash twice. The first time is a self-test and the
second time is starter engagement.
APU Start The battery switch must be On to start the APU. II
APU Start To start the APU, move the APU selector to Start, then slowly V 3.4.7
release back to On. Do not allow the APU selector to spring
back to the On position.
Verify the APU Fault light illuminates and then extinguishes.
Verify the Run light is illuminated.
APU Starter Duty Cycle The APU starter duty cycle is a maximum of 3 consecutive starts Limitations
or start attempts within a 60-minute period.

49
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 APU to Pack Takeoff (757) Whenever APU appears on a performance line on the WDR, either V 5.2.1.3
an APU to Pack takeoff or a Packs Off takeoff must be
performed.
If POF (Packs Off) is on the performance line, a Packs Off takeoff
is required with APU shutdown prior to takeoff.
An APU to Pack takeoff is not allowed if icing conditions exist for
taxi or takeoff.
If an engine failure occurs, engine bleed air switches should
remain OFF until reaching 1,500 feet AFE or until engine-out
clean-up altitude, whichever is higher.
ASAP Reports A non-sole source ASAP report must be submitted within 24 hours F 19.4.7.2
(domestic flights) or 48 hours (international flights) after the end
of the flight duty period for the day of the occurrence, or within
24 hours of becoming aware of an event.
A sole-source ASAP report will be accepted at any time, provided F 19.4.7.3
the report meets the ASAP acceptance criteria.
Augmented Crews On four-pilot augmented crews, the signature of each Captain on F 10.2.2.3.1
the FDRA signifies that while in the control seat they assume
responsibility for the safe conduct of the flight.
On four-pilot augmented crews the senior Captain will verify
landing currencies, determine roles and assign takeoffs and
landings, be the primary point of contact during layovers, will be
consulted first by the Company concerning irregular operations,
conduct the preflight briefing and determine rest breaks.
On four-pilot augmented crews during flight, the Captain in the
left seat is the PIC and will conduct flight deck preparations,
have final responsibility and authority for the safe operation and
conduct of the flight, and make the final decision to divert.
On three-pilot augmented crews, when the Captain is not on the F 10.2.2.3.2
flight deck, the pilot in the left seat will perform PIC duties until
the Captain returns.
Augmented Crews On three-pilot augmented crews, the Captain’s rest period should F 21.6.2.1
be interrupted for:
• a significant cabin issue (e.g. a medical or security
emergency)
• a significant mechanical irregularity
• a loss of equipment that will affect navigation
• changes in weather that may require a divert or change of
ETOPS plan
• any operational concern that requires the Captain’s
involvement
Augmented Crews All pilots will be summoned 60 minutes prior to landing and be at F 10.3.4
their duty stations no later than 45 minutes prior to landing and
through Shutdown checklist completion.

50
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Autobrakes and Thrust With autobrakes selected, higher than reverse idle thrust is GS
Reversers beneficial if the anti-skid is cycling or if you are trying to reduce
brake heating on a heavyweight landing.
Be aware that as braking action is reduced, reverse thrust becomes
more important because the tires lose friction with the runway
and the brakes are less effective. If braking action is less than
Good, select and use reverse thrust immediately after landing.
Autobrakes 3 or greater and reverse idle is recommended for
normal landings because that combination:
• does not increase landing roll because autobrakes provide a
deceleration rate
• provides fuel savings
• reduces engine wear
• produces less noise and is required at many international
airports
Note that higher than reverse idle can actually increase landing
distance if you do not allow the engines to reach reverse idle
before selecting forward thrust.
Be aware that manual braking can drastically increase brake
temperatures.
Autobrakes Before Takeoff Select RTO during the Preflight Procedure. V 3.4.4
RTO may disconnect during power transfers. Reselect if this
occurs.
Autobrakes on Landing Applied when both thrust levers are in idle and wheels are spun II
up.
Autobrakes on RTO
Maximum braking if:
• the airplane is on the ground
• airspeed is above 85 knots and
• both thrust levers are retarded to idle
Disarming Autobrakes
(F-STOP) F – fault in autobrakes or antiskid system
S – speedbrake lever moved toward the down detent
T – either thrust lever is advanced
O – brake selector moved to OFF or DISARM
P – brake pedal pressed
Speedbrakes on Rejected
Takeoff The lever moves to UP and speedbrakes extend when on the
ground and either thrust lever is moved to the reverse idle
Speedbrakes on Landing detent.
Armed

Arming speedbrakes is required by checklist.

The lever moves to UP and speedbrakes extend when main gear
Not Armed are on the ground (trucks not tilted) and the thrust levers are at
idle.

The lever moves to UP and speedbrakes extend when on the

ground and either thrust lever is moved to the reverse idle
detent. (Same operation as speedbrakes on a rejected takeoff.)
Autoland An autoland is satisfactory if the airplane touches down within the TOPP
normal ILS touchdown zone (approximately 1,500' but no 50-10-05
farther than 3,000'), within 27' of centerline, and demonstrates Page 13
satisfactory rollout performance.

51
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Autoland Two autopilots are required for autoland. Three are required for a II
CAT III approach.
Autoland Each aircraft must accomplish one satisfactory autoland every 30 F 28.1.1
days to maintain CAT II/III certification.
If an aircraft is removed from CAT II/III autoland status any
approach that requires the use of autoland is prohibited.
Autoland It is legal for qualified First Officers to conduct approaches that F 4.2.1.1
terminate in an autoland; however, the approach must be
conducted in CAT I or better weather. The credit for a
successfully completed First Officer-conducted autoland is
applicable for updating aircraft autoland currency and is one of
three landings for the Captain and First Officer within 90 days
recency requirement. (Does not count for pilot autoland
currency however.)
Autoland Do not autoland if a restrictive note regarding the localizer or A 4.2.5.1
glideslope is published (e.g. G/S Unusable, Offset Localizer,
Localizer Unusable, etc.).
Be sure to check the Company Pages, flight plan remarks and the
Briefing Strip at the top of the approach plate for restrictions as
they can be difficult to find.
Autoland Autoland procedures are required for all CAT II and CAT III V 4.3.5
approaches. V 4.3.6
Autoland Autoland should not be attempted unless the final approach course T 5.2.3.14
path is aligned with the runway centerline. If the localizer beam
is offset from the centerline the Rollout mode may cause the
aircraft to depart the runway.
Autoland Rollout mode cannot be assured on contaminated runways. If an T 5.2.3.18
autoland is accomplished on a contaminated runway, the pilot
must be prepared to disengage the autopilot and take over
manually should rollout directional control become inadequate.
Autoland Be aware that when performing an approach with LAND 2 T 5.2.3.19
annunciated, the stabilizer is automatically trimmed an
additional amount nose up below 330' RA (757-200) or 100' RA
(757-300 and 767). If the autopilots are subsequently
disengaged, forward control column force may be required to
hold the desired pitch attitude.
Autoland: ILS Critical Areas ILS critical areas are protected when the ceiling is less than 800 A 4.2.5.1
feet or the visibility is 2 sm (3200 meters) or less. Autoland
approaches can be flown without contacting ATC.
In foreign countries, however, notify ATC if an autoland will be
conducted and the ceiling is 200' or greater and visibility is
greater than RVR 2000 (600 meters).
Autoland: ILS Critical Areas ILS critical areas are usually not protected when the weather is T 5.2.3.17
better than 800/2 and ILS beam bends may occur due to vehicle
or aircraft interference. Sudden and unexpected flight control
movements may occur at very low altitude or on landing or
rollout during an autoland as the autopilot attempts to follow the
beam bend. Guard the controls and be prepared to disconnect the
autopilot and manually land or go around.

52
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Automation Guidelines The PF will verbalize when the autopilot is engaged or V 3.3.2.1
disengaged.
When an autopilot is engaged:
• the PF should operate the MCP and
• the PM should verbalize that the proper selections have been
set
When an autopilot is not engaged:
• the PM should operate the MCP as directed by the PF and
• the PM should verbalize that the proper selections have been
set
Automation Guidelines Briefings should include any uncommon levels of automation and V 3.3.2
related monitoring expectations.
VNAV should be used when available and appropriate during
climb, cruise and initial descent.
Both pilots are responsible for comparing the performance of the
autoflight system with the desired flight path of the aircraft.
All pilot-induced lateral, vertical, and speed mode changes should
be verbalized by the PF and, after referencing the FMA, the PM
should verbally confirm the appropriate FMA status.
Both pilots are responsible for monitoring the FMA and/or MCP
whenever any component of the autoflight system is engaged
and a flight mode change occurs.
Autopilot and Flight Director If operable and not restricted by a note on the approach chart, both V 4.3.3
the autopilot and flight director will be used for all ILS
approaches when the weather is below RVR 4000 or ¾ mile.
Autopilot Anomaly If an autopilot/flight director anomaly is observed where T 1.12.4
individual pilot-selected modes are not responding normally to
MCP switch selections, attempt to correct the problem by
disengaging the autopilot and selecting both flight director
switches to off. This clears all engaged modes. When an
autopilot is re-engaged or a flight director switch is selected on,
the default pitch and roll modes should engage. The desired
pitch and roll modes may then be selectable.
Autopilot Anomaly Flight in turbulence can cause a NO LAND 3 annunciation that V 5.4.4
does not reset. If this occurs during a climb, cruise, or descent
before selecting Approach mode, disengage the autopilot and
turn off both flight directors before resetting the ASA. The flight
directors can then be turned back on and the autopilot re-
engaged.
Autopilot Approaches If LAND 2 is displayed on the ASA, the autopilot will II
automatically apply nose-up pitch trim as the airplane descends
below 330' RA for 757-200s or below 100' RA for 757-300s and
767s. If the autopilot is then disengaged for landing or go-
around, it will take 20-30 pounds of forward pressure to counter
the added pitch up trim. If an automatic go-around is
accomplished, the trim is automatically removed.
Autopilot Approaches When not autolanding: GS
• on an ILS, disconnect the autopilot prior to the flare
• on a non-ILS approach, disconnect the autopilot no later than I 4.3
DA/MDA - 50' or DDA - 100'
• disconnect the autothrottles prior to the flare T 5.2.3.19

53
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Autopilot Approaches For approaches with LAND 2 annunciated and on airplanes with T 5.6.4
earlier FCCs with LAND 3 or LAND 2 annunciated, when the
autopilots are disengaged before the flare, (e.g. for a manual
landing or go-around) be prepared to counter the up trim bias
used in some multiple autopilot approaches. Initial pitch force
will be up to 30 pounds nose up.
Autopilot Engagement The autopilot will not engage in either Takeoff or Go-Around II
mode. If the flight director is in either of these modes and an
autopilot is engaged, the autopilot will engage in Vertical Speed
and Heading Hold.
Autopilot Engagement Autopilot engagement should only be attempted when the aircraft T 1.12.2
is in trim, flight director commands are essentially satisfied, and
the aircraft flight path is under control. The autopilot is not
certified or designed to correct a significant out-of-trim
condition or to recover the aircraft from an abnormal flight
condition and/or unusual attitude.
Autopilot Not Authorized For approaches with “autopilot coupled approaches not Q NNOI 1.2
authorized” restrictions, hand-flown CAT I approaches are
authorized to applicable minimums with an operable flight
director. Disconnect the autopilot no later than the published
disconnect altitude or the FAF/FAP/PFAF, whichever is lower.
Autopilot Rudder Control During a multiple-autopilot approach and go-around, the II
autopilots control the rudder. If on single engine, be prepared to
manually apply rudder at the first change of either pitch or roll
mode or if the autopilots are disengaged because the rudder will
quickly move to its trimmed position and the airplane will roll
abruptly.
Autopilot Rudder Control For a multi-autopilot go-around, yaw is initially controlled by the T 5.6.15
autopilots. Be prepared to immediately apply rudder input when
selecting another roll mode, pitch mode, or when altitude
capture occurs above 400 feet AGL because the autopilot reverts
to single autopilot operation and automatic control of rudder is
discontinued.
Autopilot Trim Modules The left autopilot can only use the trim module under the left stab II
trim cutoff switch (center hydraulics on the 757, left hydraulics
on the 767) and the right autopilot can only use the trim module
under the right stab trim cutoff switch (right hydraulics on the
757, center hydraulics on the 767). The center autopilot,
however, can use the trim module under either stab trim cutoff
switch.
Autothrottles Autothrottle use is recommended during all phases of flight. When T 1.12.2.1
in manual flight, autothrottle use is also recommended however
manual thrust control may be used to maintain pilot proficiency.
During engine-out operations, disconnect the autothrottles and
keep the throttle of the inoperative engine in the Close position.

54
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Aviation Herald There is a website in Austria called “The Aviation Herald” GS
(www.avherald.com) that reports on airline incidents and
accidents from all over the world and it’s amazing how much
goes on that we never hear about. Visiting this website is a great
way to fight complacency because serious events like smoke and
fumes, engine shut downs, cargo fires and flight attendant
injuries happen all the time. The website looks homemade, but
they have a nice smart phone app that you can purchase.
AWABS Corrections Do not take off with unresolved performance or weight and F 14.7.2
balance issues.
Corrections should be made using the following priorities:
• request a WDR update via the ACARS TOPR function
• contact LCC via Dispatch
• returning to the gate for an updated WDR is a last resort
AWABS Intersection Performance data for an intersection departure is also valid for all V 3.4.12
Departure other takeoff positions on that runway that afford additional
runway length.
AWABS Loading and Review When you change the runway in the FMS make sure you delete GS
any runway intersections associated with it or else AWABS
won’t uplink the data for the new runway.
AWABS Loading and Review On the PERF INIT page, compare the uplinked ZFW (small font) V 3.4.10
with the flight plan ZFW (large font) for reasonableness before
accepting.
On TAKEOFF REF page 2, verify or update the FMS ACCEL HT
as necessary.
AWABS Loading and Review Performance data may be loaded into the FMS at any point after V 3.4.10
receipt of the WDR.
The Captain’s analysis of the WDR shall not be completed while
the Captain is taxiing the aircraft. (The First Officer may taxi.)
AWABS Manual WDR A Manual WDR will be generated by the Load Control Center if F 14.7.4
AWABS is unavailable.
Crews are not authorized to perform manual weight and balance
computations.
If a Manual WDR is provided, the flight crew must obtain the
stabilizer trim setting and the V speeds from the ODM. To
compute the stabilizer trim setting, use the last three digits of the
Actual Takeoff Weight on line Z of the Takeoff Performance
Worksheet. For example, if the Actual Takeoff Weight is listed
as 467,629.1, the %MAC is 29.1.
AWABS MELs All MELs requiring performance corrections must be listed on the F 14.7.1.5
WDR.
All Dispatcher Approval Required MELs should be listed on the
WDR.
AWABS Pre-Pushback (D-8) The Pre-Pushback (D-8) message is uplinked to the aircraft 8 F 14.6.2
Message minutes prior to the latest published departure time. Crews may
allow the agent to close the door and pull the jetway prior to
receiving the D-8 message, but do not push back before
receiving:
• a Pre-Pushback Message that does not state “Stay at Gate for
WDR” or a WDR, and
• a Fuel Service Record (either electronic or hardcopy)
55
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 AWABS Production In order for AWABS to produce a WDR, the following criteria F 14.6.1
must be met:
• the aircraft actual weight, within AWABS and flight plan
limits
• the current weather, within environmental limits
• the passenger count must be entered
• the cargo load must be entered
• the fuel load must be entered, and
• there can be no open maintenance actions in SCEPTRE
AWABS Stay At Gate The hold status on the D-8 Pre-Pushback Message prevails over F 14.2.4
the Flight Plan Addendum, as it is the more recent document.
That is, if the D-8 Pre-Pushback message does not include a
“STAY AT GATE” message, then the flight may pushback,
regardless of the Flight Plan Addendum.
AWABS Takeoff Performance If a Takeoff Performance Request (TOPR) is requested before the GS
Request (TOPR) first WDR arrives, you can change the runway or intersection,
but will get the contamination and anti-ice settings that were
going to be on the original WDR. For example, if you request a
TOPR with engine anti-ice on, but the original WDR template
has engine anti-ice off, you will get a WDR with anti-ice off.
Wait until after the normal WDR arrives to request changes to
other than runway or intersection.
AWABS Takeoff Performance The ACARS TOPR prior to WDR receipt function allows crews to F 14.7.3.1
Request (TOPR) overwrite the runways in use set on the station runway template
and preemptively set the desired takeoff position for the initial
WDR.
If the anticipated takeoff position is not included on the D-8
message, and the initial WDR has not been received, send a
TOPR for the desired takeoff position. This feature allows crews
to change the runway or takeoff position, but does not permit
changes to runway contamination, engine anti-ice selection, or
weather conditions like a TOPR after WDR receipt does. It will
default to the local field conditions observed at the time.
AWABS Takeoff Performance All authorized takeoff positions for an airport can be obtained via F 14.7.3
Request (TOPR) a Takeoff Performance Request (TOPR) by requesting data for a
runway that does not exist. For example, request data for RWY
99.

56
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 AWABS Weight Data Record The Weight Data Record (WDR) is normally transmitted to the F 14.7.1
aircraft just prior to or during pushback. An identical hard copy
can be printed at the gate in case ACARS or the ACARS printer
is inop.
Pilots must ensure that the WDR header items (Flight number,
Date, Ship number, City pair, and Release number) are correct
and that all MEL items that require performance corrections are
listed. Never use a WDR that states, “NOT FOR FLIGHT
CREW USE” at the top. Pilots should also reference Line 2 of
the header to crosscheck WDR submit time versus current time
to ensure accuracy.
A new WDR will be uplinked for changes to cabin or flight deck
jumpseat and for changes that exceed the AWABS tolerance of:
• a total increase of 1,000 pounds (passenger or cargo) or
• a change of 0.5% MAC
Normally, the Captain will authorize cabin door closure prior to
receiving the WDR via ACARS. There is no requirement for the
agent to provide the passenger count to the crew.
If there is uncertainty about the weight and balance or passenger
count data, the crew may request a new WDR via ACARS with
the latest information. If not resolved, contact the Load Control
Center via the dispatcher.
AWABS Winds AWABS only uses steady state winds for headwind and tailwind F 14.7.1.4
components. It does not use gusts. Crosswinds include gusts and
are provided for situational awareness.
HW xx is the minimum headwind component required for takeoff.
TW xx is the maximum tailwind component already included in
the performance calculations.
AWABS: Takeoff Data Uplink If differences exist between the Takeoff Data Uplink and the V 5.5.7.2
WDR, the WDR is the controlling document.
Backcourse Localizer Set the front course. T 5.3.2.1.2
Always press B/CRS on the MCP before pressing LOC.
Bank Limit Selector If the Bank Limit Selector is other than Auto, excessive bank V 3.4.4
angle may occur in HDG SEL at high altitudes or airspeeds.
Basic Turbojet Minimums A precision or non-precision approach to not less than RVR 4000 A 4.4.10
(1200 m) or ¾ statute mile visibility and 200' DH or 250' MDH.
Bomb Threat In no instance should attempts be made to disable or render safe Q 0.08
an actual or suspected explosive device on an aircraft in flight
until instructed to do so by a TSA Aviation Explosive Security
Specialist.
Bomb Threat Rescue personnel will not assist in an evacuation if there is a Q 0.13
potential bomb threat. They are required to remain 2,000 feet
away from the aircraft.
Bomb Threat The Least Risk Bomb Location is at the aft right door of the Q 0.14
aircraft.
Brake Accumulator Pressure Accumulator pressure may be insufficient to prevent the airplane V 3.4.4
from moving even with the parking brake set. (Get chocked.)

57
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Brake Source Light Indicates both normal and alternate brake source pressures are Q 14.15
low. If it remains illuminated after selecting Reserve Brakes on
the 757 or Reserve Brakes and Steering on the 767, the reserve
brakes are unpressurized too and only accumulator braking is
available.
During landing rollout with accumulator only, apply steady,
increasing brake pressure and hold to a full stop. Be aware that
antiskid actuation due to runway conditions or tire failure can
deplete the accumulator before stopping.
Brake System Hydraulics II
757 (“Right-Left-Right”) Normal – Right
Alternate – Left (automatic if right hydraulic system press low)
Reserve – Right (press the RESERVE BRAKES switch)

767 (“Royal Crown Cola”) Normal – Right

Alternate – Center (automatic if right hydraulic system press low)
Reserve – Center (press the RESERVE BKS & STEERING
switch)
Brake Wear Indicators The brake wear indicators must extend out of the guides when the GS
parking brake is set.
Braking If stopping distance is critical during a non-normal, consider using T 8.1.2
max autobrakes for touchdown and quickly transitioning to max
manual brakes to stop the airplane.
Braking Reverse thrust and speedbrake drag are most effective during the T 6.7.3
high-speed portion of the landing. Deploy speedbrakes and
activate reverse thrust with as little delay as possible.
Braking Speedbrakes fully deployed, maximum reverse thrust and T 6.7.3
maximum manual anti-skid braking (not max autobrakes)
provides minimum stopping distance.
Braking Action When braking conditions are less than “good,” pilots are expected A 5.4.3
to provide a PIREP.
When tower controllers receive braking action reports from pilots
or airport management using the terms “medium,” “poor” or
“nil,” or whenever weather conditions are conducive to
deteriorating or rapidly changing braking conditions, the ATIS
will include “Braking action advisories are in effect.”
Braking Action Operations on any runway with a PIREP or runway contaminant A 5.4.6
of nil braking action are prohibited.
Braking Action Runway Condition Codes (RwyCC) describe braking action on A 5.4.6
the runway and consist of numerical values from 0 to 6 reported
for each third of the runway.
• 6 is a dry runway
• 5 is good braking
• 4 is good to medium braking
• 3 is medium braking
• 2 is medium to poor braking
• 1 is poor braking
• 0 is nil braking

58
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Braking: Accumulator Only Antiskid actuation due to slippery runway conditions or tire T 8.9.1.1
failure can deplete the accumulator pressure before the airplane
comes to a complete stop.
Braking: Accumulator Only Since the availability of reserve braking can only be determined T 8.9.1.1
after landing gear extension, the Abnormal Configuration Actual
Landing Distances and Approach Speeds tables in the ODM
assumes accumulator braking only. When choosing the nearest
suitable airport for landing, selection of the longest, driest
runway available is recommended to improve the probability of
stopping on the prepared surface. If reserve braking is
unavailable and the accumulator pressure becomes depleted, a
runway excursion is possible. Consideration should be given to
obstacles in the runway vicinity and the availability of
Engineered Material Arresting Systems (EMAS).
Briefing: Approach Include all pilots and complete as soon as adequate information is F 5.1.06
(“Threatening NATS”) available and workload is at a minimum. If able, complete the
briefing prior to top of descent. If a transfer of aircraft control is
required (e.g. CAT II/III), it will be completed in conjunction
with the Approach Briefing.
Verbalize the highest threats and mitigation strategy.
N – NOTAMS and flight plan remarks
A – arrival, approach chart and automation including the missed
approach plan and go-around procedure and callouts
T – transition level, terrain and taxi considerations
S – Special (Company) Pages, including engine-out
Briefing: Crew Changeover Each oncoming crewmember must be briefed prior to assuming F 5.1.7
flight deck duties. The briefing will include pertinent
information pertaining to route, altitude, ATC status (radar
contact, CPDLC, WPR, etc.), fuel and time trends, weather,
aircraft status, passenger issues and issues requiring notification
of the relief crew.
Pilots not present during the verification of the oceanic clearance
should repeat the procedure upon assuming PF or PM duties and
verify the FMS and clearance agree.
Briefing: Departure Include all pilots and complete prior to the Preflight checklist. F 5.1.4
(“Threatening WARTS”) Verbalize the highest threats and mitigation strategy.
W – weather and winds, including takeoff alternate and low vis
taxi
A – abnormal procedures and abort considerations
R – runway considerations, including length, condition and return
T – taxi considerations, terrain and transition altitude if applicable
S – SID/DP and Company Pages, including engine-out departure

59
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Briefing: Flight Attendants The Captain will brief the flight leader/purser prior to pushback F 5.1.3
and will receive a list of flight attendant names and their
jumpseat assignments.
Flight attendant briefing suggested topics:
All Flights
• security considerations
• flight deck entry/exit procedures
• planned flight time and altitude
• enroute/destination weather
• requirement for passenger overwater briefing
• coordination of PAs, e.g. warm weather, turbulence, etc.
• enroute turbulence and time expected, if available
• Easy Victor review and red and yellow emergencies
• jumpseaters
• medical event plan including requirement for MAF and
expected communication between the flight deck, cabin and
STAT-MD
• any information exchanged between the flight attendant and
the gate agent (e.g. during the Minute Brief)
• expectation that the Top of Descent PA will be made no later
than 5 minutes prior to starting descent
International
• confirm with the Flight Leader that all flight attendants have
the required documentation (passports, visas, vaccinations)
and required customs and immigration forms are on board
First Flight of the Day or After a Crew Change
• Seat Belt/No Smoking sign use
• review of cabin discrepancies
• customer misconduct procedures
Briefing: Jumpseat The Captain will ensure the flight deck jumpseater is briefed on F 5.1.2
sterile flight deck, egress procedures, and oxygen mask usage.
Briefing: Leaving the Flight If one pilot needs to leave the flight deck a briefing will be F 10.3.4
Deck conducted summarizing automation status, clearance limits, fuel
system status, etc. The returning pilot will then be briefed on
any relevant changes.
Briefing: Navigation The PF will conduct a navigation briefing after receiving taxi F 5.1.5
clearance to the departure runway and when workload allows.
The PF will verbalize the following and confirm the aircraft
automation is properly set:
• runway
• departure
• first fix
• H: heading (initial) and/or planned roll control automation
mode
• A: altitude and transition altitude if other than 18,000 feet
• A: airspeed restriction, if applicable
Recheck that the heading, altitude, and airspeed are correctly set.

60
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Briefing: Navigation The PF will verify and verbalize: V 3.4.12
• runway – outside reference and ND/FMS runway
• departure
• first fix
• H: heading mode
• A: altitude constraints
• A: airspeed constraints
Both pilots will also compare the aircraft symbol on the HSI to the
runway symbol on the HSI while in the 10 nm scale.
Briefing: Overwater An overwater briefing and demonstration is required on any flight F 5.1.8
operating at a lateral distance of more than 50 nm from the
nearest shoreline.
Briefing: Pairing All pilots will be included in the departure, navigation, and F 5.1.1
approach briefings.
The Captain will conduct a detailed briefing covering rejected
takeoffs, abnormal considerations, and the go-around maneuver
once per each crew pairing, at a minimum, and as necessary
based on changing conditions.
Bulk Cargo Heat Selector The Bulk Cargo Heat selector should stay in the Vent position. V 3.4.4
(767)
Cabin Altitude Warning 10,000' cabin altitude II
Outflow Valve Closes 11,000' cabin altitude if the cabin controller is in Auto (and in
Manual on some 757s)
Passenger Masks Drop 14,000' cabin altitude
Passenger Oxygen Duration 12 minutes
Altitude Warning Resets 8,500' cabin altitude
Cabin Interphone System Inop Ensure all cabin handsets are properly stowed. Q 5.04
Callouts at Transition Altitude “Transition Altitude” and “Transition Level” are required callouts V 3.3.6
and Transition Level if the transition altitude is not 18,000 feet or the transition level
is not FL180.
Callouts on Approaches V 3.3.6
All except Visual and CAT Captain: "Runway in Sight" or "Go Around."
III First Officer must acknowledge.

PM: “Minimums.”
CAT I or CAT II Autoland Captain: “Land 2” or “Land 3.”

First Officer: “Minimums.”

CAT III Autoland Captain: “Land 3” or “Go Around.” (Don't say anything else.)
Callouts on Approaches If the radio altimeter is inoperative, make the “1,000” and “500” V 3.3.6
callouts by reference to the barometric altimeter.
Callouts on Approaches On any approach, if the Pilot Flying can maintain visual contact V 3.3.6
with the runway, the “Approaching Minimums” and
“Minimums” callouts are not required.
Callouts on Approaches The “Approaching Minimums” callout at approximately 80 feet V 3.3.6
above minimums and the “Minimums” callout are made by
reference to whichever altimeter (radio or baro) defines the
minimums.

61
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Callouts on Approaches The PM should call out any significant deviation from the planned V 3.3.6
flight path, airspeed or descent rate.
Below 1,000' AGL, the PM should call out any descent exceeding
1,000 fpm.
Canceling IFR Cancelling IFR is authorized if: A 4.7.3
• VFR weather conditions exist
• in direct communication with CTAF or other service
providing airport traffic advisories
• within 10 nm of the airport or in visual contact with the
landing runway that can be maintained until landing
You must cancel IFR with the controlling agency.
Cargo Fire Since the cargo fire detectors detect smoke, fire-extinguishing II
agent discharged in the cargo compartment may cause the
detectors to indicate a fire still exists even after it has been
extinguished.
Cargo Fire Inform ground personnel not to open any cargo door until all Q 8.19
passengers and crew are off and firefighting equipment is
nearby.
Notify pilots and flight attendants to evacuate the crew rest
facilities (if installed) and close the main hatch and vestibule
door.
CAT I (ILS and Non- A descent below minimums is authorized if: A 4.4.16.8
Precision) • a normal landing can be made in the touchdown zone
• the runway environment is in sight, however if only the
approach lights are in sight, descent is not authorized below
100' above TDZE unless the red terminating bars or the red
side row bars are also visible
• sighting Lead-In Lights does not satisfy the requirement for
visual contact with the runway environment, however it is
sufficient to continue beyond the MAP. Do not descend
below the MDA/DDA until the actual runway environment is
in sight. A 4.4.16.9
If the above conditions are not met, a missed approach is required.
CAT I ILS without TDZ and/or In the US, if the TDZ and/or CL lights are inop or not installed, A 4.4.16.10
CL Lights CAT I ILS approaches may be flown to RVR 1800. This
removes the penalties for TDZ or CL lights out-of-service or not
installed provided all the requirements in the Airway Manual.

62
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 CAT II and CAT III Use the CAT II or CAT III approach guide in Volume 1 as a V 4.3.5
briefing guide. V 4.3.6
Autoland procedures are required.
Max winds to initiate or land from a CAT II or CAT III approach
are a 15 knot max crosswind, a 25 knot max headwind and/or a
10 knot max tailwind.
Captain callouts at DA(H) or Alert Height:
• CAT II: “Land 2” or “Land 3” with runway environment in
sight
• CAT III: “Land 3” (runway environment in sight not
required)
A missed approach is required if:
• the criteria in the Airway Manual are met
• the autopilot is unintentionally disengaged; however, if the
autopilot is unintentionally disengaged below RA/DA/AH,
the landing may be completed if suitable visual reference is
established
• autoland cannot be accomplished in the touchdown zone
• the ASA does not say LAND 2 or LAND 3 on a CAT II
• the ASA does not say LAND 3 on a CAT III
For all EICAS messages, aural warnings and warning/system
failure flags that occur prior to decision height/alert height, the
approach may be continued as long as the ASA status
annunciates LAND 2 or LAND 3 for a CAT II approach or
LAND 3 for a CAT III approach and the LOC and G/S are
within tolerance. The ASA monitors the required elements of the
CAT II/III airborne system.
CAT II Missed Approach A missed approach is required if: A 4.4.17.8
• any of the required RVR, airborne or ground systems
become inoperative
• the approach lights are not in sight by the DA(H)/RA
• the threshold is not in sight by the Inner Marker or 100'
above TDZE. (May also be the DA(H)/RA.) The threshold
environment includes touchdown zone lights, threshold, red
terminating bars on the ALSF-I system or the red side row
bars inside 500' on the ALSF-II/ICAO system.
• an automatic landing cannot be made in the touchdown zone
• the crosswind is greater than 15 knots
CAT III Missed Approach A missed approach is required if: A 4.4.18.8
• when any GS or LOC failure occurs prior to touchdown
• any loss of required runway lighting
• the crosswind is greater than 15 knots
• an automatic landing cannot be made in the touchdown zone
CAT IIIA and CAT IIIB For 757 and 767 aircraft, Delta operates all CAT IIIA and T 5.2.3.13
CAT IIIB approaches as CAT III.
Center Tank Fuel Pumps If center tank fuel is to be used, turn the center tank fuel pumps on V 3.4.7
during the Pushback Procedure and before engine start. Observe
both Press lights illuminate and both center tank fuel pump
EICAS messages display. Then turn the pumps off for engine
start and observe the Press lights and EICAS messages are no
longer displayed.
Checking the center tank fuel pumps can be accomplished any
time after fueling is complete. (Do it during the Preflight check.)

63
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Center Tank Fuel Pumps Center tank fuel pump EICAS messages may display on takeoff or V 3.4.9
climb if the center fuel tank contains less than 5,000 pounds of
fuel and the center tank fuel pumps are on. (Deck angle or fuel
sloshing.)
Center Tank Fuel Pumps For single-engine taxi, after starting the first engine turn the center V 3.4.9
tank pump on for the operating engine.
For dual-engine taxi, turn both center tank fuel pumps on and
verify Press lights and EICAS messages are not displayed.
Center Tank Fuel Pumps If an engine or engines will be shut down during a taxi delay, both V 3.4.10
center tank fuel pumps must be turned off prior to engine
shutdown to prevent a center tank Universal Fault Interrupter
lockout (trapped fuel). Turn on the center tank fuel pump for an
operating engine after a brief delay of 5 seconds or more.
Center Tank Fuel Pumps During the Delayed Start Procedure, turn the operating center tank V 3.4.11
fuel pump off prior to starting the second engine.
Center VHF Radio Ensure DATA is in the Active window for ACARS operation. V 3.4.4
Chart Utilization For all operations, pilots will have adequate charts available for F 4.2.3
immediate reference.
Checklist Modifications The checklist must not be modified in any way. (The FAA gets V 1.2.8
very upset about that.)
Checklists The checklist functions as a “check” list, not a “do” list. V 3.2.5
The Secure checklist is the only exception. Since these items are
not performed on every flight, the Secure checklist may be
accomplished as a “read and do” checklist.
Checklists Normally checklists are not called for until all associated V 3.2.7
procedural items are complete and the checklist can be
completed without interruption. The Preflight checklist,
however, may be initiated before the completion of the logbook
and/or fuel required tasks. If either or both of these tasks are not
complete, the checklist will be read up to the last completed
task. When the remaining task(s) has been completed, the
checklist will be continued.
Additionally, when the transition level is below 10,000 feet, the
Approach checklist should be started, but will not be considered
complete until the local altimeter is read.
The checklist should not be stowed prior to completion.
If all pilots leave the cockpit after the Preflight checklist, the
entire checklist must be re-accomplished.
Chock Removal Pilots should not release brakes to remove stuck chocks until F 30.2.1
pushback (aircraft movement) is imminent.
Circling Approaches A 4.4.16.3
Minimum Visibility 3 sm (4800 m) or CAT D/highest speed visibility, whichever is
Minimum Ceiling higher.
MDA 1,000' or CAT D/highest speed HAA, whichever is higher.
1,000' HAA or CAT D/highest speed MDA, whichever is higher.

64
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Circling Approaches The circling maneuver is flown in the landing configuration with T 5.4.3
the Landing checklist complete. (i.e. landing flaps prior to the
FAF.)
The circling maneuver is conducted in VFR conditions.
Circling Approaches The circling maneuver may be flown following any instrument T 5.4.3
approach procedure.
Use V/S or VNAV mode to descend to the circling MDA. Use of
Approach mode for descent to the circling MDA is not
recommended because the AFDS will not level off at the MCP
altitude and exiting Approach mode requires initiating a go-
around or disengaging the autopilot and turning off both flight
directors.
If the MDA does not end in “00”, set the MCP altitude to the
nearest 100 feet above the MDA and circle at the MCP altitude.
Maintain the MDA using ALT HOLD and use HDG SEL for the
maneuvering portion of the circling approach.
Circling Approaches If a missed approach is required at any time while circling, make a T 5.4.5
climbing turn in the shortest direction toward the landing
runway. Continue the turn until established on an intercept
heading to the missed approach course corresponding to the
instrument approach procedure just flown. This may result in a
turn greater than 180° to intercept the missed approach course.
Maintain the missed approach flap setting until close-in
maneuvering is completed.
Circling Area Radius For normal circling area radius above 1,000' AGL, the FAA uses T 5.4.4
2.3 nm. For expanded circling area radius above 1,000' AGL,
distance is 3.7 nm or greater.
ICAO uses 5.28 nm at 205 knots. AM
4.4.15.7
Circling Area Radius Standard: 2.3 nm for CAT D/165 knots. A 4.4.15.5
Since 2012, circling approach protected areas have been expanded A 4.4.15.6
and the radius increases with the altitude of the MDA to
compensate for true airspeed increase with altitude. Expanded
circling protected areas are identified on the approach plates by
a “C.”
Circuit Breaker Reset Warning: Do not reset a tripped fuel boost pump circuit breaker. Q NNCI 1.4
Do not reset a tripped circuit breaker in flight unless the Captain,
using emergency authority, deems it necessary for a safe
continuation of the flight. In this case, the tripped circuit breaker
may be reset only once and only after observing a five minute
cooling period.
Crew members may pull and reset a circuit breaker only when
directed to do so by maintenance, a specific QRH, MEL, or
Volume 1 procedure, or when following the Computer/System
Circuit Breaker Reset procedures in the NNOI section. If this
action restores the failed system, make an “Info Only" entry in
the logbook.
Circuit Breaker Reset Never pull an EEC or FADEC circuit breaker in flight. Q NNOI 1.6

65
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Clearance Verification If any pilot is unsure of a clearance, contact ATC to verify. V 3.3.7
If a clearance, departure procedure, or route is changed, re-
accomplish the clearance verification procedure.
If the departure clearance is received via radio, both pilots should
monitor and at least one pilot must write it down.
After the departure clearance is received, either by ACARS,
CPDLC or voice, the PM will reference the clearance and read
the departure, route of flight, altitude and any speed restriction
to the PF. The PF will reference the FMS and MCP and read the
departure, route of flight, altitude and any speed restriction back
to the PM.
The Captain should repeat the taxi clearance after the First Officer
has read the clearance back to ATC. When issued complex or
extensive taxi instructions, at least one pilot should write down
the clearance or load it into the FMS scratch pad.
Both pilots should verify the altitude specified by either an ATC
clearance or a procedure has been set correctly by stating the
altitude and pointing at the altitude display window. Also ensure
the proper altimeter reference (QNH, QNE or QFE) is set.
Both pilots must review any clearance received via CPDLC.
Review the entire clearance in the correct page order.
The PF should repeat crossing restrictions, headings and
airspeeds.
Cleared Direct Confirm the exact routing with ATC if “cleared direct” or “cleared A 3.1.10.2
to.” In most countries “cleared direct” may mean continue via
the previously assigned route.
Cleared To vs Cleared Direct Do not confuse “cleared to” with “cleared direct.” In the US, GS
“cleared to” is a clearance limit, while "cleared direct" is a route
amendment. In the first case, if you’re cleared to a particular
point, say for holding, you should follow your last assigned
route to that point. In the second case, if you’re cleared direct to
a point, you should go directly there.
Be aware that in ICAO airspace, "cleared direct" often means fly
your flight planned route. It is not a route amendment. If in
doubt, query the controller.
Climb or Descend Direct Executing CLB DIR or DES DIR deletes all waypoint altitude V 5.11.8.2
constraints between the airplane’s current altitude and the MCP
altitude.

66
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Climb or Descend Via An ICAO controller will always state the final altitude in the A 4.2.11.3.2
ICAO Differences clearance. If not given an altitude, do not climb or descend.
The name of the STAR is not specified by the ICAO controllers.
In the US, a Climb/Descend Via clearance cancels any previously
issued speed restrictions. Comply with all published speed
restrictions.
In ICAO airspace, a Climb/Descend Via clearance does NOT
cancel any previously issued speed restriction. Maintain the
previous speed restriction until a change is necessary to comply
with the next published speed restriction.
In ICAO airspace, “Climb/Descend And Maintain...” does NOT
delete published altitude restrictions.
In ICAO airspace, when assigned an altitude, ATC may expect
crews to comply with published speed/altitude restrictions even
if not issued a Climb/Descend Via clearance.
In ICAO airspace, if assigned a vector bypassing a fix with a
published altitude/speed restriction, ATC may expect crews to
comply with those restrictions abeam the fix.
Climb or Descend Via If given a clearance to “descend via” or “climb via,” set the T 1.12.3
lowest/highest altitude on the procedure in the MCP window.
For climbs and descents in pitch modes other than VNAV PTH or
VNAV SPD, the MCP altitude must be set at the next altitude
constraint.
Climbs and Descents In US airspace, if ATC clears you to climb to an altitude on a SID GS
or descend to an altitude on a STAR, all intermediate altitude
restrictions are cancelled and you may climb or descend
unrestricted.
In ICAO airspace, the opposite is true. You must comply with the
intermediate climb or descent restrictions unless the controller
specifically cancels them. If in doubt, query the controller.
Climbs and Descents For the last 1,000 feet of either a climb or descent, the vertical F 4.2.5
speed should not exceed 1,500 feet per minute. Using VNAV
climb or descent to level off is acceptable to comply with this
policy. For all other modes of automation or manual flight, the
pilot should adjust the vertical rate to comply.
Cockpit Windows Verify the lock lever is in the locked (forward) position and the V 3.4.5
WINDOW NOT CLOSED placard is not visible. Pull on the
lock lever without depressing the release button to ensure the
lock lever is secure.
Ensure the indicator at the top of window reads CLOSED and the
link arm assembly is approximately perpendicular to the lower
track.
It may be necessary to completely open the window prior to
closing in order to reset the locking mechanism.

67
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Cold Temperature Altimeter When the temperature is colder than standard, the true altitude A 5.3.1
Corrections will be lower than the indicated altitude. This altimeter error
may be significant and becomes extremely important when
considering obstacle clearances in very cold temperatures. Cold
temperature altitude corrections must be made to designated
segments when the reported airport temperature is at or colder
than the published airport cold temperature restriction. Pilots
must advise ATC of the amount of altitude correction applied
when correcting on any segment of the approach other than the
final segment. ATC requires this information to ensure
appropriate vertical separation between known traffic. A 5.3.1.2
At Delta domestic airports, apply altimeter corrections from the
Company Page. A 5.3.1.3
At non-Delta domestic airports, manually apply corrections from
the Airway Manual Weather chapter. A 5.3.1.3.1
At international airports, manually apply corrections as described
in the Airway Manual Weather chapter.
Communicable Disease For any suspected communicable disease symptoms, pilots will: F 17.4.9
• notify the CDC on domestic or inbound international flights
to the U.S.
• notify ATC on outbound international flights from the U.S.
Utilize the dispatcher and STAT-MD as necessary.
Advise STAT-MD of any ill customer traveling from West Africa F 17.4.9.3
regardless of symptoms.
Communications Requirement All flights must maintain continuous two-way voice A 6.3.1
communication capability with ATC. CPDLC and ADS-B/C do
not provide relief from this requirement.
All flights must maintain continuous two-way voice or data
communications capability with Delta. If ACARS is in a NO
COMM status which cannot be resolved in short order, two-way
voice communications with Delta must be established.
Company Communications Internal communications, such as memos, emails and content on F 8.2.1
all Company channels and are not to be copied, forwarded,
reproduced or posted online.
Company Communications Once off the gate, contact with the Company must be via ACARS F 2.3.2
or Atlanta Radio. Do not phone the dispatcher, maintenance,
Duty Pilot, etc. directly. (All communications must be recorded.)
Complaint Resolution Official A Complaint Resolution Official (CRO) is an ACS representative F 11.3.3.4
trained in disability regulations. The gate agent should contact a
CRO for guidance on any disability issue which the agent cannot
resolve.

68
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Configuration Changes Prior to taxi, the flaps will be selected to the takeoff or default V 3.1.7
position.
During flight, the PF will call for any gear or flap change and the
PM will verify that the airspeed is appropriate before
accomplishing the change. If operational necessity requires an
immediate configuration change and the PM is occupied with
other duties, the PF may announce the change and move the
appropriate control. This should be understood as the exception
and not the rule.
After landing, no configuration changes shall be made until clear
of the active runway, or until the aircraft has reached taxi speed
when a 180° turn is required.
Contact Approaches Contact approaches are not authorized. A 4.4.9
Contract Maintenance Contract maintenance should always be arranged through the F 28.3.6.1
MCC (not through local ops). The Captain is responsible for
ensuring the accuracy of a contract mechanic's logbook entry.
Control Wheel Steering Do not use control wheel steering for takeoff or the landing flare V 5.4.1.1
maneuver.
CPDLC Clearances Use extreme caution when dealing with conditional clearances. V 5.5.8.11
Numerous ATC violations have resulted from crews missing the
conditional nature of the clearance and climbing too early or too
late. V 5.5.8.12
Crews should use caution when dealing with Expect messages. An
Expect message is not a clearance. If any doubt exists, revert to
voice procedures.
CPDLC Comm/Nav Codes Do not log on to CPDLC while enroute unless you have GS
SATCOM. If you log on with only VHF, ATC will assume you
are fully FANS equipped and apply reduced separation
standards, but CPDLC will drop off when you leave VHF range,
reduced separation will no longer apply and ATC may issue a
violation.
To determine if you have SATCOM CPDLC, look at the comm/
nav line on the flight plan. If you find J5 or J7, you are good to
log on. If you only see J3, you only have VHF CPDLC and must
not log on. Don’t log on unless you see J5 or J7.
Another way to determine if you have SATCOM is to check the
Menu page on ACARS. If you see a SAT prompt, you have
SATCOM.
CPDLC Comm/Nav Codes In the Comm/Nav section of the flight plan: F 14.2.3.2.2
• J5 indicates Inmarsat SATCOM CPDLC
• J7 indicates Iridium SATCOM CPDLC
CPDLC Emergency Page Normally use the CPDLC Emergency page instead of the ADS V 5.5.8.21
Emergency prompt to declare an emergency. This will trigger
both CPDLC and ADS emergency modes.
Pre-populate the CPDLC Emergency page with the appropriate V 5.5.8.22
ETP airport, SOBs, and altitude and keep it updated as ETP
airports change. Leave offset blank. In the event of an
emergency, only MAYDAY or PAN will need to be selected
prior to sending.
CPDLC Logon Log on to KUSA at the gate for clearances no later than 30 V 5.5.8.3
minutes prior to departure. (VHF logon with J3 is okay.)
69
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 CPDLC Logon Log on to the Air Traffic Service Unit (ATSU) 15 minutes prior to V 5.5.8.6
the Oceanic Entry Point or FIR boundary.
Crew Rest Facilities On the 767, the temperature control system inside the pilot and GS
flight attendant crew rest facilities (if installed) serves only as a
heater. Gaspers are the best source of cool air.
Crew Rest Facilities Crew rest facilities are for operating pilots only, however, pilots F 21.5.1
deadheading in uniform on a scheduled rotation may use a Class
1 crew rest facility with the Captain’s approval.
All aircraft limitations must be strictly observed.
Only pilots qualified on the A330, A350, 767, and 777 aircraft
may occupy the Class 1 pilot crew rest facility of the respective
aircraft they are qualified on due to FAA egress training
requirements.
Crew Rest Facilities The Low Airflow alert in both the pilot and flight attendant lower V 5.1.6.3
crew rest compartment may sound momentarily during power
transfers or power down. It may also sound if both packs or
recirc fans are not operating.
If the alert sounds, press the Low Airflow Alert Reset switch to
reset the system. If the alert continues, evacuate the facility.
Crew Rest Policy On augmented crews, the primary concern is the alertness of the F 21.6.1
landing pilot.
Crew Rest Seat Blocking On flights on the 757ER that require a crew rest seat, the seat next F 21.5.1.4
to the crew rest seat will be the last seat filled in the Delta One
cabin. The seat in front of the pilot crew rest seat will be the
next-to-last seat filled.
On flights on the B767 that require a pilot crew rest seat, the seat
behind the pilot crew rest seat will be the last seat filled in the
Delta One cabin.
The Captain will be informed as to whether a customer has been
assigned those seats.
Non-revs may be assigned those seats in accordance with this
policy.
Crewmember Incapacitation A pilot will be presumed incapacitated after failing to respond to F 2.3.3.4
two verbal communications or to one verbal communication
associated with a significant deviation from the intended flight
path.
Once declared incapacitated, a pilot will be denied access to any
aircraft controls for the remainder of the flight. F 2.3.3.6
If a flight attendant becomes incapacitated, treat the situation as if
a passenger has become incapacitated.

70
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Critical Controls During an inflight non-normal, verbal confirmation is required Q NNCI 1.7
before moving any of the following critical controls:
• an IRS mode selector
• an engine thrust lever
• an engine fuel control switch
• an engine, APU or cargo fire switch
• a generator drive disconnect switch
• a flight control switch
This does not apply to the Dual Engine Failure checklist. Do not
delay the Dual Engine Failure memory items and checklist in
order to take advantage of high RPM and improve the chances
of a successful restart.
Critical Terrain In the lower 48 United States and Hawaii, all aircraft are able to A 8.3.2.1
rapidly descend to FL180, confirm their position using ATC
vectors and/or enroute charts to determine how to descend to
10,000' MSL within the time limitations of the passenger oxygen
supply.
Critical Terrain If situational awareness is lost at any time at an altitude below the A 8.2.1
MOCA, Grid MORA or MSA, immediately climb to clear the
highest obstacle in that sector.
Critical Terrain At least one crewmember should monitor the terrain feature of A 8.1.2
EGPWS (if installed) when in a mountainous or critical terrain
area.
Critical Terrain GPS aircraft are not required to monitor raw data. (Hooray!) A 8.1.3
If the GPS is inoperative, one pilot must manually tune NAVAIDS
to confirm the proper inbound or outbound track prior to
operating below the Grid MORA at an airport in a mountainous
area. After confirmation, both pilots may return to FMS map
mode. If, however, the airport is an SAQ airport, one pilot must
continually monitor raw data while below the Grid MORA if
possible.
Crosswind Landings Sideslip only (zero crab) landings are not recommended with V 5.16.3.2
crosswind components in excess of 25 knots to ensure adequate
ground clearance (wingtips, engines) and adequate control
margin.
Cruise Clearance A cruise clearance is a clearance along a published airway that A 4.6.5.1
provides a transition to the approach environment. Descent may
be initiated at the pilot’s discretion to the applicable minimum
IFR altitude along the assigned route of flight. The flight is also
cleared for any instrument approach unless restricted by ATC.
(We used to get cruise clearances all the time approaching
Palau.)
Customer Allergies Customers who identify themselves as having a peanut, tree nut, F 11.3.3.3
or other food allergy are informed, either at time of booking or
by an ACS agent at the airport, that although Delta cannot
guarantee an allergen-free environment, Delta will provide
reasonable accommodation, as stated in the Onboard Manual.

71
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Customer Armed Federal officials and military LEOs need only present their F 11.3.5.2
credentials.
State, tribal, county, local, and military officials must present their
credentials and a National Law Enforcement
Telecommunications System authorization.
Customer Armed The Flight Leader will inform cabin crewmembers, FAMs, LEOs F 11.3.5.3
and FFDOs of the seat locations of all armed customers.
If there is a crew change and the armed official is continuing,
leave the Law Enforcement Gate Pass in the logbook to alert the
next crew.
Customer Baggage On domestic flights, checked baggage may travel unaccompanied F 11.4.2.2
provided a TSA-approved screening method or a provision of
Delta’s security program has been applied.
On international flights, a positive passenger bag match will be
accomplished, however baggage from customers involuntarily
denied boarding (e.g. space, weight, mechanical, weather) may
remain on the aircraft. Baggage of customers removed from the
flight or denied boarding for other reasons (e.g. abusive,
medical, diversion, return to gate event) should be removed.
If an item of unaccompanied checked baggage presents a security
concern, the Captain will convene the Security Conflict Team
(SCT) to determine if it represents a threat.
The Captain has final authority on whether to remove checked
baggage due to security concerns. However, he must base his
decision on information assembled by the SCT.
Customer Baggage Pilots are authorized to retrieve pink tagged items such as car F 11.4.2.3
seats, strollers and wheelchairs from the ramp or cargo bins.
Customer Boarding If the cabin temperature is extreme (below 50°F or above 90°F) F 11.3.2.3
and is not improving quickly enough after connecting external
air or starting the APU, coordinate with the gate agent to delay
or suspend boarding.
Customer Deplaning A pilot should stand at the deplaning door to thank our customers. F 10.3.8
Pilots should not deplane until all customers have departed the
aircraft, unless an early departure is necessary for operational
reasons or customer assistance.
Customer Misconduct Serious customer misconduct is defined as: F 11.5.3.1
• injuring a crewmember or customer
• subjecting a crewmember or customer to a credible threat of
injury
• abusive language toward a crewmember or customer
• interfering with a crewmember’s duties
• refusing to comply with Federal regulations
Before pushback, any customer in the terminal or on the aircraft F 11.5.3.3
endangering the safety of customers or crew, interfering with the
performance of any crewmember’s duties, appearing intoxicated
or unruly, or demonstrating other types of serious misconduct
will not be permitted to travel on the flight. Anytime a customer
is involuntarily removed, the Captain will convene the Security
Conflict Team.

72
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Customer Removal The Captain is responsible for making the final decision regarding F 11.5.4.1
the carriage of any customer.
Customers whose physical or mental condition or conduct will not
jeopardize the safety of the aircraft or its occupants, including
the customer himself, should be allowed to travel. Delta does not
deny boarding to a customer based on race, color, national
origin, religion, sex, ancestry or disability. Any questions
regarding the acceptability of a customer will be referred to the
Captain, whose decision is final.
Customers that should not be boarded or, if boarded, should be
removed and not allowed to travel:
• any customer who is, or appears to be, intoxicated or under
the influence of drugs or alcohol
• any unticketed person who has boarded the aircraft illegally
• any customer who does not have a boarding pass
• any through customer who has not been cleared by an agent
• any customer who has not been cleared by security
• any customer whose behavior may present a threat to other
customers
• any customer who refuses to submit to a search of their
person or property for explosives, concealed weapons or
dangerous objects
• any customer who is unruly, obnoxious, or disorderly
• any customer who is not fully clothed (e.g. no footwear, no
shirt)
• any customer who refuses to produce positive identification
Customer Removal The Captain will convene the Security Conflict Team and F 11.5.4.1
coordinate with the gate agent prior to the removal of any
customer.
Customer Service Animals Delta will not deny boarding of a service animal that is trained to F 11.3.3.5
provide assistance to a customer. A customer may have more
than one service animal.
The acceptance of a service animal for transportation in the
aircraft cabin should be determined by ACS.
Customer Standing If notified that a customer has left his seat during ground F 11.3.6
movement, stop the aircraft when it is safe to do so.
Customer Suspicions Use the flowchart in FOM Chapter 11 to evaluate suspicious F 11.5.3.6.2
customers.
CVR and FDR The cockpit voice recorder (CVR) and digital flight data recorder F 28.3.3
(DFDR) may not be disabled in flight for any reason.
DA, DH and AH Decision Altitude (DA) is determined by reference to the T 5.2.3.6
barometric altimeter.
Decision Height (DH) is determined by reference to the radio
altimeter.
Alert Height (AH) is used for fail-operational CAT III operations. T 5.2.3.7
Radio altimeters are set to alert height to assist in monitoring
autoland status.
Dangerous Goods In the rare event a NOTAC is added to a flight which already has a F 12.4.1
NOTOC, the loading crew and flight crew will not have the
benefit of automated warnings and cautions.

73
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Dangerous Goods Do not load dry ice in the aft or bulk compartment on the 767 due F 12.9.3.1.2
to the flight attendant crew rest facility.
Dry ice is prohibited in all compartments on the 767T (Ships
1607-1613).
Dangerous Goods Pilots must carefully check the NOTOC for Warnings and F 12.3.2
Cautions when it is delivered to the flight deck. If a load error is
discovered, it must be resolved with the load agent. If unable to
resolve an error, reject the shipment.
Pilots should never receive a NOTOC with a WARNING. If you
do, refuse the shipment.
Dangerous Goods The maximum quantity per aircraft compartment for most F 12.6.4
dangerous goods is 25 kg or 26 liters, or any combination
totaling 25 (1 kg is the same as 1 liter for these calculations). All
aircraft have FWD and AFT compartments and some aircraft
have BLK compartments. When an aircraft has a BLK
compartment, AFT/BLK are considered the same compartment
for quantity and segregation purposes.
Dangerous Goods Do not load radioactive material in the aft or bulk bin of the 767 F 12.12.5
due to the below-deck crew rest facility.
Dangerous Goods Drill Codes are intended as supplemental guidance and do not F 12.14.6
replace the appropriate non-normal checklist. Drill Codes are
listed on the NOTOC and the corresponding guidance is in FOM
Chapter 12.
For emergencies involving DGs, forwarding the dispatcher’s
phone number on the flight plan or NOTOC to ATC can provide
ARFF at the landing airfield with details regarding DGs on
board.
Data Link Inop Do not attempt to fix any inoperative function by accessing the Q 5.08
MAINT MENU submenu. This submenu requires special
training and is to be used by Avionics Technicians only.
Data Link Lost If out of VHF range, consider that SATCOM may be unavailable Q 5.07
and CPDLC/ADS-C and ACARS may be inop.
Notify ATC if SATCOM cannot be restored. A descent below
FL350 and HF position reports may be required.

74
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Departure Priorities A 4.2.2
All Engines 1.Company Pages – All Engine Departure Procedure
2.ATC clearance
3.Obstacle departure procedure
4.Depart on course

Engine-Out 1.Company Pages – Engine Out Departure Procedure

2.ATC clearance
3.Depart on course

Missed Approach/Rejected A missed approach is a go-around initiated at or before the MAP

Landing Priorities and at or before the MDA/DA/AH.
A rejected landing is a go-around initiated after the MAP or below
the MDA/DA/AH.

All Engines 1. Company Pages Missed Approach/Rejected Landing table –

All Engines
2. ATC clearance
3. Published Missed Approach Procedure

Engine-Out 1. Company Pages Missed Approach/Rejected Landing table –

Engine Out
2. ATC clearance
3. Published Missed Approach Procedure

Visual Approach • Contact ATC as soon as possible. Squawk 7600 if

communications cannot be established.
• Comply with the Company Pages Missed Approach/Rejected
Landing table
• Set the charted missed approach altitude of an underlying
approach or the MSA if there is no underlying approach
• Remain VMC and fly straight ahead if terrain, obstacles and
special use airspace are not a factor

LAHSO The published procedure or as directed by ATC. A 4.2.6

Descent In VNAV PATH, thrust and speedbrakes control airspeed and the GS
airplane controls pitch to maintain the calculated path, but in
VNAV SPD pitch controls airspeed based on whatever power
setting is set and any calculated path is ignored.
If ATC issues a speed reduction while established on a VNAV
PATH descent, do not use speed intervention or you may miss an
assigned airspeed or altitude crossing restriction. That’s because
speed intervention causes the airplane to transition from VNAV
PATH to VNAV SPD. The airplane will most likely depart the
path and crossing restrictions on the path will be ignored as the
airplane uses pitch to maintain the speed in the speed window.
To be accurate, the airplane will not descend below an altitude at
a fix loaded in the FMS, but could very easily be high at a hard
altitude and/or fast at a speed restriction. To avoid this problem,
keep the airplane in VNAV PATH. If ATC issues a speed
reduction during descent, load the new airspeed into the Descent
page in the FMS. After the FMS completes its calculations, the
orange airspeed bug on the airspeed indicator will move to the
new airspeed and you can then use speedbrakes to slow the
airplane to that airspeed.

75
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Descent The FCTM recommends that, in general terms, when an early GS
descent from cruise is required, DES NOW should be used when
inside 50 nm and a cruise descent should be used when outside
50 nm, but there are times that can get you into trouble:
• Mach-to-IAS restrictions (e.g. maintain cruise Mach in the
descent until 280 knots) are loaded into the Descent page so
if you make a cruise descent they will be ignored. Use DES
NOW instead so they will be honored.
• A cruise descent will delete any altitude and airspeed
restrictions above the new cruise altitude. For example, if
you make a cruise descent from FL350 to FL250, any
altitude and airspeed restrictions above FL250 at a waypoint
on the route will be deleted and the airplane will make a
normal cruise descent to FL250, possibly resulting in an
altitude or airspeed bust. Using DES NOW instead will
honor those restrictions.
When descending on an arrival procedure, therefore, DES NOW
is the best option for speed and altitude management
Descent “Descend via” is an abbreviated ATC clearance that requires T 4.3.3.1
compliance with the procedure’s lateral and vertical paths, and
associated speed and altitude restrictions, as published. The
bottom altitude on a STAR or STAR runway transition is the
lowest published or ATC assigned altitude. ATC may issue a
“descend via” clearance without a runway assignment, which
authorizes pilots to navigate laterally and vertically to the end of
the common route. If not cleared for a runway transition, the
bottom altitude is the lowest altitude prior to the transition. This
is the last common waypoint on the STAR.
Pilots shall respond to “descend via” clearances by repeating the
clearance verbatim. (Say “descend via.”) When changing
frequencies, or on initial contact, advise ATC of current altitude,
“descending via” procedure name, and runway transitions if
assigned. If assigned an altitude or speed that is not contained on
the STAR, advise ATC of restrictions assigned by the prior
controller.
If vectored off of a STAR, ATC must provide a new altitude and
heading. All restrictions are canceled, including any speed
assignments unless ATC provides another speed assignment.
Descent In ICAO airspace, when an arriving aircraft on a STAR is cleared T 4.3.3.4
to descend to a level lower than the level or the levels specified
on the STAR, the aircraft shall follow the published vertical
profile of a STAR unless such restrictions are explicitly canceled
by ATC. Published minimum levels based on terrain clearance
shall always be applied.
In US airspace, when ATC issues an amended altitude without
specifying the point at which the restriction begins, ends, or
changes the charted restrictions (e.g., using the word “except”),
it thereby cancels altitude restrictions contained in the STAR but
not any published speed restriction.
Descent For manual descent planning, use 3 nm per 1,000 feet of altitude T 4.3.3.6
loss at idle power with no wind.

76
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Descent Offpath Descent circles are referenced to the end-of-descent T 4.3.8
waypoint shown at 1L on the Descent page. The outer circle
assumes clean configuration and the inner circle assumes
speedbrakes extended.
Descent During a cruise descent, the airplane will fly a 1,250 fpm descent T 4.3.9
in VNAV SPD to the new cruise altitude. The FMS will
calculate a new Top of Descent point for the new cruise altitude.
If DES NOW is used for descent instead, the airplane will fly a
1,250 fpm descent until it reaches the calculated idle descent
path at which time it will intercept and maintain the path using
VNAV PATH.
If an early descent to the destination is required and more than 50
nm from the Top of Descent, use a cruise descent. Monitor the
descent to make sure you reach the new cruise altitude prior to
the new Top of Descent point.
If an early descent is required within 50 nm of the Top of Descent
point, use DES NOW instead. The airplane will fly a 1,250 fpm
descent until it intercepts the calculated descent path and then
use VNAV PATH to maintain the path and comply with altitude
restrictions. Do not use a cruise descent if within 50 nm of the
original Top of Descent point because if the calculated path is
reached during the descent the airplane will ignore it and simply
maintain a 1,250 fpm descent and may therefore miss crossing
restrictions and/or become high on the descent path.
Descent Plan to be 40 miles from the airport at 10,000' AFE and 250 knots. T 4.3.12
Descent Using engine anti-ice increases descent distance. T 4.3.15
Descent Anomaly If the FMS calculated Top of Descent point is beyond a fix with an T 4.3.2
At or Above altitude restriction, the FMS will create a false Top
of Descent point and place it on top of the fix with the altitude
restriction. If that fix is the active waypoint and DES NOW is
executed prior to that fix, the airplane will remain in level flight
and the autothrottles will reduce power resulting in low airspeed.
To correct the anomaly, execute DES NOW and then
immediately select SPD Intervention. The airplane will begin a
descent at 1250 fpm. When at least 400 feet below the path (full
football deflection), close the speed window to arm VNAV
PATH. When VNAV PATH reengages, the airplane will descend
on the path at the correct airspeed.
This anomaly does not occur if the aircraft transitions to the
descent in VNAV from the Top of Descent (i.e., Descend Via
versus Descend Now).
Do not delete the At or Above restriction in an effort to remove
the anomaly because it introduces the risk of violating the
altitude restriction.
Descent Rate When operating at low altitude, and above stabilized approach F 4.2.4
altitudes, do not let the aircraft descent rate in feet per minute
exceed your altitude in feet AGL. This will ensure a reduced
terrain closure rate and an increase in recognition and response
time in the event of an unintentional conflict with terrain.

77
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Destination Weather F 14.1.3
Basic Dispatch The destination airport must have weather reports, forecasts or a
combination of both, which indicate conditions will be at or
above the authorized minimums at the ETA. If there is no
applicable IFR approach, they must indicate a ceiling and
visibility which permits a descent from the MEA in visual
conditions.
For destinations where ceiling is the controlling factor, weather
reports, forecasts, or a combination of both must be greater than
or equal to the HAA/HAT at the ETA. Approaches with
visibility-only minimums do not consider ceiling conditions.
Exemption 3585
Domestic Only Under certain conditions, Exemption 3585 allows dispatch with
conditional phrases like “Tempo” and “Prob40” in the forecast
for the destination and/or first alternate. A second alternate is
required when this exemption is used.
Extended Overwater
A flight may be dispatched for extended overwater operations to a
destination with weather forecasted below landing minimums
provided the filed alternate airport meets alternate weather
criteria.
Destination Weather F 14.3.3.5
International For a flight to be dispatched under a straight release or a B044
release, weather reports and/or forecasts must indicate that
conditions will be:
• at or above the authorized landing minimums at the
estimated time of arrival at any airport to which the flight is
dispatched,
or
• at or above the authorized alternate minimums at the
estimated time of arrival for any required destination
alternate airports
For a flight to be dispatched under a B043 release, weather reports
and/or forecasts must indicate that conditions will be:
• at or above the authorized landing minimums at the
estimated time of arrival at any airport to which the flight is
dispatched,
and
• at or above the authorized alternate minimums at the
estimated time of arrival for any required destination
alternate airports
Dispatch for MEL Purposes Dispatch for MEL/CDL purposes is defined as the advancement of F 28.3.5
the thrust levers for the purpose of taking off (i.e. the takeoff
event).
If the takeoff is aborted for any reason, the MEL/CDL applies.

78
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Ditching Configuration The proper ditching configuration is: Q 0.01
• Gnd Prox Gear and Terrain switches Override
• packs off
• outflow valve closed (Manual, then Descend)
• Seat Belt signs on
• autobrakes off
• speedbrakes down (not armed)
• gear up
• flaps 30
• Emergency Lights on
• maintain Vref 30 to touchdown
• maintain 130 knots minimum for the RAT if both engines are
not operating (A higher airspeed may be required to avoid a
stall if the flaps are up and/or if the airplane is heavy.)
• take the ELT when evacuating
Diversion Be sure to change the Destination on Route page 1 to the new GS
destination so arrivals and approaches will be displayed on the
FMS.
“Two in, two out, two w’s.” Notify flight attendants and
passengers, contact ATC and Flight Control, check weather and
landing weight.
Diversion The Captain and dispatcher determine airport suitability based on F 15.1.1.1
all factors relevant to the situation. (Contact the dispatcher!)
The airport of choice should provide the highest level of safety
available. In the simplest terms, the most suitable airport is
closest in time with an appropriate runway. Factors to consider
are:
• time to the alternate and aircraft performance
• weather conditions and terrain
• instrument approach facilities
• number, length and condition of runways
• pilot familiarity
• NOTAMS and facilities
This is not the same definition as an ETOPS suitable airport. F 15.1.1.2
Use ATC as a substitute for the dispatcher only in an emergency.
Diversion If a decision is made to land at an airport other than the filed F 15.1.1
destination or an alternate listed on the FDR, the Captain must
either:
• contact the dispatcher for an amended release or
• use his emergency authority
If unable to contact the dispatcher, select an airport using the
following priority:
• online airport
• offline airport
• military airfield
• public non-commercial airport
Diversion For diversion planning while airborne, use the Diversion Fuel F 15.2.1.1
Planning Guide in Chapter 15 of the FOM.

79
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Diversion When a destination alternate is required on the FDR, the decision F 15.2.1
to divert will be made to protect the fuel required to fly to:
• the destination missed approach point, plus
• fuel required to fly from the missed approach point to
landing at the most distant alternate, plus
• required FOM minimum fuel
Diversion After landing at a divert airport, refer to the Post-Diversion F 15.3.1
checklist in Chapter 15 of the FOM and convene the Diversion
Coordination Team.
Diversion When selecting a diversion airport while airborne, the weather F 15.1.1.3
must be at or above normal approach weather minimums.
Dispatch alternate weather minimums do not apply.
Document Verification Verify the correct flight number, ship number, release number and F 14.2.2
date on all documents.
Doors Do not operate the entry and cargo doors with winds at the door of II
more than 40 knots. Do not keep a door open when wind gusts
are more than 65 knots. Strong winds can cause damage to the
structure of the airplane.
Doors Escape slides and powered door opening (757) disarm V 5.1.2.3
automatically when doors are opened from outside the aircraft. V 5.1.2.4
Duct Leak (767) Flight longer than 6 hours with a Duct Leak light illuminated may Q 2.03
result in structural damage.
E&E Compartment (767) Inflight access to accessible E&E compartments is prohibited F 28.3.4
without approval from the Flight Operations SOF via the Duty
Pilot unless an inflight emergency dictates.
The Captain may authorize E&E entry without prior approval if
needed during a time-critical, inflight emergency which may
affect safety of flight.
To ensure safety, maintain communications and visual contact
with a pilot in the E&E compartment.
Early Departure Local operations may permit a flight to depart up to five minutes F 14.6.1.2.1
early without contacting the OCC. Requests for earlier
departures must be coordinated with the dispatcher.
EFB The following applications are required for dispatch: F 16.1.3.1
• Jeppesen FliteDeck Pro (primary and backup applications)
• AeroDocs
If one of these applications is missing, outdated or inoperative,
pilots must apply EFB Failure, Dispatch, & Recovery
Considerations guidance.
EFB Pilots may charge or power the EFB and the backup battery on the F 16.1.18.1
flight deck using approved and placarded outlets only. Use of
other outlets is prohibited.
EFB Verify one spare EFB mount is on board prior to departure. V 3.4.1
EFB Do not place the EFB in direct sunlight on the glare shield. V 5.1.3
EFB Do not place the backup battery in checked luggage. F 16.1.18.5
EFB Prior to pushback, confirm the EFB is in airplane mode. V 3.4.5
Individually select cellular, Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as required.
80
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 EFB From initiation of the Preflight Checklist until completion of the F 16.1.9
Shutdown/Secure Checklist, the EFB should be in Airplane
mode and may not be:
• connected to cellular networks unless an operational need
exists
• connected to customer GoGo
The use of Wi-Fi on the flight deck for purposes other than
approved applications is prohibited.
All EFBs may not be off simultaneously. Maintain at least one
EFB in the sleep mode or on mode to provide ready access to
data when operational needs dictate.
EFB To conserve battery power, consider placing the EFB in sleep V 3.4.15
mode.
All EFBs may not be off simultaneously. Maintain at least one
EFB in sleep or on mode to provide ready access to data when
operational needs dictate.
EFB In the event of a fire or overheat, do not cover the device or use Q 8.16
ice to cool the device. Ice or other materials insulate the device,
increasing the likelihood that additional battery cells will reach
thermal runaway. (Applies to PEDs in the cabin too.)
EGPWS (If installed) Terrain Caution – 40 to 60 seconds from impact with terrain II
shown as solid amber on the HSI.
Terrain Warning – 20 to 30 seconds from impact with terrain
shown as solid red on the HSI.
Except for 757 ships 6801-6823, EGPWS does not display or
warn for man-made obstacles
Terrain ahead may exceed the airplane's climb performance.
EICAS Messages Cancel EICAS messages after completing the appropriate non- GS
normal checklist so you’ll notice if something new pops up.
EICAS Messages Consequential EICAS alert messages may appear as a result of a Q NNCI 1.8
primary failure condition (e.g. Rudder Ratio as a result of a
hydraulic system failure) or as a result of doing a checklist (e.g.
Pack Off as a result of doing the Smoke, Fire or Fumes
checklist).
Complete the non-normal checklists for consequential EICAS
alert messages unless “Do not accomplish the following
checklists” is included in the primary checklist.
EICAS Status Messages Attempt to erase all status messages that appear prior to dispatch. V 5.15.1
If a status message cannot be erased, contact maintenance.
Do not erase status messages that appear after dispatch. Inform
maintenance and record in the logbook.
To erase status messages, accomplish the following on the V 5.15.2
auxiliary panel:
1. Press the ECS/MSG switch
2. Press the AUTO EVENT READ switch
3. Press and hold the ERASE switch for 3 seconds
EICAS Status Messages After dispatch (thrust levers advanced for takeoff), there is no V 3.1.13
requirement to check status messages because any message
concerning the safe continuation of the flight will appear as an
EICAS alert message.

81
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 EICAS Status Messages Check status messages after shutdown and record in the logbook. V 3.4.22
Do not attempt to erase these messages.
Electronic Equipment The following electronic equipment is installed: II
• 1 ADF (two on the 767)
• 2 Air Data Computers (ADC) on 757-200 and 767
• 3 Air Data/Inertial Reference Units (ADIRU) on 757-300
• 3 Autopilots
• 2 DMEs
• 2 EICAS Computers
• 3 Flight Control Computers (FCC)
• 2 Flight Management Computers (FMC)
• 2 GPSs (if installed)
• 3 ILSs
• 3 Inertial Reference Units (IRU) on 757-200 and 767
• 1 Marker Beacon Receiver
• 2 Multi-Purpose Control Display Units (MCDU)
• 3 Radio Altimeters
• 3 Symbol Generators
• 1 Thrust Management Computer (TMC)
• 2 Transponders
• 2 VORs
ELT Reception When a signal from an emergency locator transmitter or crash A 6.9.1
position indicator is heard (ELT frequency 121.5 MHz), report it
to the nearest ATC facility, including:
• altitude at time of reception
• when and where the signal was first heard
• when and where the signal was heard the loudest
• when and where the signal faded or was lost
Emergencies in the Simulator Always declare an emergency in the simulator even if you might GS
not in the real world. It can’t hurt and the evaluators expect it.
Emergency Airport The flight may proceed to an airport other than the nearest suitable F 17.8.2.1
if the Captain and dispatcher determine such action to be safe.
Factors to consider include:
• the nature of the malfunction
• possible mechanical difficulties if flight continues
• the availability of the engine for later use
• the aircraft’s altitude, weight, and usable fuel
• weather conditions and terrain (enroute/destination)
• air traffic congestion
• pilot airport familiarity
• flight attendant/customer response to the event.
Emergency Airport Situations that would require landing at the nearest suitable airport Q NNCI 1.3
include, but are not limited to:
• when stated in the checklist
• fire, smoke or fumes which continues
• only one AC power source remains (engine or APU
generator)
• only one hydraulic system remains
• as determined by the flight crew

82
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Emergency Airports Emergency Airports in FD Pro: A 7.3.4
• are identified by EMER and displayed in red
• not authorized by the FAA for normal daily operations as
regular, alternate, or refueling
• may have no ground and/or passenger handling services
available.
• may have limited or no Jeppesen and FMS database
coverage
• performance Engineering may not have evaluated the airport
An airport that has an EMER designation should only be used
when an emergency prevents the flight from safely continuing to
a regular, alternate or fueling airport.
Emergency Authority In an emergency situation requiring immediate action, the Captain F 17.2.1
make take any action necessary. He may deviate from prescribed
procedures, methods, weather minimums and Federal Aviation
Regulations to the extent required in the interest of safety. ATC
clearance is not required prior to taking action; however, for
safety and priority handling it is essential that ATC be advised of
the pilot’s intentions as soon as possible.
Emergency Briefing The Captain should brief the Flight Leader on the following F 17.3.2.2
(TTSR):
T – type of emergency
T – time to prepare cabin
S – special instructions (signal to brace/evacuate, usable exits,
etc.)
R – repeat the information back to the Captain
Emergency Communications Notify: F 17.3.1
• flight attendants
• customers “Two In, Two Out”
• ATC
• Flight Control (local Delta Ops for a ground emergency)
Emergency Declaration If an emergency is declared during flight operations, the Captain F 17.2.1
must submit an ASR within 24 hours of returning to base.
Emergency Definition An emergency is a non-normal event which creates a potential F 17.1.2
hazard to the aircraft, customers or crew. The urgency or need
for priority handling and assistance are additional considerations
when defining an emergency.

83
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Emergency Landing Accomplish the following in preparation for an emergency F 17.5.1
landing:
• if circumstances permit, the Captain will notify the
dispatcher of the time, place and reason for the intended
landing
• direct the flight attendants to take appropriate precautions for
the customers
• loosen ties and remove sharp objects
• notify the tower and fire department of the location and type
of any dangerous goods
• for an overweight landing, refer to the QRH and the FOM
• if a forced landing appears imminent and the aircraft is
below 1,000 feet AGL, announce “Brace for landing” over
the PA
Delta does not recommend foaming runways for emergency
landings and civilian airports in the US and US territories no
longer foam runways anyway.
Emergency Landing There is a checklist in the QRH for emergency landings. It Q 0.23
includes depressurizing the cabin.
Emergency Lights Emergency lights must be armed for taxi, takeoff and landing. V 3.3.8.2
They do not need to be armed during passenger boarding or
deplaning.
Emergency Signal Three distinct soundings of the flight attendant call system. F 17.3.2.1
Repeat as necessary.

84
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Emergency Types Do not use the terms Red or Yellow Emergency with ATC. They F 17.2.2
are for Company use only.

A Red Emergency means that the Captain anticipates:

• the landing may cause injury to the passengers and/or
damage to the aircraft
• an emergency evacuation is probable
• airport rescue and firefighting equipment is required

When the Captain declares a Red Emergency, the flight

attendants:
• will prepare the cabin for an emergency landing/ditching and
evacuation
• will instruct the passengers to brace for landing
• will anticipate an evacuation after landing

A Yellow Emergency means that the Captain anticipates:

• the landing will be successful and will not cause injury to the
passengers and/or damage to the aircraft
• an emergency evacuation is not anticipated or the evacuation
decision will be made after landing
• airport rescue and firefighting equipment may be required

When the Captain declares a Yellow Emergency, the flight

attendants:
• will not anticipate an evacuation after landing
• will be prepared for dynamic circumstances which may
require an evacuation after landing

A Medical Emergency exists when STAT-MD and the Captain

determine that a medical event is critical and requires an
expedited landing or diversion.
Engine Compressor Surge or If an engine compressor surge or stall occurs during ground F 17.8.1
Stall operations or if a takeoff is rejected due to a compressor surge or
stall, a maintenance inspection is required prior to flight.
Engine Condition Report If necessary, complete for flights over one hour once every three V 5.7.2
hours.
Turn the autothrottles off and allow the engines to stabilize 3-5
minutes before taking the snapshot. Be sure to turn the
autothrottles back on when you’re done.
Follow the instructions in Volume 1.
Engine Crossbleed Start The APU must be shut down or the APU bleed switch must be V 5.7.1.2
Off.
The area behind the airplane should be considered, but crossbleed
thrust is usually less than breakaway thrust for single-engine
taxi.
Advance the operating engine to approximately 70% N2.
Engine Exceedance If an engine exceedance occurs on takeoff after thrust is set and T 8.3.9
the takeoff is continued, do not retard the thrust lever in an
attempt to control the exceedance because it invalidates takeoff
performance. Wait until at least 400' AGL and airspeed is
acceptable before retarding the thrust lever and accomplishing
any required checklist.

85
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Failure Certain engine failures, such as fan blade separation, can cause T 8.3.5
high levels of airframe vibration. Although the airframe
vibration may seem severe to the flight crew, it is extremely
unlikely that the vibration will damage the aircraft structure or
critical systems. However, the vibration should be reduced as
soon as possible by reducing airspeed and descending. In
general, as airspeed decreases vibration levels decrease. As
airspeed or altitude change the airplane can transition through
various levels of vibration. It should be noted that the vibration
may not completely stop.
If vibration remains unacceptable, descending to a lower altitude
(terrain permitting) allows a lower airspeed and normally lower
vibration levels. Vibration will likely become imperceptible as
airspeed is further reduced during approach.
Engine Failure (Dual Engine) Do not delay. Accomplish the Dual Engine Failure memory items T 8.3.4
and establish the appropriate airspeed immediately to take
advantage of high engine RPM and improve the chances of a
successful restart.
Establishing airspeeds above the minimum crossbleed start
envelope and altitudes below 30,000 feet improves the
probability of a restart. Loss of thrust at higher altitudes may
require descent to a lower altitude to improve windmill starting
capability.
Attempt a windmill restart using memory procedures before
starting the APU. If a windmill restart is not successful, start the
APU as soon as practical to provide power for subsequent start
attempts.
Do not confuse the establishment of APU power with the
reestablishment of engine generator power and advance the
thrust levers prematurely.
Engine Failure (Dual Engine) If the engines are not operating, maintain a minimum of 130 Q 7.02
KIAS for flight controls. (130 knots is to power the RAT. A
higher airspeed may be required if the flaps are up and/or if the
airplane is heavy.) Q 7.03
Normally fly between 200 and 250 knots, depending on the
airplane. Refer to the Dual Engine Failure checklist in the QRH
for the correct airspeed for each airplane.
Engine Failure on Final If an engine fails on final approach after landing flaps are selected, T 5.6.13
Approach a landing may be made with Flaps 25/30. It is usually preferable,
however, to accelerate to 15 knots above the Vref 25/30 bug
speed, retract the flaps to 20 and continue the approach at Flaps
20.
If an engine fails after selecting landing flaps and a go-around is
required, follow normal go-around procedures and retract flaps
to 20.
If an engine fails and the flaps are retracted to 20 and then a go-
around is required, follow single-engine go-around procedures
and retract flaps to 5.
Engine Failure on GoAround If an engine fails during a go-around, perform the normal two- T 5.6.16
engine goaround procedures. Set maximum go-around thrust,
maintain Flaps 20 and Vref 30 + wind corrections until initial
maneuvering is complete and a safe altitude is reached.

86
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Failure on Takeoff The chances of an engine failing exactly at V1 like we practice in GS
the simulator are very remote. An engine may fail on takeoff but
most likely it will fail before V1 requiring an abort or after V1
during rotation or initial climb.
Engine Failure on Takeoff Asymmetric thrust as a result of an engine failure at low speeds on T 3.12.2.1
takeoff may result in loss of directional control due to lack of
rudder effectiveness. Failure to promptly reduce thrust on the
operating engine may result in a runway excursion.
Engine Failure vs Engine Fire The checklist for engine failure is normally accomplished after the T 8.3.1
on Takeoff flaps have been retracted and conditions permit.
In the case of an engine fire, when the aircraft is under control, the
gear has been retracted, and a safe altitude has been attained
(400' AGL minimum), complete the memory items. Due to
asymmetric thrust considerations, the PF retards the affected
thrust lever after the PM confirms the PF has identified the
correct engine.
Engine Failure, Surge or Stall If an engine fails, is shutdown, is operating at reduced thrust due F 17.8.2
to a malfunction or experiences a stall or surge and climb or
cruise power cannot be reestablished, land at the nearest suitable
airport where a safe landing can be made.
If an engine surges or stalls and climb or cruise power can be re-
established, do not initiate an ocean crossing and coordinate
with the dispatcher for the best course of action.
If in an ETOPS area of operation, the nearest suitable airport may
not be the filed ETOPS alternate.
Engine Fire or Engine Severe Accomplish the Engine Fire or Engine Severe Damage or Q 8.04
Damage or Separation Separation memory items and checklist for:
• engine fire warning
• airframe vibrations with abnormal engine indications
• engine separation

Engine Limit or Surge or Stall Accomplish the Engine Limit or Surge or Stall memory items and Q 7.06
checklist if:
• engine indications are abnormal
• engine indications are rapidly approaching or exceeding
limits
• abnormal engine noises are heard, possibly with airframe
vibration
• there is no response to thrust lever movement or the response
is abnormal
• flames in the engine inlet or exhaust are reported
Engine Fuel Filter Erratic engine operation and flameout may occur on the affected Q 7.16
engine due to fuel contamination.
Engine Fuel Leak An increase in fuel imbalance of approximately 1,000 pounds or Q 12.07
more in 30 minutes should be considered an engine fuel leak.
Other indications of an engine fuel leak include: Q 12.15
• visual observation of fuel spray from strut or engine
• excessive engine fuel flow
• total fuel quantity decreasing at an abnormal rate
• FUEL CONFIG or LOW FUEL message on EICAS
• Fuel Disagree, Fuel Qty Error or Insufficient Fuel message
on the MCDU scratchpad

87
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Ground Pneumatic Duct pressure should be 30 psi or greater. V 5.7.1.3
Start It takes two huffer carts or one “super huffer” to start an engine
when APU bleed air is not available.
Engine Ignition on Preflight Position the Ignition Selector to 1 for the Captain’s leg and 2 for V 3.4.4
Check the First Officer’s leg. Select Single for GE FADEC engines.
Engine Indications There are no non-normal checklists for the loss of an engine Q NNCI 1.3
indication or automatic display of the secondary engine
indications. Continue normal engine operation unless an EICAS
message displays or a limit is exceeded.
Engine Inflight Start Do not attempt an inflight restart unless a greater emergency Q 7.18
exists.
Engine N2 Overspeed (757) On some 757s, if N2 overspeeds to 105%, the engine will roll GS
back to 85% N2 and be uncontrollable. On these airplanes, the
throttle will no longer control the engine and the engine will
remain at 85% N2 until shut down. On some 757s with a more
advanced fuel control unit, however, throttle control of the
engine may be regained after the roll back. There is no way to
tell what kind of fuel control unit is installed.
Engine Oil Pressure On P&W engines (all 757s and some 767s), do not advance thrust V 5.16.2.3
beyond that required for taxi until oil temperature reaches 50°C.
Engine Out Circling If flying a circling approach with an engine inoperative, under T 5.6.11
Approaches some flight conditions, such as high temperatures, high pressure
altitudes, and high airplane weight, limit thrust may be required
to maintain level flight with gear down and Flaps 20. When
these conditions are encountered consider retracting the landing
gear for the circling portion of the approach after the descent to
the MDA. The GPWS gear override switch may be used to
prevent nuisance warnings.
Engine Out Driftdown For flight planning: F 14.2.3.8.4
• the aircraft must be able to clear all terrain along the
intended route by at least 1,000 feet with a positive climb
gradient
• if unable, the aircraft must be able to clear all terrain from
the engine failure point to the specified legal alternate by at
least 2,000 feet
Engine Out Rudder Trim In flight, correct rudder input approximately centers the control T 3.12.3
wheel.
Engine Overheat There is a checklist in the QRH for Engine Overheat. Do not Q 8.27
confuse a simple engine overheat with an Engine Fire or with an
Engine Limit, Surge or Stall condition.

88
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Shutdown When an engine shutdown is needed inflight, the PF disconnects T 8.3.6
the autothrottles. The PF then verbally coordinates confirmation
of the affected engine with the PM and then slowly retards the
thrust lever of the engine that will be shut down.
Coordinate activation of the fuel control switch as follows:
• PM places a hand on and verbally identifies the fuel control
switch for the engine that will be shut down
• PF verbally confirms that the PM has identified the correct
fuel control switch
• PM moves the fuel control switch to cutoff
If the checklist requires activation of the engine fire switch,
coordinate as follows:
• PM places a hand on and verbally identifies the engine fire
switch for the engine that is shutdown
• PF verbally confirms that the PM has identified the correct
engine fire switch
• PM pulls the engine fire switch
Engine Shutdown Checklists directing an engine shutdown must be evaluated by the Q NNCI 1.3
Captain to determine whether an actual shutdown or operation at
reduced thrust is the safest course of action. Consideration must
be given to the probable effects of running the engine at reduced
thrust.
Engine Shutdown Ensure both engines are shut down prior to turning off the red V 3.4.22
anti-collision beacon.
Engine Shutdown Turn the respective Engine Bleed Air switch off and ensure the V 3.4.22
Bleed Off light is illuminated prior to engine shutdown. (Failure
to do so will probably cause a bleed valve problem.)
Engine Start Max motoring speed is defined as when engine acceleration is less II
than 1% in 5 seconds.
Engine Start The engine is stabilized at idle when the red max start EGT limit T 2.3.2
line disappears, starting EGT peaks, and N2 is 60% or greater. If
60% N2 is not achieved, the engine may experience an extended
hung start and/or an EGT exceedance, and the engine may not
respond to thrust lever movement.
Engine Start Advancing the engine start lever to idle prematurely can cause a T 2.3.1.2
hot start.
Keep a hand on the engine start lever while observing RPM, EGT
and fuel flow until stabilized.
If fuel is shutoff inadvertently (by closing the engine start lever)
do not reopen the engine start lever in an attempt to restart the
engine.
Failure of the Engine Start switch to hold in GRD until starter
cutout rpm is reached can result in a hot start.
Engine Start If planning to single-engine taxi for takeoff: T 2.3.1.2
757 – normally start the left engine first to minimize PTU
hydraulic pump noise in the cabin.
767 – normally start the right engine first to ensure both the
engine-driven and electric hydraulic pumps are available to
pressurize the normal brake system. This also allows the
rampers to access the bulk bin to load late bags.

89
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Start V 3.4.8
Start selector to GND Verify oil pressure rise and N2 rotation.
Fuel Control to Run At 25% N2 or max motoring with:
• 757 - 18% N2 minimum (magenta radial)
• 767 - 15% N2 minimum (magenta radial)
Verify the Spar Valve disagreement light illuminates and then
extinguishes. If the Spar Valve light fails to illuminate, make a
logbook entry and notify maintenance.
Verify EGT increases and stays below the EGT limit.
Re-engagement of the starter with N2 in excess of 20% will result
in serious damage to the starter and engine.
Stable Start
The engine is stabilized at idle after the red EGT start limit line
disappears, the starting EGT peaks, and N2 reaches 60% or
greater which enables full EEC authority.
Aborted Start
Accomplish the Aborted Engine Start memory item and refer to
the QRH for one or more of the following conditions:
• oil pressure does not rise after selecting GND
• fuel flow is abnormally high or fluctuating
• EGT fails to rise within 20 seconds of selecting RUN
• N1 fails to increase after EGT rise
• EGT quickly nears or exceeds the start limit
• oil pressure indication is not normal by the time the engine is
stabilized at idle
Engine Start One pilot will accomplish the engine start procedure while the V 3.4.8
other will monitor the pushback. Normally the First Officer
accomplishes the engine start procedure.
Engine Start To prevent an uncommanded APU shutdown when turning the V 3.4.8
packs off prior to engine start, close the APU bleed valve, wait
for the Valve light to extinguish, and then turn the packs off.
When the Pack Off lights illuminate, open the APU bleed valve
and start the engine(s).
Engine Start Verify the SPAR Valve disagreement light momentarily V 3.4.8
illuminates and then extinguishes when moving the Fuel Control
switch to Run during engine start. If it does not illuminate, make
a logbook entry and contact maintenance.
Engine Start (757) For ground starting, the EGT limit is 545°C at 0 seconds and T 2.3.2
decreasing linearly to 485°C at 30 seconds. The red tick mark on
the EGT display is set at 485°C and above that temperature the
EGT display will turn red. This does not require an engine shut
down and simply alerts the crew that the temperature is
approaching the 545°C limit and to make note of the time. Only
shut down the engine if it appears the 545°C limit will be
reached or exceeded. If the EGT passes 485°C but does not
exceed 545°C, engine shut down is not required. Make a
logbook entry and contact MCC prior to dispatch for further
guidance.
Engine Start (767) Do not lower the flaps until the engine is stabilized in idle. Flap T 2.3.2
extension causes the Air Demand Pump to operate, which
reduces airflow to the engine starter and may cause a hung start
or a hot start.

90
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Engine Start After engine start, the aps will be selected to the takeoff or V3.1.7
default position.
Engine Starter Duty Cycle The engine starter duty cycle is continuous for 5 minutes and then Limitations
cool for 30 seconds per minute of operation.
Engine Stator (757) On the 757, the L or R ENG STATOR EICAS messages indicates Q 7.28
the EEC is unable to control the stator vane actuator. Any thrust
lever movement or changes to anti-ice, air conditioning pack, or
recirc fan configuration may cause engine flameout.
Engine Tailpipe Fire Motoring is the primary means of extinguishing the fire. T 8.3.2
The engine fire checklist is not appropriate because the fire
extinguishing agent is not effective against a fire inside the
tailpipe.
Engine Tailpipe Fire Complete the Engine Tailpipe Fire checklist only if a fire is Q 8.08
reported on the ground and there is no engine fire warning. If an
engine fire warning is present, complete the Engine Fire or
Severe Damage or Separation memory items and checklist.
Engine Warm Up and Cool Warm Up: 5 minutes desired, 3 minutes minimum V 3.4.12
Down Times Cool Down: 3 minutes or gate arrival, whichever comes first V 3.4.22
Engine-Out Driftdown The flight plan ETOPS engine-out performance will differ from F 14.2.3.8.3
onboard FMC data:
• the flight plan assumes the ETP-predicted weight with no
driftdown, immediate flight at EO altitude at the predefined
airspeed, 1.1% climb capability, and engine and wing anti-
ice on
• the FMC assumes current weight with driftdown to EO
altitude at an optimum or selected EO airspeed, no climb
capability, and engine and wing anti-ice off
English Language English is the primary language for all communications between F 5.2.1
ATC, pilots and cabin crew. Any other language is prohibited
unless there is a specific operational need in the interest of flight
safety.
Equipment Overheat An equipment overheat is indicated by an EQPT OVHT EICAS Q 2.23
(757) or a FWD EQPT COOLING (767) EICAS message that Q 2.28
remains illuminated.
On 767s and most 757s:
• avionics, electronic equipment and displays not on Standby
Busses are subject to imminent failure (includes EFIS
displays)
• avionics and electrical equipment on Standby buses are
reliable for 90 minutes. Continued flight beyond 90 minutes
can result in loss of essential avionics and electrical
equipment.
On some 757s:
• non-essential avionics and electrical equipment are subject to
imminent failure
• cooling is provided to essential avionics and electrical
equipment with no time limit
Plan to land at the nearest suitable airport.

91
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
fl
 Equipment Requirements Some theaters and some airports in North America have special Theater
equipment requirements in addition to the MEL. Check Theater Restrictions
Restrictions on the EFB tablet before dispatch.
Equipment Requirements Different theaters have different communications equipment A 6.1.2
requirements in addition to the MEL. Refer to Airway Manual
Chapter 6 for a chart of dispatch and inflight communications
equipment requirements.
Equipment Requirements Equipment required to fly ILS approaches, RNAV approaches, Q NNOI 0.1
operate RNAV Enroute and for the Performance Based
Communication System (PBCS) is listed in charts in the back of
the QRH. These are airborne requirements, not dispatch
requirements.
Equipment Valve Light (767) An equipment cooling valve is not in the commanded position. Q 2.31
If the light remains on 30 seconds after selecting STBY, the
airplane may not pressurize. Do not take off.
Established On Course Established on course is defined as (5-5-½ alive): T 5.3.2.1.3
• VOR and NDB: within 5 degrees of course or 0.3 cross track
error
• LOC: less than 1 dot
ETA Changes Aircraft with an active ADS-C connection are not required to A 6.3.5.2
provide any ETA updates unless requested by ATC.
ETA Changes ATC must be notified without request when an ETA given is in A 6.3.2.3
error by 3 minutes or more (not required in the U.S. when in
radar contact or with an ADS-C connection).
ETOPS An ETOPS flight is any flight where the planned route places the A 3.3
aircraft more than 60 minutes from an adequate airport in still
air with one engine out.
ETOPS Entry Point The ETOPS Entry Point is the point on the outbound route which
is one hour flying time at the engine-out cruise speed in still air
from an adequate airport.
ETOPS Equal Time Point An Equal Time Point (ETP) is a point on the route of flight where
flight time, considering wind, to each of two selected airports is
equal. Flight plan ETP calculations assume an emergency
descent profile and single engine cruise applying forecast winds
at 10,000' MSL.
ETOPS Adequate Airport An ETOPS Adequate Airport is an airport that meets FAA safety
requirements.
ETOPS Alternate Airport An ETOPS Alternate Airport is an adequate airport designated in
the dispatch flight release for use in the event of a diversion. An
ETOPS alternate airport is for flight planning purposes only and
does not in any way limit the selection of a different suitable
airport in the event of an emergency or diversion.
ETOPS Suitable Airport An ETOPS Suitable Airport is an adequate airport with weather
reports, NOTAMS and field conditions which would allow an
engine out approach (CAT I) and landing at the likely time of
arrival.
ETOPS ETP Fuel It’s possible that Min Fuel for Takeoff will not provide the GS
required fuel at the ETP. Check by inserting the ETP point in the
route of flight (do not execute) and note the fuel remaining.
Compare to the required ETP fuel and then erase the point.
Check fuel for the redispatch point the same way.
92
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 ETOPS ETP Fuel Fuel reserves required at ETPs are calculated based on the A 3.3.14
following:
• pressurization loss in addition to or independent of an engine
shutdown
• engine and wing anti-ice on, plus icing on unprotected
surfaces
• APU operating
• MEL/CDL penalties
• five percent fuel reserve to allow for errors in wind forecast
• five percent fuel added for weather avoidance (180 ETOPS
only)
• holding (approximately 15 minutes at 1,500 ft. above the
alternate airport)
• approach and missed approach and landing
Evacuation or Ditching T 8.5
Captain For both ground evacuation and ditching, proceed to the forward
cabin area and assist as needed. Exit from the rear of the
airplane after all passengers are off if possible.

First Officer For a ground evacuation, proceed to the forward door area and
ensure forward exits are open. Exit from the forward exit and
assist from outside the aircraft.
For a ditching, take the ELT. Ensure forward exits are open. Exit
from a forward exit and board raft.

Relief Pilot (if installed) Open the cockpit door. Stow loose items.
If ground evacuation, proceed to the forward door area, ensure
exits are open, exit from a forward exit and assist from outside
the aircraft.
If ditching, duties depend on the airplane. Refer to the FCTM.
Evacuation: Customer Initiated Upon being notified that an unwarranted customer initiated F 17.6.5
evacuation has started, the Captain should:
• consider configuring the aircraft for evacuation, if possible
(shut down engines, etc.)
• make a PA advising passengers the evacuation is not
necessary and to remain in their seats
Evacuation: Flight Attendant In a life threatening situation (fire, smoke or structural damage) F 17.6.4
Initiated and once the aircraft has come to a complete and final stop,
flight attendants have the authority to initiate evacuation without
instructions from the flight deck.
Event Record To help improve pneumatic system reliability, press the Event V 3.4.16
Record button after the descent is established and when the
thrust levers are at or near idle.

93
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Extended Ground Time Extended ground time is defined as an aircraft remaining at the F 4.1.2.3
gate greater than two hours from block-in to block-out time.
Pilots may request the next planned pushback time from local
operations or Flight Control via ACARS.
If the aircraft will have an extended ground time:
• run the Secure checklist and leave the Logo lights on
• shut down the APU upon departing the aircraft
• leave a dark aircraft if no ground power is available
At some international stations the cost of ground power and air is F 4.1.2.4
more expensive than running the APU. Refer to Airport Remarks
on the flight plan for guidance and, if published, that guidance
takes precedence over Company Pages. Notify the dispatcher via
ACARS about ground service equipment limitations that are not
reported on the flight paperwork.
Extended Range (767) All Delta 767s are 767-300ER airplanes. Differences
Fast/Slow Indicator The Fast/Slow indicator on the ADI is anticipatory. Use it as a GS
trend indicator for setting power instead of waiting for the
airspeed to respond. It works especially well on single-engine
approaches.
Final Approach Segment A 4.4.14
Non-Precision Starts at the FAF or the FAP
• FAF – Maltese Cross
• FAP – on course inbound (“5-5-½ alive”)

Precision Starts at the Precision Final Approach Fix (PFAF) or FAP (ICAO),
which is established on the localizer with the glideslope centered
at the published glideslope intercept altitude. When ATC directs
a lower-than-published glideslope intercept altitude, it is the
resultant actual point of glideslope intercept. If more than one
glideslope intercept altitude is published, the point closest to the
threshold is the PFAF.

RNAV RNAV (GPS) with LNAV only: starts at the Maltese Cross
RNAV (GPS) with VNAV: starts where the level flight path
intersects the RNP glide path overlaid by the sloped/angled
flight track representing the final approach segment
RNAV (RNP): starts at the location where the level flight path
intersects the RNP glide path representing the final approach
segment. This point is labeled “GP Intcpt” on approach charts.
Fire Extinguishers II
Halon All fires, but primarily on electrical, fuel and grease fires.
Water Fabric, paper and wood fires. Primary for laptop or PED fire.
Fire Extinguishers If a fire extinguisher is discharged on the flight deck, wear oxygen II
masks set to 100% oxygen with Emergency selected.
Fire Fighting Remove power source from electrical fires as soon as possible. II
Avoid discharging fire extinguishers directly on people due to
possible suffocating effects. (A weapon against terrorists.)
Do not discharge too close to a fire as it may scatter the fire.
Stay away from the fuel source.
Avoid breathing vapors, fumes and heated smoke as much as
possible.

94
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fire or Smoke at the Gate For cabin smoke or fire at the gate, do not reference the Smoke, GS
Fire or Fumes checklist since it is designed for smoke or fire in
flight and is of limited use on the ground. Declare an emergency
with ATC or Ramp Tower and refer to the Evacuation checklist.
Be aware the normal passenger loading door (1L or 2L) is the
safest exit. Warn rampers around the airplane that slides may
deploy.
Fire Switches II
Engine Silences the fire bell
Arms both fire bottles
Closes engine and spar fuel valves (6 items)
Closes the bleed valve
Trips the generator
Shuts off fluid to the engine-driven hydraulic pump

APU Silences the fire bell (and the nose gear horn if on the ground)
Arms the APU fire bottle(s)
Shuts down the APU (backs up automatic shutdown if on the
ground with both engines shut down)
Closes the APU fuel valve (6 items)
Trips the APU generator
Closes the APU bleed valve

Forward Cargo Arms all cargo fire extinguisher bottles

Arms the compartment extinguisher valve
Turns off both recirc fans

Aft Cargo Arms all cargo fire extinguisher bottles

Arms the compartment extinguisher valve
Turns off the right recirc fan (757) or both recirc fans (767)
Inhibits high flow from both packs (767 only)
Fire Testing The engine and APU fire detectors are continuously monitored for II
faults and tested automatically whenever power is first applied
or transferred from one source to another, and may also be tested
manually with the test switch.
The cargo compartment smoke detectors are tested only when
power is first applied or transferred from one source to another
or when tested manually with the test switch.
The wheel well fire detection system is not monitored and is
tested only when the test switch is pressed. (Which is why fire
testing is required on the first flight of the day.)
Fire Testing Engine, APU and Cargo – 19 lights and a bell V 5.8.1.1
Wheel well – 5 lights and a bell V 5.8.1.2
First Flight of the Day The First Flight of the Day checks need only be accomplished V 3.4.1
prior to the first departure of the calendar day as noted in the
logbook
Flap Extension Since the flaps extend more slowly when using the alternate T 8.6.2
system, it is recommended to delay setting the new command
speed until the flaps reach the selected position.

95
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Flap Extension After wave off and prior to taxi, the Captain will call "Salute V 3.4.9
received, Flaps __" and the First Officer will set the appropriate
flap setting and call “Flap Lever __.”
If the WDR is not available, set Flaps 5. (It may or may not be
changed after the WDR arrives.)
Flap Extension Schedule Call for flap extension to the next flap setting prior to slowing T 5.1.13
below the maneuvering speed for the existing flap position.
As the aircraft decelerates:
• select Flaps 1 at Vref 30 + 80
• select Flaps 5 at Vref 30 + 60
• select Flaps 15 or 20 at Vref 30 + 40
• select Flaps 25 or 30 at Vref 30 + 20
Flap Indication Disagree If the flap position indicator does not agree with the flap handle Q 9.8
but there are no EICAS indications of Asymmetry or Disagree,
run the Flap Indication Disagree checklist in the QRH. Do not
run the Asymmetry or Disagree checklist.
Flap Maneuver Speed The flap maneuver speed (Vref 30 + 40 for Flaps 5, Vref 30 + 80 T 1.5.1
for Flaps Up, etc.) is the recommended operating speed during
takeoff or landing operations. These speeds guarantee full
maneuver capability or at least 40° of bank (25° of bank and 15°
overshoot) to stick shaker within a few thousand feet of the
airport altitude. While the flaps may be extended up to 20,000
feet, less maneuver margin to stick shaker exists for a fixed
speed as altitude increases.
Flap Movement Do not move the flaps on the ground without appropriate V 3.4.4
clearance from ground personnel. (Or until after wave off.)
Flap Retraction After flaps have reached position and with the aircraft T 3.10.5.1
accelerating:
• select Flaps 5 at Vref 30 + 20 on a Flaps 15 or 20 takeoff
• select Flaps 1 at Vref 30 + 40
• select Flaps Up at Vref 30 + 60
Flap Retraction Consider delaying flap retraction while maneuvering, heavy T 3.10.5
weight or in turbulence. Delaying flap retraction until the
maneuver speed for the next flap setting is reached provides a
greater margin to stick shaker to accommodate load changes as
the flaps are being retracted. At heavy weights, delaying flap
retraction may result in speeds approaching flap placard limits.
Prevent flap overspeeds by monitoring flap placard speeds and
AFDS pitch guidance.
Flap Retraction During flap retraction, select the next flap position when reaching T 3.10.5
the maneuver speed for the existing flap position.
Flap Schedules Flap retraction and extension schedules provide speeds that are T 1.5.3
close to minimum drag and in a climb are close to maximum
angle of climb speed.
Flaps 25 Landing If Flaps 30 approach speed, including wind additives, is within 10 T 6.9.1
knots of Flaps 30 placard speed, use Flaps 25 and Vref 25 for
landing.
Flaps 25 Landing Use normal reverse thrust. Higher reverse thrust will negate fuel T 5.1.12.2
savings and increase engine wear.

96
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Flaps 25 Landing When operational considerations allow, crews are encouraged to T 5.1.12.2
use Flaps 25 for final approach and landing. Landing with Flaps
25 has a minimal effect on final approach speed, landing
distance, and body attitude at touchdown. Using Flaps 25 for
final approach and landing reduces fuel burn when compared to
Flaps 30.
Flight Attendant Crew Rest When calling the mid cabin flight attendant station from the flight V 5.5.13.2
deck, the flight attendant crew rest compartment handset will
ring. Use discretion so as not to disturb the flight attendant crew
rest compartment inadvertently.
Flight Attendant Languages Language of Destination (LOD) qualified flight attendants are F 10.2.2.4.1
considered part of the flight attendant minimum crew.
In-Flight Service Representatives (IFSRs) provide language
services and are qualified flight attendants, but are not
considered part of the flight attendant minimum crew.
Neither LOD nor IFSR flight attendants are required on
international flights.
Flight Attendant Removal If it becomes necessary to remove a flight attendant from the crew F 10.2.2.4.1
for any reason other than illness or injury, contact the dispatcher
for coordination with the InFlight Service Manager and the Duty
Pilot.
If the decision to remove is made outside the US, convene the
Security Conflict Team to include the In-Flight Service
Manager.
Flight Attendant Staffing F 10.2.2.4.1
757-200 4 for boarding, 2 for through flights
757-300, 767ER & 767G 5 for boarding, 2 for through flights
767 6 for boarding, 3 for through flights
Flight Attendant Staffing Delta policy requires all flight attendants to remain on board F 10.2.2.4.1
during deplaning until all passengers have deplaned unless
performing a duty authorized by the IFS On-Board Manual.
Flight Deck Door II
Lock Fail Light Indicates failure of the door locking mechanism. Door is not
electronically locked.
Auto Unlk Light Indicates access code has been entered and door will unlock in
30-60 seconds unless Deny is selected.
Deny Switch Cancels keypad entry request and starts a 5 minute keypad lockout
period to deny flight deck access. Hold for one second.
Flight Deck Door Press the ENT key. V 5.1.2.5
Enter the access code on the keypad. V 5.1.2.6
Press the ENT key.
Flight Director On the ground, when the flight director is turned on it should V 5.4.1.1
command wings level, 8° nose up and the flight mode
annunciations should be TO, TO, FD.

97
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Flight Director Guidance On takeoff the flight director commands V2 + 15 knots or liftoff II
speed + 15 knots, whichever is higher. If the current airspeed
remains above the target speed for 5 seconds, the target speed
resets to the current airspeed up to a maximum of V2 + 25 knots.
If the MCP airspeed is manually increased, the flight director
will command the increased airspeed.
On go-around, the autothrottles provide a climb of at least 2,000
fpm and the flight director commands a climb at the current
airspeed or MCP airspeed, whichever is higher. If the airspeed
increases above the initial target speed and remains there for 5
seconds, the target speed resets to the current airspeed up to a
maximum of MCP speed plus 25 knots. If the initial go-around
speed was above MCP speed plus 25 knots, that speed is
maintained.
On takeoff, the flight director commands the ground track at time
of lift off.
On go-around, the flight director commands the ground track at
time of go-around engagement.
Flight Dispatch Release (FDR) An amendment to the FDR is required for: F 14.1.8.3
Amendments • ship or equipment change
• speed or cost index change
• fuel flow factor change
• dispatcher Approval Required MEL additions and deletions
• CDL additions and deletions
• route changes in excess of 100 nm from planned route
• takeoff or destination alternate additions or deletions
• return to the departure airport
• return to the gate if the conditions of the original FDR
change as a result of the return to the gate
• significant payload changes
• fuel overfills in excess of:
▪ 1,000 pounds for a narrow body or
▪ 1,500 pounds for a wide body
• fuel underfills in excess of:
▪ 200 pounds for narrowbody or
▪ 500 pounds for widebody
▪ the WDR is inhibited until the FDR is amended
• min fuel for takeoff changes
• any other appropriate circumstances
Flight Level Change Flight Level Change uses a two-minute rule (125 seconds) to GS
prevent the autothrottles from using full climb or idle power for
small altitude changes. There is no need to use Vertical Speed
for small altitude changes.
Flight Level Change Flight Level Change has logic to allow shallow climbs and T 1.12.1.1
descents for small altitude changes. There is no need to use
Vertical Speed for passenger comfort.
Flight Plan Addendum The Flight Plan Addendum is printed automatically with the Flight F 14.2.4
Plan and includes passenger configuration, MEL items, LATT
information, the Flight Attendant Briefing Guide and a “Stay At
Gate For WDR” message, if applicable.
Flight Plan Remarks Delta Airport Remarks on the flight plan supersede Company F 14.2.1
Page information.

98
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Flight Plans Crews are required to obtain and use a paper version of the flight F 14.2.1
plan and thoroughly review it prior to departure, to include all
flight plan remarks and NOTAMS. Once this validation is
complete, crews are authorized to use the electronic version.
The paper flight plan is the official source. F 14.2.1.1.1
Flight Watch Communications between the airplane and the Company must be A 6.4.1
possible at all times to comply with FAR flight watch
requirements. A 6.4.2
Whenever the engines are running, the flight crew shall maintain
flight watch requirements by:
• ensuring ACARS is operating properly (NO COMM not
displayed) or
• using SATCOM or
• selecting the proper VHF/HF frequency with a successful
SELCAL check or
• selecting the proper VHF/HF frequency and maintaining a
listening watch
Flights Without Flight Secure the cabin (carts, galleys, overhead bins, closets, lavs, V 5.1.1.1
Attendants emergency equipment, etc.) and arm at least the 1L and 1R
doors.
Disarm the doors after block-in and signal the agent when it is
safe to open the main entry door.
FMC Comm Alert If the white FMC comm alert remains displayed on EICAS after V 3.4.3
all uplinks are loaded, check the FMC COMM page and load/
accept/purge/ reject/cancel any remaining uplinks. If the FMC
comm alert does not disappear, it does not reflect an FMC
malfunction and should not affect dispatch.
FMC Reset INIT RQ can only be used once per release number to start the V 5.5.7.23
data uplink process. A new release number unlocks the limit and
will allow another uplink of the needed data.
If it becomes necessary to re-request current release number
uplinks, perform an FMC RESET with the FMC RESET button
on the INIT DATA page on ACARS. After a successful FMC
Reset, the necessary data can be requested individually from the
request prompt on the appropriate page.
The INIT RQ prompt on the ACARS INIT DATA page may also
be used again after an FMC Reset to request all preflight
uplinks.
If unwanted FMC uplinks are received select LOAD in order to
reveal the ERASE prompt and then select ERASE to discard the
uplink.
FMS Alternate Page The ALTN page shows four alternate airports listed in order of GS
ETA. The airports are either automatically selected by the FMS
or may be manually entered, such as ETOPS alternates or filed
alternates. Be aware that since the order of the airports on the
ALTN page is only updated when crossing an active waypoint,
the closest alternate may not always be at the top of the page
although the time and fuel data for each alternate is always
correct.

99
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 FMS Altitudes Maximum Altitude is the highest altitude at which the aircraft can T 4.2.3
be operated. It is the lowest of maximum certified altitude, thrust
limited altitude (altitude at which there is sufficient thrust to
maintain a specified minimum rate of climb) and buffet or
maneuver limited altitude (altitude at which a specific maneuver
margin exists prior to buffet onset).
Optimum Altitude is determined based on aircraft gross weight T 4.2.4
and cruise speed in still air. When operating in ECON mode,
optimum altitude results in minimum trip cost based on the
entered cost index. However, when operation is based on
manually entered speed or selected LRC speed, optimum
altitude is based on minimum fuel burn. Optimum altitude does
not consider the effects of temperature deviations from standard
or sensed or forecast winds at altitude. Since Optimum altitude
only provides optimum performance in still air, when factoring
winds, it may not be the best altitude for the aircraft to minimize
cost or fuel. T 4.2.5
Recommended Altitude accounts for forecast winds and
temperatures along the flight plan route, over the next 250-500
nm immediately in front of the airplane, above and below the
entered cruise altitude. When operating in the ECON mode,
recommended altitude is based on minimum trip cost associated
with the entered cost index. However, when operation is based
on manually entered speed or selected LRC speed,
recommended altitude is based on minimum fuel burn. To
provide a usable and accurate recommended altitude, the FMC
requires accurate forecast winds at multiple altitudes above and
below cruise altitude. Winds can be entered manually or they
may be uplinked.
FMS Altitudes It may be advantageous to request an altitude above Optimum if T 4.2.6
altitude changes are difficult to obtain on the route. This
minimizes the possibility of being held at a low altitude and high
fuel consumption condition for long periods of time.
FMS Anomaly Do not execute an offset for SLOP until past the oceanic entry GS
point and the waypoints in the FMS have properly sequenced.
There is a known anomaly in Pegasus 2009 where if an offset is
executed close to a waypoint but prior to waypoint passage,
there is a possibility the FMS will delete the following
waypoint. The airplane will then proceed to the wrong waypoint
and make incorrect position reports to ATC and Company. Wait
until after waypoint passage and the FMS settles down before
slopping. It is also highly recommended to use LNAV instead of
Heading Select for offsetting to avoid overshooting the offset
course.
FMS Anomaly Sometimes the FMS will not go directly to the fix you selected. If GS
there is a fix with a step climb on the route between the aircraft’s
present position and the desired fix, the FMS may go to the step
climb fix first and then to the desired fix, which could lead to a
violation. Always check the FMS routing after executing a route
change.

100
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 FMS Anomaly When the last waypoint of an arrival is coded with an “AT” GS
altitude restriction and that waypoint is also the first waypoint of
an approach transition coded with an “AT or ABOVE” altitude
restriction, the “AT” constraint will be automatically replaced
with the “AT or ABOVE” constraint, possibly causing an
altitude bust on the arrival. Be alert for this anomaly and make
sure the FMS agrees with the clearance before pressing the
EXEC button.
FMS Anomaly Occasionally, the active waypoint in the FMS will sequence FB 16-04
prematurely resulting in an uncommanded turn off course with
LNAV engaged. To limit incorrect waypoint sequencing:
• avoid executing a lateral offset when approaching an active
waypoint
• avoid entering a vertical or lateral flight plan change when
approaching an active waypoint
• avoid executing at Direct To with Abeam points selected
when approaching an active waypoint
If an uncommanded turn occurs when using LNAV, use HDG
Select to follow the correct course and then proceed Direct To
the correct waypoint and reengage LNAV.
FMS Approach Mode Once the FMS is in approach mode: II
• the MCP speed window can be opened and VNAV will
remain in VNAV PATH
• the MCP altitude can be set above the airplane’s altitude for
the missed approach. If the altitude is set at least 300 feet
above the airplane’s current altitude, VNAV will continue the
descent.
• VNAV will follow the descent in VNAV PATH unless the
airspeed increases to within 5 knots of the flap placard speed
or the airplane rises more than 150 feet above the path. In
that case, VNAV will change to VNAV SPD.
FMS Approach Mode When the FMS has transitioned to approach mode, descent logic T 4.3.7
allows Speed Intervention to occur while remaining in VNAV
Path. FMS approach mode occurs:
• if flaps are extended with VNAV in Descent mode, or
• if the selected approach is the active procedure on RTE Page
2, or
• if 12 miles from the airport and the active leg is not part of a
procedure, or
• if the last waypoint on the approach is the active waypoint
and the airplane is less than 25 miles from the waypoint.
FMS ATC Log Clear the ATC log during preflight. V 3.4.3
FMS Changes Do not execute an FMS change when approaching a fix with an GS
altitude restriction because the FMS will change from VNAV
PATH to VNAV SPEED while it recalculates the vertical path.
VNAV SPEED will not take you below a crossing restriction,
but without VNAV PATH you may miss an At-or-Below
restriction. In some cases, the horizontal path will disappear
during the recalculation too. The best practice is to wait until
after the fix to execute any FMS changes.

101
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 FMS Database On preflight, verify the current database is active based on the V 3.4.3
local date of departure. (There is no special time of day for
changeover.)
FMS Database Do not assume the first NAVAID listed in the FMS is the correct A 3.1.10.4
one. (Remember the Cali accident.)
FMS Fuel Factor Compare the fuel factor on the flight plan to the fuel factor in the V 3.4.3
FMS and update if necessary. To update, type “ARM” in the
scratchpad and line select over the existing fuel factor. Then
type a forward slash followed by the new fuel factor in the
scratchpad, including a negative sign if necessary, and line select
over the fuel factor in the FMS.
FMS Loading ETP airport and waypoint data for RTE 2, if required, is sent V 3.4.3
approximately 5 minutes after sending INIT RQ.
Do not activate RTE 2.
FMS Loading If automatic uplinks are not received within 2 minutes of ACARS V 3.4.3
initialization or if an amended flight plan requires new data or if
it becomes necessary to reload the current flight plan data, refer
to FMC Data Link Reset procedures.
FMS Loading If RTE 1 is not activated before the ETP data for RTE 2 (if V 3.4.3
required) arrives in about 5 minutes, the ETP data will overwrite
RTE 1. To avoid this, load, activate and execute RTE 1 upon
receipt. If overwrite occurs, refer to FMC Data Link Reset
procedures.
FMS Loading If the flight number is not uplinked, enter it manually. (e.g. V 3.4.3
DAL1234)
FMS Loading On data link capable aircraft, do not initialize ACARS until ready V 3.4.3
to upload and accept the flight plan and other associated data.
FMS Loading Prior to FMS loading using data uplink, “DATA LINK READY” V 3.4.3
must be displayed on the FMC COMM page.
All data link action prompts can be accessed via the FMC COMM
page.
FMS Loading The departure runway, SID, STAR and arrival runway must be V 3.4.3
loaded manually.
FMS Loading Uplinked wind data can only be loaded after the route is loaded, V 3.4.3
activated and executed. Try to manually load the SID, STAR and
transition routes before loading and accepting the wind data so
winds will be added to the fixes on those routes.
FMS Loading When VHF data link is not available, ensure the IRSs are aligned V 3.4.3
and in NAV mode before selecting INIT REQ on ACARS. This
provides the SATCOM system with present position which
enables data link and FMC loading via SATCOM.
FMS Loading Enter present position using the most accurate latitude and V 5.11.18
longitude information available (e.g. GPS, gate, parking spot or
airport coordinates.)

102
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 FMS Max Altitude When at or near the FMS maximum altitude, it is possible for T 4.2.3
LNAV inputs (e.g. bank angles) to exceed the capability of the
airplane, leading to loss of altitude or airspeed. Fly at least 10
knots above Vref 30 + 80 and consider using bank angles of 10°
or less. If airspeed drops below Vref 30 +80, immediately
increase speed by doing one or more of the following:
• reduce bank angle
• increase thrust up to Max Continuous
• descend
Turbulence at or near the maximum altitude can momentarily
increase the airplane’s angle of attack and activate the stick
shaker.
FMS MCDU Failure Do not enter Class II or MNPS airspace with only one MCDU on GS
any aircraft. Note that a failed MCDU is not the same as a failed
FMC.
FMS MCDU Operations Before taxi, either the Captain or the First Officer may make V 3.3.1
MCDU entries and the other pilot must verify.
Make MCDU entries before taxi or while stopped, if possible. If
entries are necessary during taxi, the First Officer will make the
entries and the Captain must verify.
In flight, MCDU entries will normally be made by the PF. When
the autopilot is off or in a high-workload environment, the PF
should direct the PM to make MCDU entries. Both pilots should
verify MCDU entries affecting lateral or vertical flight.
FMS Nav Database The navigation database can be changed only on the ground. V 5.11.10.5
Changing the database removes all previously entered route
data.
FMS Nav Database Crews should confirm the correct Nav Database is installed. The V 5.11.11
Op Program should end in “C10” and Nav Data should begin
with “DL6.” Occasionally, the wrong database is installed and
important airports are missing.
FMS Position Shift Do not enter a POS SHIFT or RWY/POS in the FMS. It may GS
inhibit the runway update function.
FMS Preflight Entries In all cases, both pilots must confirm FMS preflight entries. V 3.4.3
FMS Preflight Position If GPS is inop, manually enter the most accurate latitude and V 3.4.3
longitude available. The PM should independently verify
manually entered present position coordinates.
FMS Step Climbs Set the Step Size to 1000 or 2000 as appropriate for the airspace. V 3.4.3
Do not enter flight plan step climb or descent altitudes on the
LEGS pages when selecting 1000 or 2000 in the Step Size field.
Never leave the Step Size set to ICAO.

103
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 FMS Step Climbs The FMC calculates the best STEP TO altitude based on entered T 4.2.6
step size and also calculates the most advantageous location at
which to step. The calculated step location is a function of the
route length, current cruise speed mode and altitude, forecast
wind, and forecast temperature, step size, gross weight, entered
cruise CG.
The FMS-computed step point provides for minimum trip cost for
the flight, including allowances for climb fuel. Initiate a cruise
climb to the new altitude as close as practicable to the step climb
point.
FMS Step Climbs When wind data is uploaded via data link or if forecast winds for V 5.11.18
higher and lower altitudes will be manually entered, set Step
Size to 1000 or 2000 as appropriate for airspace.
For non-data link aircraft, a Step Size of 0 may be used for flight
plan comparisons on shorter legs.
FMS Time Calculations The FMS will calculate two different time estimates for the active GS
waypoint. The time shown on the HSI is based only on current
winds. The time shown on the MCDU is based on a mixture of
current winds and forecast winds loaded into the FMS. The
mixture depends on the distance to the active waypoint. If the
waypoint is a long way away, most of the time calculation will
be based on forecast winds. If the waypoint is close, most of the
calculation will be based on current winds.
FMS Waypoints Do not add extra waypoints to the active route when using ADSC. A 6.3.5
FMS Wind Extrapolation If an aircraft climbs above the highest loaded forecast wind, the GS
FMS uses the highest loaded forecast wind without
extrapolation. For example, if winds at FL350 are loaded and the
aircraft climbs to FL370, the FMS uses the winds at FL350.
If an aircraft descends below the lowest loaded forecast wind, the
FMS keeps the direction constant but extrapolates the speed
uniformly to zero at the surface. For example, if winds at FL350
are loaded and the aircraft descends to FL330, the FMS will use
winds from the same direction but extrapolated to a lower speed.
FMS Wind Updates Enroute and Descent winds will be automatically uplinked to data V 5.5.7.17
link capable aircraft at 0430Z, 1030Z, 1630Z and 2230Z.
If less than 3 hours remain until landing, only the Descent winds
will be uplinked.
If winds are not received within 15 minutes of a new uplink time,
perform an FMC Reset and then send a manual request.
Food and Fruit Unless declared, fruit/food items are not permitted to be brought F 6.7.3
into the U.S.
Food Consumption Pilots will adhere to the following guidelines: F 3.6.3
• within six hours of flight, the Captain and First Officer will
make every effort not to eat identical meals prepared in the
same restaurant or kitchen
• in flight, the Captain and First Officer may eat the same meal
• crew meals should be staggered to ensure one pilot is always
monitoring the aircraft and maintaining vigilance
• pilots should not eat any food provided by customers

104
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fuel Anomaly (767) On some 767 aircraft, the center tank fuel pumps occasionally V 5.12.3
may not produce enough pressure to override the main tank fuel
pumps leading to simultaneous fuel consumption from the center
tank and the left and/or right main tank.
If this happens, do not turn off the center tank pumps because that
may trip the Universal Fault Interrupters and trap fuel in the
center tank. Leave the center tank pumps on until all fuel is
burned from the center tank.
If you notice the situation before the Fuel Config message
appears, accomplish the Fuel Balancing procedure in Volume 1
while using all center tank fuel first.
If you notice the situation after the Fuel Config message appears,
accomplish the Fuel Configuration checklist in the QRH while
using all center tank fuel first.
These procedures may result in extended flight with the main
tanks unbalanced until all center tank fuel is used.
Document each occurrence in the logbook.
Fuel Cap Requirements Only the 767 requires fuel caps. (Because it has a fuel dump F 14.4.1.5
system.)
Fuel Config EICAS Message 1,800 pound fuel imbalance (757). II
2,000 ± 500 pound fuel imbalance (767).
1,200 lbs. or more in the center tank with center fuel pumps off.
2,200 lbs. or less in a main tank. (LOW FUEL message too.)
Fuel Documentation Do not pushback from the gate until obtaining: F 14.4.1
• a paper Fuel Service Record (FSR), or
• an EFSR delivered via ACARS, or
• a printed copy of the EFSR provided by the gate agent
One of these documents is always required even if the aircraft did
not require any fuel.
If fueling is complete, the D-8 Pre-Pushback message will say F 14.4.1.1
either “EFSR” or “Paper FSR Required.”
If fueling is not complete, the D-8 Pre-Pushback message will say
“Fuel Closeout Pending – Do Not Pushback Without EFSR or
Paper EFSR.”
At EFSR stations, it is permissible to close the cabin door and pull F 14.4.1.2
the jetway while waiting for the EFSR, but do not push back
until you have it. EFSR stations are noted on the Company Page.
Fuel Emergency In foreign airspace, ATC may not be familiar with the terminology F 17.7.1.1
“minimum fuel.” Clearly communicate that no further delay can
be accepted.
In foreign airspace, ATC may not be familiar with the terminology F 17.7.1.2
“emergency fuel.” Use the term “Mayday” instead.
Fuel Gauge Inoperative A paper FSR is required any time fuel tank quantity must be F 14.4.1.7
verified using alternate means. The five alternate fueling
methods are listed in FOM Chapter 14.
Fuel Imbalance If you notice a fuel imbalance before the Fuel Config message GS
appears, use the fuel balancing procedure in Volume 1.
If the Fuel Config message appears, it's a Caution-level message
and requires the QRH procedure to balance the fuel.

105
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fuel Imbalance The primary purpose of fuel balance limitations is for the T 8.8.1
structural life of the airframe and landing gear and not for
controllability.
Fuel Jettison (767) Fuel will jettison at approximately 1,300 ppm. II
There is no ground safety switch. Fuel will jettison on the ground
if the system is activated.
Fuel Jettison (767) When fuel jettison is to be accomplished, consider the following: T 8.8.4
• ensure adequate weather minimums exist at the airport of
intended landing before dumping
• fuel jettison above 4,000 feet AGL ensures complete fuel
evaporation
• downwind drift of fuel may exceed 1 nm per 1,000 feet of
drop
• avoid jettisoning in a holding pattern with other aircraft
below
Fuel Jettison (767) The decision to dump fuel is an operational decision made by the F 2.3.5
Captain and may be time critical. If time permits, contact the
dispatcher to review options prior to dumping fuel.
Fuel dumping considerations:
• notify ATC of initiation and termination
• dump fuel above 4,000' AGL, if possible
• do not dump fuel in a descending circular pattern
• the cabin should be pressurized if possible
Fuel Jettison (767) Fuel jettison considerations: Q 12.6
• notify ATC of initiation and termination of fuel dumping
• dump fuel above 4,000 feet AGL, if possible
• avoid jettisoning fuel in a holding pattern with other aircraft
below
• do not dump in a descending circular pattern
• dump fuel with the cabin pressurized, if able
Fuel Minimums F 17.7.1
757 Minimum Fuel: 4,500 lbs.
Emergency Fuel: 3,500 lbs.
Final Approach Fuel: 300 lbs.
Go Around and Return: 2,500 lbs.

767 Minimum Fuel: 7,300 lbs.

Emergency Fuel: 5,300 lbs.
Final Approach Fuel: 500 lbs.
Go Around and Return: 3,000 lbs.

Final Approach Fuel Approximate fuel required to complete a normal approach from
the FAF.

Minimum Fuel Enough fuel to hold at 1,500' AFE for 30 minutes and then fly one F 17.7.1.1
approach plus fuel tank gauge tolerance.

Emergency Fuel Enough fuel to initiate a missed approach at 200' AFE and then F 17.7.1.2
climb to 1,500' AFE, proceed downwind and fly another
approach from a point 10 miles from the end of the runway.
Emergency fuel is approximately 30 minutes of fuel remaining.
Warning: Executing a missed approach with less than emergency
fuel could result in engine flameout.
106
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fuel Pump Pressure Fuel pump pressure should be supplied to the engines at all times. V 5.12.1
Thrust deterioration or engine flameout may occur at high
altitude without fuel pump pressure. (The engines may not
suction feed at high altitude.)
Fuel Quantity Indicators Fuel quantity sensors in the fuel tanks send independent signals to GS
the cockpit fuel gauges and to the wing fuel gauges so that if a
cockpit fuel quantity indicator is inop, the wing fuel quantity
indicator may still be accurate. Conversely, if a wing fuel
quantity indicator is inop, the cockpit fuel quantity indicator
may still be accurate. Refer to the MEL.
Fuel Requirements F 14.3.3.2
Int'l Straight Release Do not take off unless there is enough fuel on board to:
• fly to and land at the airport to which released and then
• fly for a period of 10% of the total time from departure to the
airport to which released and then
• fly to and land at the most distant alternate and then
• hold for 30 minutes at 1,500' AFE at the alternate or
destination if no alternate was required
Fuel Requirements Do not take off unless there is enough fuel on board to: F 14.3.2
Domestic • fly to and land at the destination and then
• fly to and land at the most distant alternate and then
• fly for 45 minutes at normal cruise consumption
Delta’s Ops Specs permit the use of domestic fuel reserves
between the US and Alaska, Canada, Mexico, the Caribbean.
Flag reserve rules on these legs often require lower block fuel
amounts than domestic rules.
Fuel Requirements Ops Specs B043 requires the 10% reserve fuel to be calculated F 14.3.3.3
Int’l Ops Specs B043 only for that portion of the flight in Class II airspace for more
than 59 minutes.
Do not takeoff unless there is enough fuel on board to:
• fly to and land at the destination and
• fly for 10% of the time in Class II airspace for more than 59
minutes and then
• fly to and land at the most distant alternate and then
• fly for 45 minutes at normal cruise fuel consumption

107
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fuel Requirements Ops Specs B044 authorizes the dispatcher to plan a flight to an F 14.3.3.4
Int’l Ops Specs B044 intermediate airport and then execute a redispatch flight plan
from a predefined redispatch point to the final destination.
Fuel savings are realized by allowing two independent 10%
reserve fuel calculations, one for each portion of the flight.
An alternate may not be required if a redispatch segment is under
6 hours.
Do not takeoff unless there is enough fuel on board to:
• fly from the departure airport to the intended destination and
then
• fly for 10% of the total time required to fly from the planned
redispatch point to the intended destination airport and then
• fly to and land at the most distant alternate on the flight plan
if an alternate is required and then
• hold for 30 minutes at 1,500' AFE at the alternate or the
destination if no alternate was required
Air traffic control will be unaware that a flight that has been
released on a planned redispatch flight plan. If it becomes
necessary to land at an intermediate airport, an ATC clearance to
that airport must be negotiated.
The minimum fuel for takeoff stated on Part 1 of the flight plan is
required to operate to the planned destination.
Fuel Service Record (FSR) The paper FSR must be signed by the fueler and pilots must check F 14.4.1.3
for the fueler’s signature.
Check the “Equals Difference” block. An actual difference greater
than allowable difference may indicate a truck or aircraft gauge
malfunction. Stick verification is required.
Fuel Tolerance Minor differences between the flight deck gauges/display and the F 14.4.1.4
FSR can occur due to APU fuel burn or nonstandard fuel
density.
The FSR is legal if the fuel quantity gauges/display reflect the
Block Fuel:
• +1,000/-200 pounds for narrow body aircraft
• +1,500/-500 pounds for wide body aircraft
If the fuel gauge value differs from the Block Fuel in excess of
these tolerances:
• have the fuel load adjusted (defueling usually costs more
than carrying extra fuel), or
• contact Dispatch for a new/amended FDR. A new/amended
release is not required if:
▪ fuel quantity is less than Block Fuel due to APU burn and
▪ fuel on board is greater than Min Fuel for Takeoff plus
Taxi Fuel
Fuel Tolerance On the Preflight Procedure, if the actual fuel on board is less than V 3.4.5
flight plan block fuel, ensure Min Fuel for Takeoff plus flight
plan taxi fuel is on board.
Fuel Tolerance Check the pre-servicing fuel imbalance on the EFSR or FSR. If it F 14.4.1.6
exceeds 1,500 pounds, the fueler must contact a fueling or ramp
supervisor and the reason should be listed in the Remarks
section of the EFSR or FSR. If not listed, contact Load Control
via the dispatcher prior to pushback. If the cause cannot be
determined, the fuel in all tanks must be validated with
measuring sticks and a paper FSR is required.

108
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Fuel: Ballast Fuel Fuel loaded for ballast fuel, unusable fuel, or for MEL/CDL F 14.2.3.6
requirements is not to be used except in an emergency.
Fuel: Captain Requested Captain requested fuel requires a release remark on the revised F 14.3.6
flight plan.
Fuel: FMS Reserve Fuel The FMS Reserve Fuel on the flight plan is the sum of: F 14.2.3.4
• fuel to the alternate with the highest burn plus
• ballast/unusable fuel plus
• reserve fuel
Fuel: Low Fuel Avoid high nose up attitude. Make thrust changes slowly and Q 12.21
smoothly. This reduces the possibility of uncovering fuel pumps.
Fuel: Min Fuel for Takeoff Min Fuel for Takeoff is the FAR-required fuel when thrust levers F 14.2.3.6
are advanced for takeoff.
Fuel: Min Fuel for Takeoff Check fuel quantity equal to or greater than Min Fuel for Takeoff V 3.4.12
just prior to taking the departure runway.
Fuel: Standard Traffic Pattern 757 – approximately 1,500 pounds GS
767 – approximately 2,000 pounds
Fueling If passengers are to be on board during fueling/defueling, a F 30.4.1
jetway, ramp or mobile stairway must be placed at the boarding
door and the boarding door must remain open.
If the previous condition cannot be met, fueling/defueling with
passengers on board is still permitted if:
• all usable exit doors are armed, and
• ARFF is notified via ATC that fueling will be conducted with
passengers on board without a jetway or passenger steps.
ARFF responses will vary depending on local airport policy.
Full Thrust Takeoff If a full thrust takeoff has not been recorded within a 60-day V 5.7.4
period, the flight plan will contain an MEL item requiring one.
Accomplish a full thrust takeoff and document it with ACARS.
A logbook entry is required if an engine fails to attain full thrust.
Gear Down Normally, lower the landing gear at 2,000' AFE in order to be GS
fully configured for landing and on speed with the landing
checklist complete by 1,000' AFE.
General Declaration The General Declaration (Gen Dec) is used to clear inbound and F 6.7.2
outbound aircraft and crewmembers as required by the Customs,
Immigration, and Health Agencies of the host country. All
working crew, deadhead crew, off-rotation deadheaders at the
end of their rotation and jumpseaters (if listed more than 75
minutes prior to flight) will be listed on the Gen Dec. Off-
rotation deadheaders at the beginning of their rotation will not
be listed.
For all international flights, an electronic copy of the Gen Dec is
sent from the departure station to the destination station. Some
destinations and some flights, as listed in the FOM Chapter 6,
also require a paper Gen Dec.
Generator Drive Disconnect The engine must be rotating when the Generator Drive Disconnect Q 6.21
switch is pushed in order to disconnect the IDG.
Generator Drive Light Indicates high oil temperature or low oil pressure in the integrated II
drive generator (IDG).
109
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Generator Lights Generator OFF and DRIVE lights remain illuminated until the V 3.4.4
respective engine is started.
Go-Around Altitude constraints in the FMS are not honored while in go- GS
around mode. If there is an altitude restriction associated with a
missed approach waypoint, the aircraft will ignore it and climb
to the MCP altitude instead. To avoid this, the MCP must be set
to the constraint altitude until passing the waypoint. Conditional
waypoints (e.g. “at 2800 turn left direct ABC”) are honored
during the go-around phase however.
For example, the missed approach procedure could be something
like “climb to 1,000 feet until intercepting the 190° radial and
then climb to 3,000 feet.” In this case, you would set 1,000 feet
in the MCP window until intercepting the radial and then set
3,000 feet and continue the climb. If you initially set 3,000 feet
in the MCP window, the airplane would ignore the 1,000-foot
restriction and climb directly to 3,000 feet, thus causing an
altitude bust.
Go-Around Go-Around is armed when the flaps are extended (flap lever not II
up) on any approach or at glideslope capture on an ILS if
glideslope capture occurs first.
Go-Around Set the lowest initial level off altitude on the missed approach V 4.3.3
procedure.
Go-Around When executing a published missed approach, the vertical portion T 5.3.2.1.4
may be initiated at, or prior to, minimums, but the lateral portion
cannot begin until reaching the MAP.
Go-Around When accomplishing a low altitude level off following an T 5.7.5.4
autopilot go-around at low gross weight, there may not be
enough altitude to complete the normal capture profile and an
overshoot may occur unless crew action is taken. (Disconnect
the autopilot and fly the level off manually.)
Go-Around An automatic go-around cannot be initiated after touchdown or if T 5.7.5
the airplane is below five feet radio altitude for more than two
seconds.
Go-Around Following a missed approach, go-around, or rejected landing due F 4.2.6
to a mechanical issue or a configuration warning unable to be
positively resolved by the crew:
• make a logbook entry
• submit an ASR
• contact MCC via the dispatcher
Go-Around If any pilot recognizes conditions outside the stabilized approach F 4.2.6
criteria, a go-around must be called. If any flight crewmember
calls a go-around, the call must be honored.

110
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Go-Around from a Visual If a go-around is required, until receipt of controller instructions, V 4.3.13
Approach climb straight ahead to:
• the charted missed approach altitude for an underlying
approach for the active runway or
• if no underlying approach is available, climb to the MSA or
• if flying a charted visual approach with no missed approach,
climb to the MSA
If already above the missed approach altitude or MSA, level off
and contact ATC.
GPWS The Below Glideslope alert may be cancelled or inhibited for: T 7.11.1.1
• localizer or backcourse localizer approach
• circling from an ILS
• when conditions require a deliberate approach below
glideslope
• unreliable glideslope signal
Heading Hold The flight director/autopilot rolls wings level and holds the V 5.4.1.2
heading that exists at the time the wings become level.
Altitude Hold The flight director/autopilot will hold, or return to and hold, the II
altitude that existed when the switch was pressed.
Headsets and Boom Use of a headset and boom microphone is required from the start F 10.3.7
Microphones of the Pushback checklist through 18,000 feet and from 18,000
feet until completion of the Shutdown checklist.
Headsets are strongly recommended in all phases of flight when
language barriers or accents may be an issue.
Personal headsets must be TSO compliant and may not be
modified.
HF Emergency Frequency Merchant ships may be contacted on 2182 kHz or 4125 kHz. T 8.2.2
Some ships can provide a homing signal on 410 kHz.
HF Emergency Frequency US Coast Guard: 4125 kHz Q 0.01
US Navy: 2182 kHz
HF Radios Decreasing the sensitivity too far on an HF radio prevents GS
reception, including SELCAL reception. You can transmit okay,
but you can’t hear anything and SELCAL won’t work.
On multi-use radio panels (the panel where you control all VHF
and HF radios from a single panel), the Captain’s radio panel
controls the sensitivity of the left HF radio and the First
Officer’s panel controls the sensitivity of the right HF radio.
Even if you select the right HF on the Captain’s panel, the
sensitivity is still controlled from the First Officer’s panel.
Therefore, if you have trouble hearing the HF radio or if
SELCAL doesn’t work, be sure to turn up the sensitivity on the
correct tuning panel.
HF Radios To select a frequency below 3.000 on some HF radio panels an 8 II
or
9 in the “tenths” position must be selected before a 2 can be
selected in the “ones” position.

111
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 HF Radios Do not operate the HF transmitter while fueling operations are in A 6.6.1.1
progress. (Boom!)
An HF radio preflight check is not required if it can be determined
the HF radio was used on the previous leg and was not written
up in the logbook.
When a preflight check is required, if the coupler tone, side tone
and audio reception are heard, the HF radio is considered to be
working and the flight may proceed.
A SELCAL check is not a required component of the HF radio
check.
You must obtain two-way HF radio communications before
entering areas requiring HF communications. A successful
SELCAL check is desired to preclude maintaining a listening
watch.
HF Radios Do not operate the HF radios while fueling is in progress. V 5.5.9
USB is preferable for HF communications. AM should be off.
Decreasing sensitivity too far prevents reception, including
SELCAL monitoring of the HF radio.
High and Low Pressure There are procedures in the Airway Manual Weather chapter for A 5.3.2
Operations high pressures above 31.00 Hg.
Operations for aircraft unable to set the altimeter below 28.00 are A 5.3.3
not authorized because the aircraft’s actual altitude is lower than
the indicated altitude.
Holding Configuration Maintain clean configuration if holding in icing conditions or T 4.4
turbulence.
Holding Fix The holding fix must be a route waypoint (on the Legs page) or V 5.11.7.5
the present position to use the FMS for holding.
Holding Pattern Exit When exiting the holding pattern, the FMS LEGS page must be T 4.4.4
updated to enable proper waypoint sequencing. This can be done
by:
• selecting the EXIT HOLD prompt on the FMS HOLD page.
When EXIT ARMED is executed, the aircraft will cross the
holding fix and exit holding. If executed when outbound in
the holding pattern the airplane will immediately turn
inbound and exit holding when the fix is crossed.
• proceeding direct to a waypoint on the LEGS page by
making it the active waypoint
• selecting a heading and then deleting the holding pattern
from the Legs page. Ensure the next downstream waypoint is
active to ensure proper waypoint sequencing.
Holding Speed If holding speed is not available from the FMC, the following T 4.4.3
schedule may be used:
• flaps up maneuvering speed at low altitudes
• Vref 30 + 100 knots above FL250

112
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Holding Speeds (US) A 4.1.5
6,000' MSL and below 200 knots max
Above 6,000' to 14,000' MSL 230 knots max (210 knots max for some charted holding patterns)
Above 14,000' MSL 265 knots max

Holding Times A 4.4.2

Above 14,000' MSL 1½ min
14,000' MSL and below 1 min

Standard Pattern Right turns

Max Teardrop Angle 30 degrees
Slow to Holding Speed Within 3 minutes of the holding fix. Do not slow early without
ATC approval, but cross the holding fix on speed.
Reporting Report time and altitude entering and report leaving.
No Holding Instructions Hold on the inbound course to the clearance limit fix using a
standard holding pattern (right turns).
After Departing Holding Resume normal speed unless otherwise instructed.
Holding Technique Avoid public math! Unless cleared to hold at your present position GS
or at a published holding pattern already in the FMS, load the
radial of the holding pattern into the FMS instead of the course.
Controllers normally assign holding on a radial, so that
immediately eliminates a lot of confusion. Then compare the
holding pattern in the FMS to the assigned holding pattern and
make any needed corrections. If for some reason the quadrant is
incorrect (e.g. you’re supposed to hold west, but the FMS shows
the holding pattern to the east), take the course from the INBD
CRS/DIR line and plug it into the radial line. That should flip
the holding pattern to make it correct and the FMS will have
done the math for you. Then add holding pattern directions,
lengths, times, EFCs, etc.
Horizontal Stab Index Marks For maintenance use only, if installed. GS
Human Organs Human organs are not considered dangerous goods and do not F 12.12.1
require a NOTOC if they have less than 2.5 kilograms of dry ice
and do not contain other dangerous goods.
Eye/cornea shipments must be transported in the cargo
compartment.
On international flights, human organs must be loaded in the bulk
compartment or aft compartment if there is no bulk
compartment.
Human organs may not be transported on the flight deck.
Some human organs are packed in a special module and may be F 12.12.2
carried in the cabin.
In the event of a diversion, notify Flight Control and the arrival
station that there are time-critical human organs on board and
ensure that preparations are made to either store the organs or
forward them to their destination.
Hydraulic Pump Lights Left and right engine hydraulic pump PRESS lights remain V 3.4.4
illuminated until the respective engine is started.

113
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Hydraulic Systems Pressurize the right hydraulic system first and depressurize it last V 3.4.7
to avoid transferring hydraulic fluid between systems. V 3.4.22
On the 767, turn the center electric hydraulic pumps on before the
center air demand pump and turn the center air demand pump
off before the center electric pumps. This keeps the ADP from
cycling on and off momentarily which causes leaks. (That is,
don’t turn the ADP on by itself.)
ILS Approaches When using LNAV to intercept the final approach course, LNAV V 3.4.18
might parallel the localizer without capturing it. The airplane
can then descend on the glide slope with the localizer not
captured.
ILS False Glideslope An incorrect final approach fix crossing altitude indicates a T 5.2.3.4
possible false glideslope capture or an incorrect altimeter
setting. Deviations from the VNAV path or from the normal
pitch attitude and descent rate may also indicate a false
glideslope capture.
Do not continue the approach unless in visual conditions.
ILS Signals The course and glideslope signals are reliable only when their T 5.1.1
warning flags are not displayed, localizer and glideslope
pointers are in view, and the ILS identifier is received.
Inter-Tropical Convergence The Inter-Tropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ) is a worldwide A 5.2.17
Zone tropical zone where tropical air converges near the equator
between 10° N to 10° S with bands ranging from 50 to 400 miles
wide. This unstable air mass is characterized by strong
thunderstorm activity with heavy icing conditions. The activity
associated with the ITCZ is not part of a frontal system and can
normally be circumnavigated.
Thunderstorms of modest vertical development can produce
substantial turbulence.
Instability in the ITCZ reaches a maximum over land areas in the
afternoon and evening hours and warm water areas in the
morning hours.
The ITCZ will extend as far north as 10 - 20° N during April thru
October and as far south as 10 - 20° S during November thru
March.
Intercepting a Course The FMS is a “goes to” machine. It only goes direct to a waypoint GS
or goes inbound on a course to a waypoint. All courses entered
on the LEGS page must be courses inbound to a waypoint, never
the radial away from a waypoint.

114
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Intercepting a Radial Use HDG Select to comply with the ATC clearance. GS
Outbound Deselect LNAV if armed.
Manually tune the VOR frequency and radial to see a display of
the track on the HSI as a dashed green line.
Select the Legs page.
• enter the VOR on line L1
• execute
• create a place-radial/distance waypoint from the VOR (e.g.
ATL180/99)
• insert the created waypoint at L2, which is below the VOR
on L1
• execute
• line select the created waypoint at L2 to the scratch pad and
then insert it on line L1
• the course from the VOR to the created waypoint will appear
on line R6 in small font. Press R6 to make the font large.
• check the HSI for accuracy. The dashed green and dashed
white lines should overlay.
• execute
Arm LNAV and monitor capture.
Intercepting an Airway “Direct – Route – Intercept – Clean Up” GS
(DRIClean) Use HDG Select to comply with the ATC clearance.
Deselect LNAV if armed.
Refer to the EFB and manually tune the VOR and radial that
defines the airway. A dashed green line will display on the HSI.
Select the Legs page.
• enter a VOR or airway fix on the airway behind the aircraft
on line L1 to anchor the airway
• execute
Select the ROUTE page.
• enter the airway from the anchor point to the clearance limit
• execute
Select the Legs page.
• use the HSI to determine the first waypoint on the airway
that is downstream of the aircraft’s intercept point with the
airway
• select that waypoint to the scratch pad and insert on line L1.
• the course on the airway to that waypoint will appear on line
R6 in small font. Press R6 to make the font large.
• check the HSI for accuracy. The dashed green and dashed
white lines should overlay.
• execute
Arm LNAV and monitor capture.
Clean up the routing to match the clearance. Check the RTE page
to make sure it matches the clearance exactly.
Interception Regardless of ATC clearance, the crew shall follow the F 2.3.6
instructions given by the interceptor aircraft.
Refer to FOM Chapter 2 for procedures and signals.
Interception Regardless of ATC clearance, the crew shall follow interceptor Q 0.25
instructions.
Internet Switch (757) Select the Mute switch off and the Transmit switch on during V 3.4.4
preflight.

115
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 IRS Align Lights Flashing Align lights indicate: II
• the IRUs have been in align mode for more than 10 minutes
without a present position entered
• an incorrect present position was entered (a significant
difference from the shutdown position)
• the airplane was moved during alignment
IRS Align Lights Do not turn the IRSs off for flashing align lights except when V 5.11.6.3
called for by the procedure in Volume 1.
IRS Alignment II
Full 10 minutes (17 min at high latitudes, less than 10 min at low
Quick latitudes)
30 seconds
IRS Alignment Perform a full alignment prior to every flight. V 3.4.3
IRS mode selectors must be selected off for at least 30 seconds
and the Align lights must be extinguished prior to a full
alignment.
IRS Alignment IRS alignment must be complete before AUTOLAND STATUS, V 3.4.5
VSI, ADI, HSI and RDMI checks during the Preflight check.
IRS DC Fail Loss of DC backup power to all three IRSs can indicate the Hot Q 11.8
Battery bus is unpowered and the APU is not available.
IRS Drift Rates After engine shut down, check IRS drift rates if the airplane was V 3.4.22
operated in Class II airspace for more than one hour. Make a
logbook entry if any drift rate exceeds 2 nm per hour.
Jammed Flight Controls If a jammed flight control condition exists, both pilots should T 8.6.3
apply force to attempt to either clear the jam or activate the
override feature. There should be no concern about damaging
the flight control mechanism by applying too much force.
There are override features for the control wheel and the control
column (ailerons and elevators).
If the override feature is activated, the non-jammed control
requires a normal force plus an additional override force to
move the flight control surface. For example, if a force of 10 lbs.
is normally needed to move the surface, and 50 lbs. of force is
needed to activate the override, a total force of 60 lbs. is needed
to move the control surface while in override. Response is
slower than normal with a jammed flight control; however
sufficient response is available for aircraft control and landing.
Jammed Flight Controls If a flight control is jammed or restricted: Q 9.10
• overpower the jammed or restricted system. Use maximum
force including the combined effort of both pilots if needed.
• do not turn off any flight control hydraulic power switch
Jumpseat Riders A flight deck jumpseat occupant may be moved to the cabin at any F 26.5.1
time at the Captain's discretion. In this event, neither an AWABS
update nor a new WDR is required.
Jumpseat Riders After coordinating with the gate agent, Delta jumpseaters may F 26.4.3
proceed to the aircraft after the Captain has boarded.
DC/OAL jumpseaters will be allowed to board at flight close-out.

116
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Jumpseat Riders Delta pilot and flight attendant jumpseaters (1P, 2P, 1R, etc.) will F 26.5.3
be protected from displacement if revenue or NRSA passenger
removal is required due to payload optimization. DC/OAL
jumpseaters are not protected.
Jumpseat Riders Pilots and dispatchers with CASS-approved carriers and FAA air F 26.1.4
traffic controllers are required to have their employment verified
electronically through CASS in order to occupy a flight deck
jumpseat. If verified, this will be indicated by 1P or 2P and
*CASS* on their boarding pass.
If a jumpseater’s identity is unable to be verified by CASS, if their
airline does not participate in CASS, or if CASS is temporarily
unavailable, they must be assigned a seat in the cabin if a seat is
available.
Jumpseat Seat Belts Ensure jumpseats that will be unoccupied for the flight are secured V 3.4.1
and shoulder harnesses are retracted or secured. Lap belts should
be fastened in non-folding jumpseats.
LAHSO Authorized Land and Hold Short Operations may be accepted provided the A 4.2.6
following conditions are met:
• dry runway
• no tailwind component
• no windshear report or advisory within the last 20 minutes
• no MEL items affecting stopping distance
• day – vertical guidance from ILS or PAPI/VASI is available
• night – vertical guidance from PAPI/VASI is available
Weather Requirements:
• 1,500/5 minimum with only ILS available
• 1,000/3 minimum with PAPI/VASI available
Must be above 1,000 feet AGL to accept a LAHSO clearance.
LAHSO Runway Lights When in-pavement lighting is installed, the lights will be on A 4.2.6.1
whenever LAHSO is being conducted, even when the full length
of the runway is available.
Landing Main gear touchdown is advisable no later than the most T 6.4.2
restrictive of the following:
• within the confines of the touchdown zone. For runways
equipped with a precision approach, the touchdown zone is
easily identified by the beginning of the last set of
touchdown zone markings.
• a Latest Touchdown Point (LTP) derived from an ACARS
Landing Performance Request (LPR) or ODM derived
Operational Landing Distance.
• a mandatory touchdown point specified by a Company Page,
flight plan remark or dispatcher remark.
Landing Floating above the runway before touchdown must be avoided T 6.7.3
because it uses a large portion of the available runway. The
aircraft should be landed as near the normal touchdown point as
possible. Deceleration rate on the runway is approximately three
times greater than in the air.

117
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Landing If the aircraft should bounce, hold or re-establish a normal landing T 6.6.5
attitude and add thrust as necessary to control the rate of
descent. Thrust need not be added for a shallow bounce or skip.
When a high, hard bounce occurs, initiate a go-around. Apply
go-around thrust and use normal go-around procedures. Do not
retract the landing gear until a positive rate of climb is
established because a second touchdown may occur during the
go-around.
Landing at an Unintended If a flight lands at the wrong airport, the flight will not depart until F 2.3.7
Airport the Captain receives specific authority to do so from Flight
Operations management.
Landing Configuration A landing configuration warning will occur on a go-around if the T 8.6.1.5
Warning gear is raised with the flap position greater than 20 as might
happen on a go-around with a flap or slat malfunction.
Landing Gear Alternate If the landing gear is extended using alternate gear extension, the T 8.9.1
Extension gear cannot be raised.
Landing Gear Disagree Land on all available gear. Cycling the landing gear in an attempt T 8.10.5
to extend the remaining gear is not recommended.
A tower fly-by is not recommended.
It is not Delta's policy to foam runways.
During a partial gear or gear up landing, speedbrakes should be
extended only when stopping distance is critical. Extending the
speedbrakes may compromise aircraft controllability and also
creates a risk of not being able to stow them after the aircraft has
stopped. In this case, there would be an increased probability of
injuring passengers if the over wing exits are used for
evacuation.
Be aware, however, that most gear disagree events are caused by
an indicator malfunction instead of an actual gear malfunction.
If the speedbrakes are not used and all gear remain extended,
runway distance may rapidly become critical.
Landing Gear Lights There are two bulbs in each green Landing Gear Down light GS
assembly, but only one bulb will illuminate after gear extension
when on Standby power. It might be wise to make sure all bulbs
are working prior to takeoff. If you end up on Standby power,
you don't want the burned-out bulb to be the one you need. You
already have enough problems.
Landing Gear Pins A logbook entry must be made whenever gear pins are installed F 30.2.3
and the entry must be cleared prior to the aircraft's release.
Maintenance will only use the gear pins from the aircraft storage
compartment and they must be returned to the storage
compartment prior to aircraft release.
Landing Gear Strut Extension During preflight inspection, the strut may not be fully compressed. V 3.4.2

118
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Landing Performance Request Flaps 25 and 30 approaches and landings may be conducted T 5.1.11
without reference to the ODM or obtaining an ACARS Landing
Performance Request if the runway length is at least:
• 757-200: 7,000 feet
• 757-300: 8,500 feet
• 767-300: 8,000 feet
Assumptions:
• airport elevation 4,000 or less, but including KSLC and
KDEN
• touchdown no later than 1,500 feet from the threshold
• up to max landing weight
• Autobrakes 4 or higher
• wet or dry runway
• zero wind and runway slope
• two engines at full reverse thrust
Landing Performance Request Landing performance may be requested for an alternate airport by V 5.5.7.13
entering the airport identifier followed by desired runway at the
1L position (e.g., ATL27R, or EYW09). Alternate airport
projected landing weight, temperature, and winds must also be
entered. If only the airport identifier is entered (e.g., ATL or
KATL), the LPR will reply with the available runways and
usable lengths.
Landing Performance Request The Landing Performance Request (LPR) is intended for normal V 5.5.7.13
operations to include landing with two inoperative thrust
reversers and/or inoperative auto ground spoilers. For other non-
normals, including landing with one inoperative thrust reverser,
use the ODM charts.
Landing Performance Request LDIST is the calculated landing distance and includes a 1500' air V 5.5.7.14
run from threshold to touchdown, plus stopping distance, plus a
15% safety margin. LDIST will never be greater than the
available runway length.
LTP is the Latest Touchdown Point to protect the LDIST on the
available runway. LTP varies between 1,000' to 3,000' and the
default is 1,500'. A landing beyond the LTP reduces the 15%
safety margin included in the LDIST.

119
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Laser Illumination If notified of possible laser activity near the route of flight, the F 2.3.8
crew should:
• be prepared to shield eyes and the PM should be prepared to
assume control
• consider briefing increased use of automation in the reported
laser area to include the use of autoland if available
If an aircraft is illuminated by a laser, the crew should:
• shield eyes (hand, clipboard, visor, etc.). Do not look directly
at the laser beam and avoid drawing other crewmembers’
attention to the beam
• consider turning up the flight deck lights to minimize any
further illumination effects
• if the other pilot has avoided exposure, consider transferring
control
• immediately report the incident to ATC. Reports should
include event position, altitude, color of laser beam(s),
originating direction or position, and any other information
deemed necessary for law enforcement.
• avoid rubbing eyes to avoid further injury
• contact the Duty Pilot as soon as possible
• submit an ASR
• complete the Laser Beam Exposure Questionnaire on
DeltaNet
Layover Hotel Change If the layover hotel is different from that listed on the pilot’s F 25.1.1
rotation, advise Crew Accommodations or Crew Tracking with
the hotel name and phone number so Delta can find you.
Layover Transportation Wait time for hotel crew transportation should be no more than 20 F 25.2.1
minutes. If the situation is not resolved to the crew's satisfaction,
pay for a taxi or obtain other ground transportation and submit
an expense reimbursement request through Concur.
Lightning Strike, Bird Make a logbook entry and notify the dispatcher. F 2.3.9
Ingestion or FOD Damage
Line Up and Wait Illuminate all exterior lights except the landing lights, but avoid V 3.3.8.1
illuminating the strobe lights if they will adversely affect the
vision of other pilots.
Live Animals Warm-blooded animals must be loaded in the aft cargo bin on the F 12.8.1
757 and are prohibited from traveling to or from Europe.
Warm-blooded animals cannot be loaded in any compartment on
the 767.
Cold-blooded animals may be loaded in any compartment on all
aircraft.
Live Animals Air breathing animals must not be loaded in the same F 12.9.1
compartment with dry ice. The NOTOC program is unaware of
live animals, so this segregation must occur planeside. (Check
AWABS and the NOTOC – you don’t want to kill somebody’s
dog.)
LNAV Engagement LNAV will engage if the airplane is within 2½ nm (767) or within II
the airplane’s turn radius (757) of the active route. Otherwise it
just arms.

120
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Load Audits There are two types of load audits: performance audits and noise F 2.3.10
audits.
The Captain should request a performance audit if the aircraft’s
weight and balance is in question due to abnormal handling
characteristics.
The Captain should request a noise audit if any noises are heard
originating from the cargo bins which might suggest unsecured
cargo.
In order to have a load audit initiated, the request must take place
prior to removal of any cargo. Contact the dispatcher via
ACARS prior to arrival to coordinate an audit and refer to FOM
Chapter 2.
Logbook Deferred MEL/CDL items expire after the following time periods: TOPP
Category A – as specified in the MEL 40-40-05
Category B – 3 days Page 67
Category C – 10 days
Category D – 120 days
For items where the time is specified in flight days, the day the
item was recorded in the logbook is excluded.
Logbook If an item in the MEL is labeled “Y” in the “Flight Crew May TOPP
Placard” column, pilots may install a flight crew placard. 40-40-05
Pilots may accomplish (M) or (O) procedures associated with “Y” Page 28
items as long as those procedures do not require access to a
Maintenance Manual.
If “dispatcher Approval Required” or “Contact MCC” is Page 29
associated with the item, do not takeoff until they are contacted
and a control number is received.
If “dispatcher Approval Required” or “Contact MCC” is not
associated with the item, the flight may proceed after all (M) and
(O) items are completed. Contact the dispatcher and MCC as
soon as practical.
Logbook When a maintenance irregularity is encountered and the item TOPP
clears itself or is cleared by the flight crew using appropriate 40-40-05
procedures for actuating the system, cycling circuit breakers, Page 33
cycling the electrical power system, or through normal fluid
servicing (water, lavatories, etc.) a Continue-In-Service message
may be issued by the MCC to handle the open log book item if
the aircraft is located at a Delta maintenance station with the
main cabin door closed or at a station not staffed by Delta
maintenance.
Make a logbook entry and contact MCC. MCC will review the
aircraft history and determine if maintenance action is required.
If maintenance action is not needed, the MCC will send a
Continue-In-Service message via ACARS with instructions on
how to complete the logbook.

121
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Logbook All crewmembers must review the logbook to become familiar V 3.4.1
with the history and maintenance status of the aircraft.
Ensure the logbook matches the ship number.
For an ETOPS flight make sure there is an ETOPS sticker on the
front of the logbook.
Ensure an Airworthiness Release has been signed by maintenance
except that an Airworthiness Release is not required at a Delta
non-maintenance station when discrepancies do not exist.
Review any EP-19 forms for special equipment and/or operating
instructions.
MCOs must be reviewed using the MEL/CDL.
Ensure an ETOPS Pre-Departure Check is recorded prior to an
ETOPS departure or when required by Theater Restrictions.
Logbook The Captain and the MCC share joint responsibility to ensure that F 28.3.5.1
maintenance deferral item expiration periods are not exceeded
for MEL Category B, C and D items.
All logbook MEL items must be cross-checked with their MEL F 28.3.5.2
entry to verify that all “M” and “O” requirements have been
satisfied.
All “Dispatcher Approval Required” items must be confirmed,
either on the flight plan or in an amendment from the dispatcher.
Except for recently-added logbook entries, each Category B, C, or
D item should have an expiration date listed on the flight plan. If
dates in the logbook and flight plan do not match, or if there is
no expiration date on the flight plan, contact the MCC for
confirmation that the MEL has not expired.
CDL and Special items do not have expiration dates. Therefore,
these items do not require date confirmation.
Logbook When enroute to a non-maintenance station with a yellow placard F 28.3.7.1
requiring a repetitive check by other than a pilot, notify the
MCC while enroute to arrange for appropriate maintenance.
Logbook Pilots must document all mechanical irregularities in the aircraft F 28.3.1
logbook. Verbal reports do not relieve the Captain of this
responsibility.
Pilots should notify the dispatcher and MCC via voice or ACARS
of all maintenance issues at the earliest safe opportunity.
The Captain will monitor all maintenance issues to ensure that
they do not amount to an unsafe workload or aircraft
configuration.
Logbook If the aircraft has departed the gate and MEL/CDL procedures F 28.3.6
have been applied, logbook entries and placarding procedures
may be postponed so as not to delay departure. However,
logbook entries and placarding procedures must be completed
prior to flight termination.
Logbook The MCC, contacted through Dispatch, is the only approving F 28.3.7
authority for pilot placarding procedures. Local Delta and
contract maintenance cannot approve pilot placards.
Logo Lights Logo lights (if installed) should be on whenever the airplane is V 3.3.8.1
powered.

122
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Lost Comm (US) Squawk 7600 (not 7700 first for simple lost comm). A 6.10.1
If VMC, maintain VFR and land as soon as practical. There is no A 6.10.2
requirement to land at an unauthorized or unsuitable airport or to
land only minutes short of the destination.
If unable to maintain VFR:
• route: assigned, vectored, expected or filed. (AVEF) A 6.10.3.1
• altitude: highest of assigned, expected or minimum A 6.10.3.3
ICAO procedures are different. Refer to the Chapter 6 of the
Airway Manual.
Low Approaches Low approaches for the purpose of obtaining a visual aircraft F 2.3.11
inspection of configuration or condition are discouraged.
Main Battery Discharge Flight beyond 30 minutes (90 minutes on some 757s) may result Q 6.23
in complete loss of electrical power.
On the 767, complete loss of electrical power will result in the
inability to extend the landing gear and flaps.
Maintenance Control After pushback, local maintenance does not control the airplane GS
and all communication should go through the dispatcher and
MCC.
Mandatory ATC Read Backs ICAO rules require the following to be read back to the A 6.3.2.2
appropriate ATC facility:
• altitudes and flight levels
• headings and airspeeds
• airways or route clearances
• runway in use
• clearance to enter, land on, takeoff on, backtrack, cross, or
hold short of an active runway
• transponder codes
• altimeter settings
• frequency changes
• type of radar service

123
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Mandatory ATC Reports In addition to position reporting, the following reports are to be A 6.3.2.3
made to ATC without request:
• when operating in a radar environment, on initial contact the
flight crew should inform ATC of the aircraft's assigned
altitude preceded by the words “level” or “climbing to” or
“descending to” as appropriate, and include the aircraft's
present vacating altitude, if applicable
• when vacating any previously assigned altitude or flight
level for a newly assigned altitude or flight level
• immediately upon reaching a new flight level (in non-radar/
procedural airspace)
• leaving a holding fix or point
• leaving the final approach fix inbound on final approach (not
required in the U.S. when in radar contact)
• when an approach has been missed. Request clearance for
specific action; for another approach, to another airport, etc.
• time and altitude or flight level reaching a holding fix or
clearance limit
• encountering either unforecast or hazardous weather
conditions
• loss of navigation capability, or impairment of air to ground
communications capability. Reports should include aircraft
identification, equipment affected, degree to which the
capability to operate under IFR in the ATC system is
impaired, and the nature and extent of assistance desired
from ATC.
• when unable to climb or descend at a rate of at least 500 feet
per minute.
• when the true airspeed varies or is expected to vary from the
speed filed in the original flight plan by one of the following
amounts:
▪ plus or minus 5% or 10 knots, whichever is greater (U.S.)
▪ plus or minus 5% or more (ICAO)
• changes in ETA for the next reporting point when an ETA
given is in error by 3 minutes or more (not required in the
U.S. when in radar contact or with an ADS-C connection.)
Manual Control Maintaining manual aircraft control proficiency is the F 4.3.5.2
responsibility of the Delta pilot.
Manual flight (for the primary purpose of maintaining
proficiency) should normally be exercised under suitable
environmental and low workload conditions. Sound pilot
judgment is paramount to the judicious use of this policy.
Max Climb Angle The FMS provides maximum angle climb speed on the Climb T 4.1.11
page.
Max Climb Rate The FMC does not provide max rate climb speeds, but they may T 4.1.10
be approximated by:
• 757 – clean speed + 50 knots until intercepting .76 Mach
• 767 – clean speed + 50 knots until intercepting .78 Mach

124
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Max Continuous Thrust With the autothrottles engaged: GS
• Max Continuous Thrust may be selected while in VNAV on
the 767. Just push the CON button on the TMSP.
• Max Continuous Thrust may not be selected while in VNAV
on the 757. Another pitch mode must be selected first. For
example, select Flight Level Change and then press CON.
With the autothrottles disengaged, Max Continuous Thrust may be
selected while in VNAV on both airplanes.
Max Range Cruise Enter a cost index of zero to fly at Max Range Cruise. T 4.2.1
Long Range Cruise Long Range Cruise is 99% of the fuel mileage of Max Range
Cruise and is calculated by the FMC.
Max Thrust For airplanes with the EECs operating normally, maximum thrust T 1.8.2
is obtained by advancing the thrust levers full forward (firewall).
For airplanes with EECs operating in the alternate mode,
maximum thrust is obtained by advancing the thrust levers only
to the full-rated takeoff or go-around limit. Advancing the thrust
levers to the full forward stop should be considered only if
terrain contact is imminent.
MAYDAY MAYDAY is the international radiotelephony distress signal. AIM PCG
When repeated three times, it indicates imminent and grave
danger and that immediate assistance is requested.
PAN-PAN is the international radiotelephony urgency signal.
When repeated three times, it indicates uncertainty or alert
followed by the nature of the urgency.
MAYDAY You must use the terms “MAYDAY” or “PAN-PAN” to receive GS
priority handling in ICAO airspace. Remember to say each three
times.
MEDEVAC Use the call sign MEDEVAC when carrying urgently needed F 12.12.3
lifesaving medical materials or vital organs. This will provide
expeditious ATC handling but does not constitute an emergency.
Example: MEDEVAC Delta 1234.
Medical Assistance Form Flight attendants will utilize the Medical Assistance Form (MAF) F 22.5.1
to record and communicate an ill or injured customer’s vital
medical information for use in communicating with STAT-MD.
The completed MAF will be slid under the flight deck door as
soon as possible if the flight attendant does not have or cannot
use a Cabin Medical Communication System within 5 minutes.
If the MAF will not slide under the flight deck door, a flight
attendant will relay the information via interphone.
Medical Communication Some aircraft have the Cabin Medical Communication System F 17.4.6
System installed and flight attendants can talk with STAT-MD via an
aircraft radio once a phone patch is established. Refer to Volume
1 for instructions.

125
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Medical Emergencies A medical event exists when a passenger or crewmember appears F 17.4.1.1.1
ill or injured to a level that requires medical assistance.
A medical emergency exists when STAT-MD and the Captain F 17.4.1.1.2
determine a medical event is critical and requires an expedited
landing or divert.
Pilots should always attempt to contact STAT-MD for medical F 17.4.3
assistance. STAT-MD provides prompt, expert medical
assistance and consultation for customers and crew.
Onboard medical volunteers (customers with varying levels of
medical expertise) are an integral part of airborne medical
assistance. However, these volunteers may not have expertise in
aeromedical emergency medicine. STAT-MD assistance is the
primary guidance in determining the nature and conduct of all
medical events. An additional service of STAT-MD is its
repository of medical facilities. F 17.4.3.1
Conduct the STAT-MD consult immediately (without waiting for
the MAF) if any of the following occur:
• CPR is in progress
• AED has delivered a shock
• customer has uncontrolled, heavy bleeding
• a baby is being delivered F 17.4.3.1.1
Note that the AED in use is not the same as the AED having
delivered a shock. Furthermore, use symptoms like “crushing
chest pain” instead of “possible heart attack.” Use numbers for
pulse and blood pressure instead of subjective terms like “high”
or “low.”
Medical Emergency The flight deck must be locked down throughout a medical F 17.4.7
emergency. Communication with the flight attendants must then
be accomplished via cabin interphone.
The Captain may terminate a medical emergency and flight deck
lockdown if:
• STAT-MD determines the illness is not life-threatening
• STAT-MD recommends continuing the flight
• the cabin crew is able to resume normal duties
Medical Emergency Arrival Ensure clear passage for EMS personnel. F 17.4.8.2
Considerations Make a PA asking the customers to remain seated upon arrival at
the gate to allow EMS personnel immediate access to the
affected customer. Customers may attempt to deplane if EMS
personnel are not immediately available to board upon arrival at
the gate.
Some airports may provide a law enforcement officer or other
staff member to assess the situation prior to calling for EMS.
Medical Equipment If a sealed kit or medical equipment is opened and used: F 17.4.4
• enter a description of the circumstances and the name of the
person authorized to use the kit in the aircraft logbook
• contact Flight Control to coordinate a replacement
Microburst Alert Flights may not depart from or commence the final approach to a A 5.2.14
runway where ATC has issued a Microburst Alert.
If ATC issues a Microburst Alert for the runway of intended
landing, a go-around must be executed. If the flight path
becomes marginal, accomplish the Windshear Escape Maneuver.

126
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Microburst Conditions Be especially alert for dry microbursts in the following conditions: GS
• surface temperature above 75°F
• temperature/dew point spread of 30° to 50°F
• convective activity in the area with high cloud bases
• virga or scattered light rain
• radar returns of weak cells from 5,000' to 15,000' AGL
Microbursts The phase of a microburst that is hazardous to aircraft typically A 5.2.15
lasts five minutes or less. For this reason, PIREPs from
preceding aircraft must be considered carefully. Microburst
activity may be increasing and subsequent encounters could be
more severe.
Military Escort Flight crews are not authorized to guide a military escort onto the F 11.3.9.2
ramp as they do not have SIDA escort authority.
Minimum Altitudes Jepps
Grid Minimum Off-Route Provides 2,000 feet in mountainous and/or high-elevation terrain Glossary
Altitude (Grid MORA) or 1,000 feet in non-mountainous and/or low-elevation terrain
above the highest obstruction within the section outlined by the
latitude and longitude lines. The Grid MORA does not provide
NAVAID or communications coverage. Derived by Jeppesen or
State Authorities.
Minimum Crossing Altitude
(MCA) The lowest altitude at certain fixes which an aircraft must cross
when proceeding in the direction of a higher MEA.
Minimum Enroute Altitude
(MEA) Lowest published altitude between radio fixes that meets
obstruction clearance requirements and, in some countries,
assures acceptable navigation signal coverage.
Minimum IFR Altitude
In the US, 2,000 feet in designated mountainous terrain or 1,000
feet in non-mountainous terrain above the highest obstruction
within 4 nm of the course to be flown.
Minimum Obstruction
Clearance Altitude Lowest published altitude between radio fixes that meets obstacle
(MOCA) clearance requirements for the entire route segment and in the
US provides acceptable navigation signal coverage within 22 nm
of the VOR.
Minimum Reception Altitude
(MRA) Lowest altitude at which an intersection can be determined.

Minimum Safe Altitude

(MSA) Unless otherwise noted, provides 1,000 feet obstacle clearance
within 25 nm of the navigation facility upon which the MSA is
predicated. This altitude is for emergency use only and does not
guarantee NAVAID reception. If the MSA is divided into sectors
with different altitudes, the altitudes in those sectors are
minimum sector altitudes.
Minimum Pavement Width T 2.4.9.1
757-200 120 feet for a 180° turn.
757-300 141 feet for a 180° turn.
767 146 feet for a 180° turn.

127
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Missed Approach Altitude As a general rule, set the missed approach altitude in the MCP GS
window when approximately 300 feet below the published
missed approach altitude in case you go around early in the
approach.
Mountain Wave If an Alert or Avoid TP for mountain wave is issued, crews are A 5.2.12.3.3
expected to comply with flight planned routing while navigating
within a mountain wave area. Any vertical or lateral deviation
within active mountain wave areas should be coordinated with
the dispatcher. Crews may make minor deviations to respond to
ATC requests or weather avoidance at the Captain's discretion.
PIREPS to Flight Control are expected after transiting an active A 5.2.12.6
mountain wave area.
Movement Area The movement area is any part of the airport used for taxiing, A 4.2.10.4
takeoff or landing of aircraft and is under the control of ATC.
Non-Movement Area The non-movement area refers to taxiways and apron areas not
under the control of ATC.
Navigation A 3.1.1.1
Surveillance Airspace Airspace in which Direct Controller to Pilot Communication
(DCPC) over VHF is established. Aircraft position is reported to
ATC via radar or ADS-B.
ATC must have continuous two-way VHF voice communication
capability with the aircraft and provides the required separation.
Voice communication must be made directly with ATC, not
ARINC or RADIO. HF voice/listening watch, SATVOICE and
CPDLC do not qualify as DCPC.

Non-Surveillance Airspace in which Direct Controller to Pilot Communications A 3.1.1.2

(DCPC) over VHF is not established. Aircraft position is
calculated by ATC based on ADS- C or voice reports.
ATC provides the required separation and can initiate voice
communication via flight watch or SELCAL. CPDLC may
provide additional communication and separation options;
however, backup voice capability is always required. Radar and/
or ADS-B may also be available in such airspace, but absent
DCPC, Non-Surveillance procedures apply.
Navigation A 3.1.5.1
Class I Operations on any segment which is entirely within the usable
range (service volume) of standard navigation facilities (VOR,
VOR/DME, NDB).
Class II Operations conducted on any segment which takes place outside A 3.1.5.5
the usable range of standard navigation facilities. (130 nm for
VORs and 75 nm for NDBs.)
Navigation Accuracy Check For GPS aircraft, FMS RNP systems are self-monitoring and A 3.2.5
provide alerts when the required navigation performance is not
sufficient. Lack of an RNP or GPS alert constitutes a Navigation
Accuracy Check. For RNP or GPS alerts, refer to the QRH.
Navigation Chart An EFB Orientation Map is required for any ETOPS flight. A 3.2.1

128
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Navigation Error In Class I airspace, the airway includes 4 nm either side of A 3.19
centerline.
In Class II airspace, the airway includes 15 nm either side of
centerline.
Excursion beyond these airway limits is considered a gross
navigation error and must be immediately reported to ATC to
obtain an amended clearance. Submit an ASAP report.
Navigation Facilities Do not use radio navigation aid facilities that are out of service T 5.1.1
even though flight deck indications appear normal. Radio
navigation aids that are out of service may have erroneous
transmissions that are not detected by aircraft receivers and no
flight deck warning is provided to the crew.
Navigation Systems A long-range navigation system is defined as: GS
• one FMS and one MCDU supported by one or more IRUs or
GPS, or
• one MCDU with alternate nav capability supported by its
IRU. Not all aircraft have MCDUs with alternate nav
capability.
Navigation: Oceanic Airspace The term Oceanic Airspace applies to airspace in FIRs that are A 3.1.12
above the ocean beyond territorial limits.
Navigation: Coded Departure When weather or events dictate, all Coded Departure Routes F 14.2.3.15
Routes (CDRs) for the departure city will be listed in the CDR
SUMMARY section of the flight plan. CDRs for which the
aircraft does not have sufficient fuel will still be listed but will
contain the remark, “N/A without dispatcher approval.”
When the program is in effect, ATC will contact the flight prior to
departure and issue a CDR clearance with the following
phraseology: “(call sign), cleared to the (destination) airport via
(CDR code), rest of clearance remains the same.” For example:
“DAL123 cleared to MIA via LGA MIA Whiskey Hotel, rest of
clearance remains the same.”
Advise the dispatcher anytime a CDR is issued by ATC.
Navigation: PBCS Performance Based Communication and Surveillance (PBCS) A 3.1.7.2
Requirements:
• aircraft certified by the manufacturer for PBCS operations
• no MELs affecting data link connectivity
• functional CPDLC/ADS-C and SATCOM
• acceptable FAA PBCS performance
RNP-4 is required if flight planned on a PBCS track.
There are no restrictions for non-PBCS aircraft in any oceanic
airspace except for in the North Atlantic Organized Track
System where all PBCS tracks and altitudes will be annotated on
the NAT Track Message. Non-PBCS aircraft cannot be filed on a
PBCS track FL350-390.
Navigation: RNP Required Navigation Performance (RNP) values are established A 3.1.8.2
according to navigational accuracy and are expressed in nautical
miles. RNP-10 allows for 50 nm lateral and 10 minute
longitudinal spacing between aircraft in non-surveillance
oceanic airspace. RNP4 currently allows for 30 nm lateral and
30 nm longitudinal.

129
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Navigation: RNP All flights operating in Oceanic airspace will verify/set the FMC V 5.11.13
RNP value to 4. Switching is normally automatic in Class II
airspace when radio updating terminates, but if automatic
switching does not occur, manually enter an RNP value of 4 and
then delete it when leaving Oceanic airspace.
Navigation: RVSM The following equipment is mandatory for RVSM operations A 3.1.6.1
(FL290 FL410):
• two independent, primary altimetry system
• one autopilot
• one automatic altitude hold system
• one altitude alert device
• SSR transponder
Navigation: RVSM In Oceanic RVSM airspace, limit climbs and descents to 1,000 A 3.1.6.3
fpm when within 5 nm and +/- 2,000 feet of another aircraft
Navigation: Supplementary The dispatcher can add up to two supplementary routes on flights F 14.2.3.8.2
Routes where there is a possibility of being cleared on a different route.
Supplementary routes provide fuel burn and time information
relative to the primary flight plan. Notify the dispatcher if ATC
issues a supplementary route.
Negative Pressure Relief On the 767, negative pressure relief doors on the right forward GS
Doors fuselage will not be closed if the associated cargo door is open.
Non-Normals The QRH applies during all phases of flight including ground Q NNCI 1.4
operations. For ground operations, after completion of the QRH
checklist and prior to takeoff, consult the Minimum Equipment
List to determine if dispatch relief is available.
Non-Normals Only a few situations, such as Cabin Altitude, require an Q NNCI 1.5
immediate response. Usually time is available to assess the
situation before taking corrective action.
As a general rule:
• fly the aircraft
• cancel the warning
• identify the emergency or non-normal
• accomplish the recall items from memory if applicable
• read the checklist
• do not hurry
Non-Normals The PF should call for the non-normal checklist when: Q NNCI 1.6
• the flight path is under control
• the airplane is not in a critical phase of flight such as takeoff
or landing
• all memory items are complete
NonNormals Fly the aircraft with the highest level of automation available. GS
Notification: Descent Delta policy requires pilots to make the following top of descent F 11.2.2.5
PA in conjunction with the arrival phase of flight: “Flight
attendants, please prepare the cabin for arrival.” This PA should
be made no later than five minutes prior to beginning descent to
allow flight attendants to begin the process of finalizing their
service.

130
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Notification: Descent Approximately 5 minutes prior to descent, notify the flight V 3.4.16
attendants with a PA that includes "Flight attendants please
prepare the cabin for arrival" and turn the Seat Belt sign on if it
is not already on.
Notification: Landing Cycle the No Smoking switch when descending through V 3.4.17
approximately 10,000 feet AFE (not MSL).
Operational Integrity In order to maintain operational integrity, it is important to keep F 21.8.1
the dispatcher and maintenance informed of any issues that may
affect the flight or the aircraft's ability to be turned around in a
timely manner.
• if the flight is delayed on the ground, keep the dispatcher
informed with ETO reports in ACARS
• notify maintenance of any write-ups as soon as possible,
especially if the write-up concerns pilot crew rest facilities
Operational Priorities All aspects of flight operations will be conducted in accordance F 1.1.1
with the following priorities:
• safety
• FAR, ATC, and Company policy compliance
• customer comfort
• schedule
• economy
Safety is always paramount to our operational priorities. Any time
the safety of our customers, crew or assets is in question the
operation must be stopped.
Out-of-Service Tag If a red “Out of Service” tag is installed, do not activate any V 3.4.1
system, control switch or circuit breaker without obtaining
verbal approval of maintenance personnel, preferably the
mechanic performing the repairs. (Don’t even use the aircraft
radio to call maintenance.)
Overwater Operations All Delta 757s and 767s are overwater equipped. Differences
Overwater Operations Extended overwater operations are defined as flight further than A 4.2.12
50 nm from the nearest shoreline. Aircraft cannot exceed the 50
nm limit without the required emergency equipment onboard
unless the Captain is exercising his emergency authority.
If an aircraft is overwater equipped, it must remain within 60
minutes of an adequate airport at one-engine inoperative cruise
speed under standard conditions in still air unless ETOPS
authorized.
Limited overwater operations allow aircraft without the required
emergency equipment to operate more than 50 nm from shore
under certain conditions listed in the Airway Manual.
Overweight Landing Landing distance is normally less than takeoff distance for Flaps T 6.9.1
25 or Flaps 30 landings at all gross weights. However, wet or
slippery runway field length requirements should be verified
from the landing distance charts in the ODM.
Brake energy limits will not be exceeded for Flaps 25 or 30
landings at all gross weights.
If landing distance is a concern, burn or dump fuel to reduce
weight.

131
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Overweight Landing Overweight autolands are not recommended. The autopilot is not T 6.9.2
certified for automatic landings above maximum landing weight.
An automatic approach may be attempted, but the autopilot should
be disconnected above flair height and a manual landing
accomplished.
In an emergency, if an autoland is the safest course of action, the
approach and landing should be closely monitored with
awareness that touchdown may be beyond the normal
touchdown point requiring additional landing distance and that
touchdown at higher than normal sink rates may exceed
structural limits. Go around if autoland performance is
unsatisfactory.
Overweight Landing Captains exercising their authority to make an overweight landing F 2.3.12
should take into account all operational considerations and
circumstances. Situations where overweight landings may be
justified include, but are not limited to:
• referencing non-normal procedures or maneuvers
• significant customer/crew safety concerns exist
• the risk of extended flight at lower altitudes increasing flight
crew workload
• safety systems are degraded
When landing overweight, the Captain is exercising his
emergency authority. Exercising emergency authority does not
require declaring an emergency with ATC.
Landing distance with landing flaps is generally less than the
takeoff distance for the same runway.
An overweight landing requires a logbook entry which should
include:
• the exact phrase “overweight landing”
• the actual landing weight
• the maximum landing weight
• vertical speed at touchdown
Overweight Landing There are several checklists in Section 0 of the QRH for Q 0.26
overweight landings. The checklist for the 757-300 my direct
Flaps 20 or Flaps 25 for landing.
Overweight Landing Exercising the Captain's emergency authority does not require the Q 0.29
declaration of an emergency with ATC.
Overweight Landing If approach Vref including additives is within 10 knots of the Q 0.30
Flaps 30 placard speed, use Flaps 25 and Vref 25 plus additives
for landing. (Refer to the overweight landing checklist for the
757-300 for other flap settings.)
Overweight Landing If landing distance is not an issue, holding or jettisoning fuel to Q 0.30
reduce weight is not necessary.
Overweight Landing The aircraft is not certified to autoland at greater than maximum Q 0.30
landing weight. If the Captain determines that an autoland is the
safest course of action, the approach, flare and landing must be
closely monitored at all times.

132
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Oxygen Bottles Supplemental oxygen bottles are required when operating above V 5.1.9.2
68° North. If required, maintenance will install 24 oxygen
bottles on pallets throughout the cabin and make a logbook
entry.
Ships 1607-1613 have permanent supplemental oxygen bottles
installed and a logbook entry is not required.
Oxygen Mask Test Take note of crew oxygen pressure during the test for verification V 5.1.9.4
when accomplishing the flight control check during the Taxi
Procedure.
Oxygen Mask Test Verify 1,000 psi minimum. V 5.1.9.4
Verify the pressure does not drop more than 100 psi while holding V 5.1.9.6
the Test/Reset switch for 10 seconds.
During the 10-second test in Emergency, if the oxygen cylinder
valve is not fully opened, the oxygen pressure can:
• decrease rapidly, or
• decrease more than 100 psi, or
• increase slowly back to normal
Oxygen Masks The Passenger Oxygen switch will deploy the passenger oxygen V 3.4.4
masks. (Don’t touch it unless the QRH tells you to.)
Oxygen Pressure During the Taxi Procedure, verify crew oxygen pressure has not V 3.4.10
decreased more than 100 psi since the oxygen mask test.
Oxygen Pressure When the flight crew oxygen supply is depleted during flight, the Q 1.22
flight crew is vulnerable to smoke, fumes or loss of cabin
pressurization.
Initiate an immediate diversion to the nearest suitable airport.
If an emergency situation occurs resulting in the use of the
portable oxygen bottles or PBEs, a lack of communication
capability may cause flight crew and ATC coordination
problems.
Oxygen Regulator Positions Q NNCI 1.4
Emergency Use when necessary to provide positive pressure to the mask to
remove contaminants.
100% Use when positive pressure is not required but flight deck air is
contaminated.
Normal Use when prolonged use is required and the situation permits.
Oxygen Requirements F 4.2.8
One Pilot in the Seat Seated pilot will use oxygen when above FL250.
Both Pilots in the Seats One pilot will use oxygen when above FL410.
Cabin above 10,000 feet All pilots will use oxygen.
The oxygen mask requirement for single pilot in the seat between APB 20.08
FL250 and FL410 is waived by APB 20.08 due to Covid-19.
Ozone Scrubbers Most Delta aircraft utilize ozone converters which mechanically A 5.2.21
separate the ozone from the outside air prior to entering the
cabin, however, some 757s are not equipped with ozone
converters. (Those aircraft are not listed in Volume 1 Differences
so the only way to know is to ask Maintenance.)

133
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 PA Announcements Remember 5-15-5 when considering PA announcements during F 11.3.1.1
delays. Make an announcement:
• if 5 minutes past scheduled departure time
• every 15 minutes with an update if things are changing
quickly
• if 5 minutes past scheduled arrival time, workload permitting
If 15 minute intervals are not appropriate, tell customers when the
next update can be expected.
PA Announcements Required PAs F 11.2.1.2
• before takeoff
• initial seat belt sign off
• descent: seat belt sign on, flight attendants prepare for arrival
• turbulence encountered or anticipated
• after a go-around or rejected landing
Recommended PAs F 11.2.1.3
• initial welcome aboard
• notification of relief crewmembers
• route, flying time, and estimated arrival time
PA Announcements The initial seat belt sign release PA is required by FARs and must F 11.2.2.3
occur immediately after the seat belt sign is turned off for the
first time. Though the PA may be made by any crew member,
Volume 1 states that the Captain must ensure the PA is made.
PA Quiet Hours 10 p.m. to 8 a.m. at departure station time. F 11.2.1.1
When top of climb to top of descent is over 5 hours.
When a significant number of passengers are sleeping.
Pack Inop Lights Pack Inop light only – indicates a controller fault or outlet II
overheat but the pack is still operating.
Pack Inop and Pack Off lights – indicates a pack trip caused by an
internal overheat. The pack valve is closed and the pack is off.
Packs and Bleeds Operating both packs from a single engine bleed source is V 3.4.9
acceptable as long as icing conditions do not exist. If
environmental conditions allow, however, operating only one
pack will provide additional fuel savings.
During single-engine taxi with engine anti-ice required, operate
only one pack.
Packs Off Takeoff An ENG BLEED OFF EICAS message may display during V 5.2.1.2
takeoff roll. This indication is acceptable for a Packs Off takeoff.
Do not abort.
Turn the first pack on after climb power is set. Turn the second
pack on after cabin pressurization stabilizes.
If an engine fails on takeoff, leave both packs off until 1,500 feet
AGL or until engine-out clean up altitude, whichever is higher.

134
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Packs Off Takeoff (767) Some 767s with GE engines may experience EGT exceedances V 5.16.7
during takeoff in moderate to high ambient temperatures. To
help mitigate this, AWABS may require a Packs Off takeoff.
If a Packs Off takeoff is required:
• do not reduce power during takeoff to keep EGT within
limits
• do not reject the takeoff if EGT goes into the red if other
engine indications are normal
• do not reject the takeoff for a Bleed Off light. The Engine
Bleed Off light(s) and EICAS message(s) may display if
packs are off.
• if an overtemp occurs, contact maintenance for evaluation.
Typically, the engine is okay to complete the flight.
Parking The marshalling agent will normally be assisted by wing walkers F 30.3.2.1
who are responsible to ensure clearance in the parking area. Two
wing walkers are normally required.
Captains are authorized to taxi into a gate with less than two wing
walkers provided there is:
• no threat to safety, and
• no exception noted in the Company Pages or flight plan
remarks
Captains should file an ASR if they exercise this authority.
Parking Do not taxi into the safety zone unless: F 30.3.1
• the jetway wheels and all ground service equipment are
parked outside the clearance lines, and
• a marshalling agent is in place to direct the aircraft or a
Parking Guidance System is used
Exception: If the Captain determines that small items in the safety
zone (e.g., power cords or chocks), or items parked in clearly
designated areas (e.g., fuel carts) are not hazards, the aircraft
may enter the parking area with caution.
Parking Brake Leave the parking brake set at the gate if: F 30.3.3
• the wind, including gusts, exceeds 30 knots
• the ramp is icy
• directed by the Company Page
• directed by Delta Airport Remarks
Parking Brake Do not release the parking brake until pushback clearance has V 3.4.7
been received and aircraft movement is imminent or the aircraft
has been chocked.
Parking Brake No later than 5 minutes prior to pushback, the tug driver will V 3.4.7
check in on headset with "Confirm Brakes Set." The Captain
will respond with "Brakes Set" or "Unable to Set Brakes."
Hand signals are not approved for this communication.
PEDs A lithium-ion battery has a higher likelihood of thermal runaway F 16.1.18.6
during or immediately following a charging cycle or if damaged.
Do not use a damaged battery.

135
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 PEDs Pilots and flight deck jumpseaters are prohibited from using cell F 10.3.6
phones or PEDs (to include laptop computers) from the
beginning of the Preflight checklist until completion of the
Shutdown checklist or Secure checklist, if applicable, unless an
operational need exists. Any PED use for operational need
cannot distract from the normal, safe conduct of the aircraft. If
on the ground, the aircraft must be stopped and the parking
brake set prior to ground use. This policy applies to all Delta
flights, including charters, delivery flights, and retirement
flights.
Cell phones and PEDs may be used on the ramp for operational
needs, but should not be used within 10 feet of refueling
equipment.
PEDs Approved PEDs may be used (by customers) from gate to gate on F 11.3.7
all flights, with the exception of cellular service after the
boarding door has been closed.
Singapore and Jamaica prohibit all PED use below 10,000 feet for
takeoff and landing, however.
In the event of an extended ground delay, the Captain may
authorize PED cellular use while the aircraft is stopped. After
notifying the Flight Leader that taxi is imminent, the Captain
must then receive word that the cabin is secure prior to further
taxi.
If PED interference of aircraft systems is suspected, the Captain
should notify the flight attendants to direct that all PEDs in the
cabin be turned off. File an ASR if interference is suspected.
PEDs In the event of a Red aircraft emergency, flight attendants will F 11.3.7
instruct customers to turn off and stow all PEDs. Captains
should include this information in their brief to flight attendants
during a RED emergency, as time permits.
Pilot Controlled Lighting High Intensity: 7 mike clicks in 5 seconds. AIM 2-1-9
Medium Intensity: 5 mike clicks in 5 seconds.
Low Intensity: 3 mike clicks in 5 seconds.
Lights stay on for 15 minutes.
Pilot Induced Roll Oscillation In a fully-developed lateral PIO, pilot control wheel inputs will be T 7.13
out of phase with the airplane roll response.
• immediately stop lateral control wheel inputs until the
airplane stabilizes
• initiate a go-around if oscillations do not diminish or if the
aircraft is not in a position from which a safe landing can be
made
Post-Accident or Incident After landing and clear of the runway or after a ground accident or F 2.2.3
incident, pull the Cockpit Voice Recorder circuit breaker. F 2.2.4
Post-Bad Thing Checklists There are checklists in the FOM you never want to run but need to F 2.2.3
know about anyway:
• Post-Accident checklist
• Post-Incident/Irregularity checklist F 2.2.4
• Post-Diversion checklist F 15.4.1
• Post-Emergency checklist F 17.9.1

136
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Procedure Turns (US) Procedure Turns are not required when: A 4.4.3
• receiving radar vectors to final approach
• flying a NoPT routing
• cleared for a straight-in approach
• cleared for approach from a holding pattern with the holding
fix collocated with the FAF and the holding course aligned
with the final approach course

Entry Airspeed Maneuvering speed or holding speed, but not greater than 200 kts.

Course Reversal The method of course reversal is normally left to the pilot, but
some procedure turns are specified as procedure tracks and the
turns must be flown exactly as depicted.

Turn Direction Same as a holding pattern entry. Max angle for teardrop is 30°.
If an entry turn in the shorter direction places the aircraft on the
non-maneuvering side, correct back to the procedure turn course
using an intercept angle of at least 20 degrees.
If the inbound course is intercepted outbound, maintain course and
turn inbound on the maneuvering side.

Proceeding Outbound Use timing, DME, etc. to remain within the published distance.
If timing, start timing outbound abeam the procedure turn fix or
after completing the outbound turn if abeam cannot be
determined.
Descent
Descend from the procedure turn fix altitude when outbound
abeam the procedure turn fix or after completing the outbound
turn if the abeam point cannot be determined.
Descend from the procedure turn altitude or any altitude past the
IAF when established on the appropriate published segment of
the approach.
45°/180° Procedure Turn
Intercept and maintain the outbound track as soon as possible after
passing the procedure turn fix.
To make the course reversal, fly outbound on the 45° leg for
45 seconds before turning inbound. Make the 180° turn back
inbound as depicted.
Descend as necessary on the outbound track to the specified
altitude. If further descent is necessary after the inbound turn, do
not descend until established on the inbound track, which is
defined as within half scale deflection on an ILS or VOR and
within 5° on an NDB.
Do not exceed normal descent rates.
Pushback If the headset or interphone system is inoperative and cannot be F 30.1.1
replaced or repaired prior to departure, the Captain and the ramp
agent will conduct a face-to-face briefing which includes:
• a review of all hand signals to be used
• the conditions under which pushback and engine start will be
conducted
• prior coordination with ATC if pushing back onto an active
taxiway
An emergency stop during pushback will be initiated with
repeated flashing of the taxi light until the aircraft comes to a
complete stop.

137
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Pushback Do not turn on the red anti-collision beacon or release brakes until V 3.4.7
cleared for pushback or engine start.
Pushback The Pushback checklist must be completed prior to aircraft V 3.4.7
movement.
Pushback To prevent damage, do not hold or turn the nosewheel tiller and do V 3.4.7
not use the brakes to stop the airplane during pushback or
towing.
Pushback The following items are required for dispatch: F 14.1.9
• Flight Dispatch Release and flight plan
• WDR or Pre-Pushback Message
• updated weather
• EFSR or FSR (fuel slip)
• required items for duty (license, medical, passport, etc.)
• required aircraft documents (logbook, QRHs, ODM, etc.)
Quantities on Postflight Make a logbook write up and contact maintenance if: V 3.4.22
• oil quantity is less than 8 quarts
• oxygen pressure is less than 1,000 psi
• a hydraulic quantity RF is displayed
Quantities on Preflight The minimum oxygen pressure is 1,000 psi. V 3.4.1
The minimum hydraulic quantity is no RF displayed.
The minimum oil quantity recommended for start is 17 quarts. If
oil quantity is less than 17 quarts, verify 8 quarts minimum after
engine warm up at idle. Dispatch approval is required if oil
quantity is less than 8 quarts after engine warm up.
Radio and Baro Bugs V 4.3.14
CAT I ILS Baro at published DA, Radio off
CAT II Baro at field elevation, Radio at published RA
CAT II RA Not Auth Baro at published DA, Radio off
CAT III Baro at field elevation, Radio at 50 feet
Straight-In Non-ILS Baro at published MDA/DA or DDA, Radio off
Circling Baro at higher of published MDA or field elevation + 1,000',
Visual Radio off
Baro at published mins for the approach used to back up the visual
approach. Set field elevation if no approach is available. Radio
off.
Radio Management In general, unless needed for ATC or Company communications, A 6.8.1
monitor 121.5 on the right VHF radio.
Radio Management VHF L should normally be used for ATC. V 3.3.4
VHF R should normally be used for ramp control, operations or
other Company communications. When not used for ramp or
Company communications, a listening watch on 121.5 should be
maintained.
VHF C should normally be used for ACARS data link.
The First Officer should clearly communicate to the Captain the
radio being used to receive taxi instructions.
Rain, Hail or Sleet Avoid thunderstorms, hail, and visible moisture over storm cells. V 5.16.8
Moderate to heavy rain, hail or sleet should be avoided to the
maximum extent possible.
Place the Engine Start Selectors to CONT if moderate to heavy
rain, hail or sleet is encountered.
138
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Rain, Hail or Sleet Flight into moderate to heavy rain, hail, or sleet could adversely T 1.13
affect engine operations and should be avoided whenever
possible. If moderate to heavy rain, hail, or sleet is encountered,
reducing airspeed can reduce overall precipitation intake. Also,
maintaining an increased minimum thrust setting can improve
engine tolerance to precipitation intake, provide additional stall
margin, and reduce the possibility of engine instability or thrust
loss.
Ram Air Turbine Deploys automatically inflight if both engines fail. II
Automatic deployment is inhibited on the ground, but manual
deployment is possible.
Powers the flight control portion of the center hydraulic system
only.
Requires airspeed above 130 kts to maintain aircraft control.
Ram Air Turbine The Ram Air Turbine switch will deploy the Ram Air Turbine V 3.4.4
inflight and may deploy it on the ground. (Don’t touch the
switch on the ground. You could kill somebody.)
Ramp Inspections The location of various aircraft forms and licenses is listed in F 30.5.1
FOM Chapter 30.
If a copy of a ramp inspection report is received, send the report F 30.5.3
via COMAT to ATG, Dept. 027, Flight Operations Quality
Assurance and Compliance.
Raw Data On ILS-DME approaches, one pilot must select ILS or APP (not GS
Map) on his EFIS control panel to display DME from the
localizer on the RDMI.
To monitor raw data on a VOR approach, select Manual on the
VOR control panel and tune the correct VOR frequency. This
prevents the FMS from auto-tuning the VOR to another station.
You can then monitor raw data with either the RDMI or on the
HSI with VOR selected on the EFIS control panel.
For DME distances to a VOR station, it is also necessary to select
Manual on the VOR control panel and manually tune the VOR
frequency to force the appropriate DME to the RDMI and to
prevent the VOR from auto-tuning to another station.
Selecting Manual on the VOR panel will cause the tuned VOR
station and the selected course to be displayed on the HSI map.
Be aware this is not raw data. It’s just a computer-generated
display based on FMS position. If the FMS position is wrong,
the display will be wrong. To actually check raw data, use the
RDMI or select VOR mode and dial in the desired course.
On NDB approaches, make sure the NDB is tuned and the left
VOR/ADF selector on the RDMI is in ADF.

139
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Raw Data On all non-RNAV approaches pilots must monitor applicable raw T 5.3.2.1.2
data to determine course guidance and FMS map validity at the
FAF.
• one pilot must display raw data associated with the approach
• localizer course deviation may be monitored on the ADI
• VOR or NDB course raw data may be monitored on the
RDMI
In lieu of monitoring ground based navigation facilities, GPS can
be used to determine relative position at the FAF.
• confirm GPS updating on POS REF page 2/4 and no
"Unable RNP" EICAS message is displayed
One pilot must monitor VTK error not later than the FAF.
• VTK error constraints of +/- 75 feet will meet step down
altitude restrictions, if applicable, between the FAF and the
runway
Raw Data For non-ILS or ILS-G/S Out approaches, raw data monitoring of T 5.3.2.1.4
the MAP is not required due to the accuracy of GPS or FMC
positioning.
Recirc Fan (757) Do not turn off the left recirc fan on the 757. V 5.2.1.1
Recirc Fans Turn the recirc fans off when external air is in use, except do not V 5.2.1.1
turn off the left recirc fan on the 757.
Recirc Fans During hot weather the recirc fans have a negative effect on V 5.16.7
passenger comfort because they introduce hot air from around
the cargo compartments to the mix manifold. Turn the recirc
fan(s) off during hot weather. (But do not turn off the left recirc
fan on the 757.)
Responsibilities: Captain Allow only current and qualified pilots to occupy a control seat. F 10.2.2.1
(Don’t allow a flight attendant to sit in a pilot seat during a lav
break.)
Allow admission to the flight deck only to authorized persons.
Allow a Line Check Pilot to assume command if being relieved.

140
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Responsibilities: Captain The Captain is responsible for: F 14.1.1.2
• the safety of customers, crew, cargo, and aircraft
• maintaining flight watch capability with Flight Control
• notifying the dispatcher of any significant route changes,
maintenance irregularities, etc. that may affect the flight or
down line operations, to include:
▪ lateral deviations of more than 100 nm
▪ deviation from flight plan cruise altitude of more than
4,000 feet for more than 30 minutes
▪ any condition that will affect ETA by more than 15
minutes
▪ if the flight will arrive at the destination or alternate with
less than minimum FAR fuel reserves
▪ fuel consumption greater than planned
▪ any diversion to alternate unless previously discussed
▪ any change of destination or designated alternate airport
▪ if ATC issues a supplementary route or CDR
▪ any pre-dispatch EFB failure resulting in the use of a Go
file
▪ any inflight EFB failure resulting in less than two fully
operational EFBs
The requirement to notify the dispatcher cannot be satisfied by
communicating with any other agency or entity.
Responsibilities: Dispatcher The dispatcher is responsible for: F 14.1.1.3
• flight monitoring
• issuing necessary safety of flight information
• canceling or redispatching the flight if unsafe or unable to
continue as planned.
The dispatcher will recompute ETE, fuel burn, and arrival fuel for
all route amendments using the latest information available, if
requested.
Responsibilities: Joint The Captain and the dispatcher have joint responsibility and must F 14.1.1.1
agree that the planned flight is safe and can be operated in
accordance with FARs and Company policy. Either may delay
the flight, but only the dispatcher may cancel a flight.
Reverse Thrust Movement of the reverse thrust lever could result in operation of V 3.4.4
the engine thrust reverser even with the engine shut down.
Reverse Thrust After reverse thrust is initiated following touchdown, a full stop T 5.7.6
landing must be made. If an engine stays in reverse, safe flight is
not possible.
Reverse Thrust After reverse thrust is initiated, a full stop landing must be made. V 3.4.20
Initiate movement toward reverse idle by 80 knots and reach the
reverse idle detent prior to taxi speed. The PM should call “80
knots.”
Stow the thrust reversers after the engines have decelerated to
idle.
RNAV (RNP) Approaches The 165-knot max speed restriction for an RF leg on an RNAV GS
(RNP) approach also applies during a missed approach from the
RF leg until the MAP.
RNAV (RNP) Documentation To document RNAV (RNP) approaches with ACARS, select RNP V 5.5.6.1
APPR from the Arrivals page and complete the form.

141
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 RNAV (RNP) Documentation RNAV (RNP) and autoland attempts are required via ACARS. V 3.4.22
RNAV (RNP) or RNP (AR) ATC procedures do not allow controllers to clear aircraft direct to, T 5.3.4.1.2
Approaches nor may pilots accept a clearance direct to, the fix preceding an
RF leg.
RNAV Approaches Do not tune a Localizer frequency for an ILS backup during GS
RNAV approaches. The localizer DME takes priority over GPS
on final approach which could result in map shifts and/or poor
VNAV performance.
RNAV Approaches During RNAV (RNP) or RNP AR operations, crews may T 7.11.2
experience occasional momentary Caution-level terrain alerts. If
these alerts are of short duration and have ceased, crews should
verify they are on the correct path and consider continuing the
approach in LNAV and VNAV. The risks of terrain contact
during the terrain avoidance maneuver may be higher than
continuing on the required track.
Warning-level terrain alerts (“Pull Up!”) always require
immediate action. The most appropriate action depends on
where the terrain avoidance maneuver is initiated.
RNAV Approaches A flight may be dispatched to conduct GPS approaches at the A 4.1.4
destination or the alternate, but not both.
When dispatched to a GPS approach at either the destination or
the alternate, Flight Control must accomplish a PRAIM analysis
and indicate on the flight plan that RNAV approaches are okay
during the specified time period.
RNAV Approaches Do not tune any ILS or LOC frequency unless required by the V 4.3.7
approach procedure. V 4.3.8
RNAV Approaches LPV and LP minimums are not authorized. V 4.3.7
RNAV Approaches LNAV/VNAV navigation is normally used to fly RNAV A 4.4.16.13
approaches. Unless specifically stated otherwise, RNAV
approaches require the use of GPS. The following limitations
and provisions apply:
• RNAV approach capability must be authorized in the AOM
• the approach must be line selectable from the database
• waypoints between the PFAF/FAF/FAP and the RWY may
not be modified or manually re-entered, except for speed
changes required to comply with ATC clearances
• the autopilot is required whenever the reported weather is
less than a 1000 foot ceiling or 3 miles visibility
• an RNP value of 1.0 (or less) must be used for the initial and
missed approach segments
• an RNP value of 0.3 must be used for the final approach
segment for RNAV (GPS)/RNAV (GNSS)/RNP approaches
• the published RNP value must be used for the final approach
segment of RNAV (RNP)/RNP (AR) approaches but may not
be lower than the RNP authorized for the aircraft
• if VNAV is used the altimeter setting must be from the local
facility. Remote altimetry is not authorized.
• unless in VMC, a missed approach must be executed if the
ANP becomes greater than the RNP (e.g. “Unable RNP”
message)

142
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 RNAV Approaches RNAV (GPS) approaches may be identified as RNAV (GNSS) or A 4.4.16.13
RNP internationally. RNP is the new international standard
nomenclature for RNAV (GNSS) approaches.
RNP AR approaches are identified as RNAV (RNP) domestically
and RNAV (RNP) or RNP (AR) internationally.
RNAV Approaches The lowest RNP for RNAV (RNP)/RNP (AR) approaches at the A 4.4.16.16
destination for the 757/767 is RNP 0.13 with the autopilot and
RNP 0.28 with the flight director.
At the alternate, the lowest RNP is RNP 0.30.
RNAV Departures The autopilot is recommended for RNAV departures, strict noise GS
abatement departures, and other departure procedures where
ground track is critical.
RNAV Departures When hand-flying, the flight director may command an overshoot GS
during turns on an RNAV departure leading to a flight path
deviation. Either engage the autopilot (it won’t overshoot) or
disregard the flight director command bars and overlay the trend
vector on the HSI path to accurately fly the route. (Put the
noodle on the magenta line.)

143
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 RNAV Departures Accomplish a full IRS alignment prior to taxi. T 3.11
Ensure the waypoints, speed, and altitude constraints of the RNAV
departure selected from the database match those depicted on
the published Jeppesen procedure for the departure runway.
Ensure that critical DMEs (if identified) are operative. Critical
DMEs do not apply to aircraft with GPS operative. All other
aircraft depend on DME radio updating for navigation accuracy
during RNAV departures. Therefore, when operating ships with
GPS inoperative, check the NOTAMS to ensure that all critical
DMEs are operative.
For ships with GPS inoperative and with autothrottle or N1/EPR
switch inoperative, consider a fast realignment immediately
prior to pushback to refine aircraft position.
PDCs will state either CLIMB VIA or CLIMB MAINTAIN. Make
sure you know which one to fly.
Ensure the departure runway selected in the FMS is the assigned
departure runway and the associated first fix on the HSI matches
the assigned departure clearance.
When approaching the departure runway, check the aircraft versus
runway position on the HSI in the 10 nm scale and verify the
aircraft symbol is in close proximity to the departure end of the
runway. Do not use LNAV for departure if the FMS position is
incorrect. In the HSI 10 nm scale, the width of the runway
symbol is 1,515 feet. For lateral alignment, when on the runway,
the tip of the aircraft triangle should be between, or very close
to, the runway symbol edge lines. Check the position is also
within 1,000 feet longitudinally. If the aircraft map position is
greater than 1,000 feet from the actual runway takeoff position,
or cannot be determined, request radar vectors to the first fix.
The FMS will begin to search for suitable radio updates after the
aircraft reaches 100 knots on takeoff roll.
If the departure procedure requires an LNAV track from the
runway, arm LNAV before takeoff.
Pay close attention to the takeoff clearance. “Delta 123, cleared
for takeoff” is the standard clearance issued to fly the RNAV
SID as published.
Use of the autopilot is strongly encouraged. It is recommended to
engage the autopilot at approximately 1,000' AFE after VNAV is
selected and climb power is set.
Whenever a significant course change is depicted, expect the FMC
to issue turn anticipation for fly-by waypoints (waypoints
depicted on Jeppesen charts without a circle around them).

144
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 RNAV Departures RNAV SID and STAR design is based on keeping path accuracy T 3.11
within 0.5 nm. Deviations are not acceptable. On the HSI in the
10 nm scale, the base of the airplane symbol represents
approximately 1 nm. Pilots may use the airplane symbol or the
Progress page 2 to monitor path accuracy.
During turns, commands from the flight director may direct an
overshoot. Use the autopilot or, if hand flying, overlay the trend
vector on the magenta line to accurately fly the depicted route.
(Put the noodle on the magenta line.)
Pilots shall respond to “climb via” clearances by repeating the
clearance verbatim. (Say “climb via.”) When changing
frequencies or on initial contact, advise ATC of current altitude
and “climbing via” the procedure name. If an assigned altitude
or speed is not contained on the SID, advise ATC of restrictions
assigned by the prior controller.
If vectored off of an RNAV departure, ATC must provide a new
altitude and heading. All restrictions are canceled, including any
speed assignments, unless ATC provides another speed
assignment.
When cleared back onto a procedure, any succeeding charted
speed restrictions apply.
RNAV PRAIM PRAIM is a dispatch requirement only. An RNAV (RNP) T 5.3.4.1.1
approach may be initiated as long as the ANP is less than the
required approach RNP.
RNAV PRAIM PRAIM is required to dispatch to any GPS-based approach. A 4.2.11.4
When dispatched to a GPS-required or GPS overlay approach, the
dispatcher will add a flight plan remark regarding satellite
coverage gaps.
PRAIM predictions are very reliable so do not expect to fly an
RNAV approach during forecast PRAIM satellite coverage gaps.
Holding until ANP is within limits, flying a different approach
or diverting to another airport may be required.
PRAIM is required to dispatch to RNAV/RNP departures and
arrivals with RNP values less than 1.
RNAV RNP RNAV RNP approaches may have different names at international GS
destinations, but if it’s an RNP approach it will have a published
RNP value and either RNP or AR (for Authorization Required)
will appear in parenthesis in the title.
RNAV RNP Crew entry of an RNP will prevent automatic RNP changes until T 5.3.34.1
the crew deletes the RNP entry.
If an RNP is manually set prior to the approach (e.g. 0.3 or 0.13),
that value will stay in the FMS until deleted. The FMS will not
automatically change to the correct RNP for the missed
approach, which is probably higher than the approach RNP.
Rudder Effectiveness Rudder control is effective to approximately 60 knots on landing. T 6.7.2
Rudder Effectiveness The rudder becomes effective at between 40 and 60 knots on T 3.1.2.4
takeoff.
Rudder Pedal Adjustment Adjust the rudder pedals to permit full rudder pedal travel and full V 3.4.5
brake application at the same time.

145
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Rudder Trim Technique For the primary rudder trim technique: T 1.10.2
• set symmetrical thrust
• balance fuel if required
• ensure the autopilot is engaged in HDG SEL or HDG
HOLD and stabilized for at least 30 seconds
• trim the rudder in the direction corresponding to the down
(low) side of the control wheel until the control wheel
indicates level. The indices on top of the control wheel
should be used to ensure a level wheel condition. The
aircraft is properly trimmed when the control wheel is level,
(zero index). As speed, gross weight, or altitude change,
trim requirements may also change. In a proper trim
condition, there may be a slight forward slip (slight bank
angle indicated on the bank pointer) and a slight deflection
of the slip/skid indicator, which is acceptable.
There is also an alternate rudder trim technique in the FCTM that
uses aileron trim.
Runway Change If a runway change is required prior to takeoff, do not just type the GS
new runway into the Runway line on the Route page. Always
select the runway and departure procedure from the DEP/ARR
page instead.
Runway Change A ■ indicates items on the checklists that should be considered for V 3.2.13
re-accomplishment in the event of a runway, intersection,
departure, performance data or approach change, or go-around.
If an intersection change provides additional runway, performance
data remains valid and crewmembers do not need to accomplish
the runway/departure change items.
If the landing runway is changed and the Captain determines the
runway change can be accomplished visually, the runway
change items may be waived.
Runway Contamination Do not take off if: V 5.16.3.2.1
• braking action is reported as nil
• water/slush/wet snow exceeds ½ inch (1.2 cm)
• dry snow exceeds 4 inches (10 cm)
A rolling takeoff is strongly advised when the crosswind exceeds
20 knots.
Runway Contamination Do not land if: V 5.16.3.5.2
• braking action is reported as nil in the landing or rollout
portion
• standing water, slush or wet snow exceeds 1 inch (2.5 cm)
• dry snow exceeds 4 inches (10 cm)
Do not assume the last 2,000 feet of the runway will have braking
action as good as the touchdown zone.
Runway Contamination If the Quick Reference Landing Length chart in the FCTM does V 5.16.3.5.2
not apply and braking action is less than Good or RCC is less
than 4, accomplish an ACARS Landing Performance Request or
refer to the Operational Landing Distance table in the Quick
Reference Tab of the ODM.

146
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Runway Contamination When the runway is other than dry, consider precautionary V 5.16.3.5.2
measures such as:
• slowest available approach speeds
• highest possible flap setting
• minimize crab
• land as early in the touchdown zone as possible
• firm landing to break water surface tension
• consider highest autobrake setting or maximum manual
braking
• slower turn off and taxi speeds
• avoid abrupt steering inputs
• use maximum allowable symmetrical reverse thrust
• if side slipping off the runway, select reverse idle and release
brakes to return to centerline
• the aircraft will tend to drift off the runway nose first with
forward thrust and tail first with reverse thrust
• be aware of the possibility of whiteout from reverse thrust in
dry snow
Runway Contamination W (Wet) is automatically selected by AWABS when the runway is V 5.16.3.3
reported as wet on the station’s AWABS template.
Runway Contamination Refer to Guidelines for Takeoff on Contaminated Runways or V 5.16.3
Landing with Braking Action Less than Good in Volume 1.
Runway Contamination Do not assume the last 2,000 feet of the runway will have braking T 6.7.3.3
action as good as the touchdown zone.
Runway Contamination Do not land if: T 6.7.3.3
• braking action report of nil by any air carrier aircraft or
airport operator in the landing or rollout portion of the
runway
• standing water, slush, or wet snow in excess of one inch (2.5
cm) depth
• dry snow in excess of four inches (10 cm) depth
Runway Contamination Dry: the runway is dry or can be considered dry. V 5.16.3.4
Slippery: braking capability is degraded, but acceleration ability is
unaffected.
• Wet: the runway is wet and the Captain considers braking
capability to be degraded or the runway is covered with
packed snow
• Icy: the runway is covered with ice
Cluttered: both braking capability and acceleration capability is
degraded.
• QCTR (¼ inch clutter): the runway is covered by the
equivalent of .14-.25 inches of standing water
• HCTR (½ inch clutter): the runway is covered by the
equivalent of .26-.50 inches of standing water
Runway Contamination Prior to takeoff on a contaminated runway, refer to the Takeoff V 5.16.3.5
Runway Contaminant Decision Tree in Volume 1.
Runway Contamination Snow is wet if the temperature is 30°F (-1°C) or above. V 5.16.3.5
Snow is dry if the temperature is below 30°F (-1°C).

147
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Runway Contamination When wet, grooved runways and runways with a porous friction V 5.16.3.5
overlay provide braking action approximately equal to a dry
runway. Dry WDR numbers may be used even if the runway is
wet.
757-300 aircraft, however, may not consider a wet runway to be
dry even if the runway is grooved or has a porous friction
overlay. Wet WDR numbers must be used if the runway is wet.
Runway Crossing Illuminate all exterior lights, except do not illuminate landing V 3.3.8.1
lights and strobe lights if they will adversely affect the vision of
other pilots.
Runway Definitions A dry runway for takeoff is dry. F 14.1.2.3
A wet runway for takeoff is wet.
A dry runway for landing is a runway that is dry and the visibility
is greater than RVR 4000/ ¾ sm.
A wet runway for landing is a runway that is wet or the visibility
is less than RVR 4000/ ¾ sm.
A short runway is a runway less than:
• 7,000 feet for 757-300 and 767 aircraft or
• 6,000 feet for 757-200 aircraft
Runway Dependent STAR Runway Dependent STARs require the pilot to select a specific GS
runway in order for the FMC to properly load the entire STAR.
Runway Edge Lights Runway edge lights are required for all takeoff and landing A 4.2.3
operations:
• between sunset and sunrise (night)
• between sunrise and sunset (day) when the visibility is
reported less than 2 statute miles
Runway Entry Prior to crossing a runway hold short line to either takeoff from or V 3.4.12
cross a runway, both crewmembers should confirm their position
by comparing taxiway and runway identification signs to the
taxi chart.
Runway for Dispatch Flight Control will normally dispatch a flight to the longest F 14.1.2.1
available runway based on the FAR wet landing field length and
zero wind.
Operational necessity may require dispatch based to the FAR dry
landing field length if forecast conditions permit. This will be
noted in the Remarks section of the flight plan.
Runway Heading The magnetic direction that corresponds with the runway AIM PCG
centerline extended, not the painted runway number. When
cleared to “fly or maintain runway heading,” pilots are expected
to fly or maintain the heading that corresponds with the
extended centerline of the departure runway. Drift correction
shall not be applied.

148
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Runway Length Flaps 25 or 30 approaches and landings may be conducted T 5.1.11
normally without reference to the ODM landing distance tables
or ACARS Landing Performance Request with the following
minimum runway lengths:
• 757-200: 7,000 feet
• 757-300: 8,500 feet
• 767: 8,000 feet
The following assumptions are applied:
• airport elevation 4,000 ft. or less (including KSLC and
KDEN)
• touchdown no later than 1,500 ft. from threshold
• up to Max Landing Weight
• Autobrakes 4 or higher
• wet or dry runway
• zero wind and runway slope
• two engines at full reverse thrust
Runway Length On arrival, if the runway is contaminated or if the braking action V 3.4 15
is reported less than good or if the runway length is less than the
Quick Reference Landing Length in the FCTM, reference the
Landing Performance Request (LPR) or ODM.
Runway Position Both pilots will verify and verbalize the uplinked or inserted V 3.4.12
runway/intersection displayed on the MCDU and the actual
runway takeoff position observed.
Runway Snow or Ice No flight may takeoff or land with snow or ice on the runway F 14.1.2.5
unless the pilots have a current field condition, braking action
report or runway condition codes.
Runway Snow Plowing Takeoff on runways that have been plowed is authorized provided F 14.1.2.5
the runway is plowed at least 50 feet on both sides of the
centerline and snow or ice outside the plowed area but within 75
feet of the centerline does not exceed 6 inches in depth.
Runway Width The minimum runway width for normal operations is 148 feet F 14.1.2.2
(45 meters). Exemptions will be listed on the Company Page or
in the Airport Remarks section of the flight plan.
Safety Vests All crewmembers are required to wear safety vests for all exterior V 3.4.2
inspections and ramp activities.
Sand or Dust There are extensive procedures in Volume 1for operations in a V 5.16.11
sandy or dusty environment such as during a haboob in Phoenix.

149
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Seat Belt Signs When anticipating turbulence, illuminate the seat belt sign and F 5.2.7.1
make a PA. Use the term "rough air" instead of "turbulence."
Notify customers of any attempts to get out of turbulence, such
as altitude changes.
For planning purposes, it may take approximately 15 minutes to F 5.2.7.2
notify all flight attendants, discontinue service and secure
galleys for a narrowbody and 25 minutes for a widebody.
If moderate or greater turbulence is expected on descent to the
destination, notify the flight attendants of the type of turbulence
to expect and ask them to complete their final cabin check as
early as possible. Include the request for flight attendants being
seated earlier in the descent in the top of descent PA.
For light turbulence, communicate to the flight leader/purser via F 5.2.7.4.1
interphone first and follow up with a PA. Flight attendants may
continue cabin service during light turbulence.
For unexpected moderate turbulence, make the command PA, F 5.2.7.4.2
"Flight attendants, take your jumpseats for your safety." Flight
attendants will move carts to a safe place and secure the galleys,
if able. When it's safe for flight attendants to resume duties,
make the PA, "Flight attendants, check in."
For severe turbulence, make the command PA, "Flight attendants, F 5.2.7.4.3
be seated immediately for your safety." (Note the difference
from the moderate PA.) Flight attendants will set the brakes on
the carts and sit in the nearest seat. When it is safe for flight
attendants to move to their jumpseats, but not to resume duties,
make the PA, "Flight attendants, take your jumpseats." When it
is safe for flight attendants to resume duties, make the PA,
"Flight attendants, check in."
Seat Belt Signs In order to ensure that passengers do not become complacent F 5.2.6
when the seat belt sign is on, it is important that the passengers
and flight attendants are made aware of the reason the seat belt
sign is illuminated. Ensure the seat belt sign is:
• on when conditions dictate
• off when conditions no longer require its use
Seat Belt Signs When the seat belt sign is turned off for the first time, the Captain V 3.4.14
or First Officer must make a PA advising passengers to keep seat
belts fastened while seated.
Seat Belts Delta requires passengers to keep their seat belts fastened while F 11.3.6
seated and prior to and during all ground movement, takeoffs
and landings.
Secure Checklist After coordinating with local maintenance or operations, V 3.4.23
accomplish the Secure checklist only when the aircraft is to
remain for two hours or more.
On the last flight into a limited or non-maintenance station:
• if a maintenance discrepancy is entered in the logbook,
contact MCC through the dispatcher. Install any Flight Crew
Placards before leaving the airplane.
• perform a complete exterior inspection
Sequenced Flashers Sequenced flashers may be inoperative for CAT II approaches and A 4.4.17.5.1
are not required for CAT I or CAT III approaches.

150
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Sidestep Approaches The landing runway must not be more than 1,200 feet from the A 4.4.7
approach runway.
If the sidestep is a published instrument approach procedure there
will be weather minimums on the approach plate.
If the sidestep is an informal maneuver it must be conducted in
VMC and with the agreement of both ATC and the aircrew.
Anytime an aircraft is flying an instrument approach in IMC and
plans to land on another runway it is considered a circling
approach unless sidestep minimums are published for the
runway of intended landing.
Single-Engine Taxi As a technique: GS
• all 757s can be taxied on single engine at all gross weights
• all 767s can be taxied on single engine at gross weights
under 390,000 pounds
Single-Engine Taxi Taxi on single engine unless operational necessity dictates V 3.4.8
otherwise.
Normally taxi out for takeoff on the left engine in a 757 and on the
right engine in a 767, although using the opposite engine is
permitted.
(If you taxi out for takeoff on the right engine in a 757, the PTU
makes weird noises and alarms the passengers. If you start the
right engine for single-engine taxi on a 767, the rampers can
throw last-minute bags in the bulk cargo compartment if
necessary.)
Single-Engine Taxi After landing and engine cool down, normally shut down the left V 3.4.22
engine on a 757 and either engine on a 767.
(Be sure to shut down the left engine on the 757 because the
jetway often comes to the 2L door and you don’t want to suck
something off the jetway and into the engine.)

151
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 SLOP Strategic Lateral Offset Procedure (SLOP) is an ICAO approved A 3.1.13
procedure of flying either centerline or 1 nm or 2 nm right of
centerline. It is used in oceanic airspace to help mitigate wake
turbulence encounters and reduce collision risk for both same
and opposite direction traffic.
Any offset applied using SLOP may not begin until the oceanic
entry point (OEP) and must be removed at the oceanic exit
point.
Parallel Offset is a Delta approved procedure to fly 1nm mile right
of centerline. It is used in certain regions (other than oceanic
airspace) to reduce collision risk for both same and opposite
direction traffic.
Any parallel offset should only be applied from the time the
aircraft reaches its cruising level until top of descent.
SLOP and Parallel Offset are not authorized within certain
countries (e.g. Hong Kong and continental Canada). Refer to
AM country specific pages for additional information.
Always offset to the right. Never offset to the left.
Normally in oceanic airspace, pilots should randomly select
between centerline or 1 nm or 2 nm right of centerline to achieve
an equal distribution of flying between the three positions,
except that in WATRS and GOMEX areas:
• offsets are not authorized in the area that extends seaward
from the boundary of the New York Domestic FIR (KZNY)
up to and including a line connecting TUBBS, SAUCR,
VEGAA, and WEBBB waypoints in the NY CTA West
(KZWY).
• offsets are not authorized on “Y” or “Q” routes
In Africa and Russia/Russian Far East, pilots will offset 1 nm right
of centerline.
In South America (south of 8º North), pilots should offset 1 nm
right of centerline.
SLOP is not in the terminology of some Air Traffic Service Units.
If asked, the recommended response is, for example: “Delta
1234 is flying a 1 nm parallel offset.”
SMGCS Some procedures may take effect at RVR 1200 even though a A 4.2.9
SMGCS chart is only required below RVR 500.
The SMGCS chart, if available, should be referenced for any
CAT III approach and for any taxi out for takeoff when the
visibility is reported below RVR 1200.
If the visibility is below RVR 500, the ATIS will state that low
visibility procedures are in progress and pilots will notify ATC
of their approach minima.
Smoke, Fire or Fumes It must be stressed that for smoke that continues or a fire that Q NNCI 1.3
cannot be positively confirmed to be completely extinguished,
the earliest possible descent, landing and evacuation must be
accomplished.
If a smoke, fire or fumes situation becomes uncontrollable, the
flight crew should consider an immediate landing. “Immediate
landing” implies immediate diversion to a runway; however, in a
severe situation, the flight crew should consider an overweight
landing, a tailwind landing, an off-airport landing, or a ditching.

152
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Smoke, Fire or Fumes If at the gate, refer to the Evacuation checklist. Q 8.10
If not at the gate, unless the smoke, fire or fumes is associated T 8.12
with an annunciated checklist (e.g. Cargo Fire), always start
with the Smoke, Fire or Fumes checklist. Complete the Smoke T 8.13
or Fumes Removal checklist only when directed by the Smoke,
Fire or Fumes checklist or if the smoke or fumes become the
greatest threat.
Smoke, Fire or Fumes The flight crew should don the oxygen mask anytime smoke, fire Q 8.10
or fumes are detected in the flight deck.
Smoke, Fume or Odor Events A flight crewmember will supplement logbook write-ups by F 2.3.15
completing one fleet-specific Smoke and Fume Survey per crew.
The survey may be completed in flight using the EFB. A flight
attendant will also complete a Smoke and Fume Survey on their
SkyPro as soon as possible.
Smoking Federal Aviation Regulations prohibit smoking at any time on F 11.3.4.1
board an aircraft. Smoking in lavatories, and tampering with,
disabling, or destroying a smoke detector in an aircraft lavatory
is prohibited. F 11.3.4.2
Customers and crew are prohibited from using e-cigarettes and
vapor cigarettes on board and also prohibited from charging the
devices or their batteries on board the aircraft.
Use of smokeless tobacco (e.g. chewing tobacco) by customers
and crew members is prohibited.
Smoking If a customer smokes in the lavatory, or tampers with or disables F 11.3.4.3
the smoke detector, it will be assumed the customer is aware of
the no smoking policy and intends to conceal their action.
Delta will pursue civil penalty action by the FAA for all cases of
smoking in the lavatory, or tampering with or disabling the
smoke detector.
If a customer does not comply with the no smoking policy:
• request that Company personnel and law enforcement meet
the aircraft in order to obtain positive identification. If law
enforcement is summoned, it does not imply that the
customer will be placed under arrest.
• obtain positive identification of the customer, to include
name, address, and DOB. Seat assignment and a physical
description are also helpful. This enables Corporate Security
and the FAA to take appropriate legal action.
• refer to Customer Misconduct/Removal for additional
guidance
Special Structural Inspection A special aircraft structural inspection is required when an aircraft F 2.3.16
is subjected to unusual stress, strain, or buffeting, or the
manufacturer's operating limitations are exceeded. The complete
list of events that require a special inspection is in the FOM and
includes overspeeds, hard landings, overweight landings, bird
strikes, lightning strikes and high-energy stops. Contact the
dispatcher and make a logbook entry.
Special VFR Special VFR, including Local Conditions, is not authorized. A 4.7.4

153
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Speed Changes Flights utilizing ECON or CI must inform ATC when the Mach A 3.11.1.2
number varies or is expected to vary by a value equal to or
greater than 0.02 Mach from the Mach number at FIR entry or
any subsequent speed change reported to, requested from, or
assigned by ATC.
Speed Intervention The FMC does not use the speed set on the MCP for fuel or ETA II
predictions so FMC predictions are not accurate if speed
intervention is used for an extended period of time (e.g. during
cruise).
Speed Intervention Speed Intervention may cause a loss of VNAV PATH during V 5.4.1.7
descent, resulting in a violation of a crossing restriction altitude.
Speed Mode In some cases, selecting SPD mode will result in the Vertical V 5.4.2
Speed window opening and a possible climb or descent away
from the selected altitude. Use caution!
Speed on Pitch Modes The following four modes are Speed on Pitch modes: GS
• Takeoff
• Flight Level Change
• VNAV SPEED
• Go-Around
In these four modes, pitch controls airspeed and the throttles
control pitch, which is different from how we normally think
about flying. In these modes, the autothrottles will not correct
for fast or slow airspeeds if the pilot does not follow the flight
director pitch bar. For example, if you fly above the pitch bar
while climbing in Flight Level Change, the airspeed will get
slow and the autothrottles will not increase power to speed up
and you could eventually stall. If you fly below the pitch bar, the
autothrottles will not reduce power and you could overspeed
flaps or even the airplane. Takeoff and VNAV SPEED are
similar.
Go-Around mode is a little different because the autothrottles are
programed to provide at least a 2,000 fpm climb. If you fly
below the pitch bar on a go-around or attempt to level off at any
altitude prior to altitude capture, the autothrottles will sense less
than a 2,000 fpm climb and increase power to obtain it. Airspeed
will increase very rapidly which can easily lead to an overspeed.
Speed Reduction In level flight at average gross weights, the airplane can slow T 4.3.12
approximately 10 knots per nautical mile of distance traveled.
For example, it takes approximately 5 nm to lose 50 knots.
Speedbrakes reduces that distance by about 30%.
Speedbrakes The speedbrake may be used with gear and flaps extended if GS
necessary to slow the airplane, but it must be stowed by 1,000
AFE in order to comply with Stabilized Approach requirements.
Speedbrakes Unless speedbrakes are raised after touchdown, braking T 6.7.1
effectiveness may be reduced initially as much as 60% since
very little weight is on the wheels and brake application may
cause rapid anti-skid modulation.

154
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Speedbrakes When Auto speedbrakes are used for landing, speedbrake T 6.7.1
deployment will occur while the nosewheel is lowered to the
runway with little adverse pitch effects. (Not true for manual
speedbrake deployment.) Speedbrake deployment is initiated
immediately after main landing gear tilt sensors transition to
ground mode and the thrust levers are near idle. On the 757,
deployment of four outboard spoiler panels is delayed
momentarily to reduce nose pitch up.
Speedbrakes If higher than idle thrust is maintained through initial touchdown T 6.6.5
on landing, automatic speedbrake deployment may be disabled
even when the speedbrakes are armed.
This can result in a bounced landing.
Speedbrakes The PF should keep his hand on the speedbrake lever when the T 4.3.13
speedbrakes are used inflight.
Speedbrakes To avoid buffeting, use of speedbrakes with flaps greater than T 4.3.13
Flaps 5 should be avoided. If circumstances dictate the use of
speedbrakes with flaps extended, high sink rates during the
approach should be avoided. Speedbrakes should be retracted
before reaching 1,000 feet AGL.
Speedbrakes Use caution when retracting the speedbrakes close to Vmo/Mmo T 4.3.13
or a flap limit speed. The airplane will accelerate during
retraction and may overspeed the airframe or flaps. Retract the
speedbrakes very slowly or, preferably, slow down first and then
retract them.
Additionally, use caution when retracting the speedbrakes close to
Vmo/Mmo during altitude capture. Reduce speed prior to
altitude capture or wait until after altitude capture to reduce
speed and then stow the speedbrakes.
Speedbrakes Arming the speedbrake prior to landing is required by the V 3.4.18
checklist unless directed otherwise by an abnormal procedure.
Speedbrakes On blended winglet airplanes, speedbrakes will autostow to the Q 2.02
50% flight detent if airspeed exceeds 330 knots (757) or 320
knots (767). Do not override the autostow function unless
airspeed is less than 325 knots (757) or 315 knots (767).
Speedbrakes Do not deploy speedbrakes manually until the nosewheel is on the Q 9.04
ground. Deploying speedbrakes manually before nosewheel
touchdown may cause a pronounced nose pitch up, increasing
the likelihood of a tail strike.
Spring-Loaded Latch A bronze-colored spring-loaded safety latch is required for galley GS
carts in the aft galley that could roll down the aisle if not
restrained.
Stalled Condition An aircraft stall is characterized by one or more of the following T 7.7.10
conditions:
• stall warning
• buffeting, which could be heavy
• lack of pitch authority
• lack of roll control
• inability to arrest descent rate
Complete the All-Attitude Upset Recovery Strategy.

155
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Standby Power Consider that a normal descent from cruise altitude takes about 25 GS
minutes and most aircraft batteries will only last about 30
minutes (90 minutes on some 757s) after an electrical failure. If
you can't start the APU after the generators trip off, an
expeditious descent and divert might be wise.
Standby Power If the airplane is on Standby power, all the CRT screens will be GS
blank. (“Nobody can watch TV.”)
If any ADI or HSI is powered (“If anybody can watch TV”), the
airplane is not on Standby power.
Standby Power Flight beyond 30 minutes on Standby Power (battery power) will Q 6.06
result in complete loss of electrical power.
On the 767, complete loss of electrical power will result in the
inability to extend the landing gear and flaps.
All 767s, all 757-300s and some 757-200s have an HDG installed Differences
to prevent operating on Standby Power.
Standby Power Check Required prior to the first flight of the day. V 5.6.5
The aircraft must be on the ground with all busses powered.
• Standby Power Selector – BAT
• Observe the battery DISCH light (APU BAT DISCH and
MAIN BAT DISCH lights on some aircraft) illuminates and
the standby power OFF light remains extinguished
• Standby Power Selector – AUTO
Sterile Flight Deck Sterile flight deck is in effect anytime the aircraft is below 10,000 F 10.3.2
feet AFE to include pushback, taxi, takeoff and landing. When
sterile flight deck is in effect, pilots will conduct only activities
related to the safe operation of the aircraft.
Examples of activities not permitted during critical phases of
flight are eating meals, nonessential PAs, and nonessential
communication between pilots and/or flight attendants.
Stop Bar At no time will a pilot cross an illuminated red stop bar. A 4.2.10.3
Tactical Cost Index (TCI) Pilots should attempt to land as early in the 10-minute Target F 4.2.9.2
Landing Window as possible.
A speed-up Tactical Cost Index (TCI) will only be used if the F 4.2.9.3
flight is less than 60 minutes late.
Notify Flight Control if TCI use changes ETA by more than 15
minutes. On flights over six hours, notify Flight Control if the
derived Cost Index is different than the flight planned value.
Tail Strike Tips to avoid tail strikes: GS
• use Flaps 25 for landing. On the 767, Flaps 25 requires a
lower pitch attitude at touchdown.
• reduce thrust slower on GE engines. GE engines spool down
faster, so reduce thrust slower.
• lower the nosewheel to the runway. On the 767, the nose
tends to pitch up after touchdown, so be ready to counteract
and fly the nosewheel to the runway.
• do not manually deploy the speedbrakes until after the
nosewheel is on the ground. Manually extending
speedbrakes may cause a pronounced nose-up pitch so wait
until the nosewheel is on the runway.

156
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Tail Strike The most common cause of a tail strike is an unstabilized T 6.5.1
approach.
The second most common cause is an extended flare.
Trimming in the flare may contribute to a tail strike.
Mishandling crosswinds increases the chances of a tail strike.
Go-Arounds initiated very late in the approach, such as during the
landing flare or after touching down, are a common cause of tail
strikes.
Tail Strike Continued pressurization of the airplane can cause further Q 0.34
structural damage.
Tail Strike A tail strike can be identified by the flight crew or cabin crew. T 3.9
Any one of the following conditions can be an indication of a tail
strike during rotation or flare:
• a noticeable bump or jolt
• a scraping noise from the tail of the airplane
• the TAILSKID light or TAIL STRIKE EICAS message may
be displayed
Anytime fuselage contact is suspected or confirmed, accomplish
the appropriate QRH checklist without delay.
On the 767 and the 757-300, the TAIL SKID EICAS message and
the TAILSKID light indicate the tailskid position disagrees with
the landing gear position. Although these alerts may help
determine if a suspected tail strike has occurred, these alerts are
not intended as the only verification of an actual tail strike.
The TAIL STRIKE EICAS message on the 757-300 provides an
additional indication of a tail strike.
Tail Strike To avoid the risk of a tail strike, do not allow the pitch attitude to T 6.7
increase after touchdown. However, applying excessive nose
down elevator during landing can result in substantial forward
fuselage damage.
Takeoff The only way to break Throttle Hold and engage the autothrottles GS
after takeoff is to push a button on the TMSP. We normally press
the Climb Power button at 1,000' AFE or at 1,500' AFE on an
NADP 1.
Takeoff A rolling takeoff while setting takeoff thrust is recommended T 3.1.2.1
(unless a static or standing takeoff is required) because it
expedites takeoff and reduces the risk of foreign object damage
or engine surge or stall due to a tailwind or crosswind. The
change in takeoff roll due to a rolling takeoff is negligible
compared to a standing takeoff.
Takeoff Normally fly the Distant/ICAO NADP 2 takeoff profile. (This is A 4.2.2.1
our normal takeoff.)
Fly the Close-In/ICAO NADP 1 takeoff profile when directed by
a Flight Plan Remark, Company Page or departure procedure.
Do not turn below 400 feet AFE unless specified in the published
departure procedure, Company Page or specifically cleared by
ATC.
Some engine-out procedures require a turn at a specified distance
and may therefore require a turn below 400 feet AFE.

157
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Takeoff The PF may elect to display the CLB page for takeoff. However, T 3.1.1
to reduce heads down activity, climb constraint modification
immediately after takeoff should normally be accomplished on
the MCP. Modify the CLB page when workload permits.
The PM normally displays the LEGS page during takeoff and
departure to allow timely route modification if necessary.
Takeoff Obstacle clearance, noise abatement, or departure procedures may T 3.10.1
require an immediate turn after takeoff. If required, initiate the
turn at the appropriate altitude (normally at least 400 feet AGL)
and maintain V2 + 15 to V2 + 25 knots with takeoff flaps.
A maximum bank angle of 30° is permitted at V2 + 15 with
takeoff flaps.
Takeoff When an immediate turn after takeoff is necessary, the desired T 3.10.1
heading may be preset on the MCP before takeoff.
Presetting the heading for a turn of more than 180° and then
selecting Heading Select, will cause the autoflight system to
command a turn in the shortest direction, which may be contrary
to the ATC clearance.
Takeoff Rolling Takeoff: maintain normal taxi speed while entering the T 3.1.2
runway. When the airplane is aligned with the centerline, release
the nosewheel tiller and apply thrust. There is no need to stop.
Static Takeoff: stop the airplane aligned with the centerline,
release the nosewheel tiller, release brakes and apply thrust.
There is no need to hold the brakes while applying thrust. This
satisfies the requirement for a static takeoff during low visibility.
Standing Takeoff: align the airplane with the centerline, release
the nosewheel tiller and hold the brakes while advancing power
to at least 60% N1. When the engines are stabilized, release
brakes and promptly advance thrust levers to takeoff thrust. A
standing takeoff is required with engine anti-ice is on and the
OAT is 3°C or below.
Takeoff A static takeoff is required whenever the visibility is below RVR A 4.3.2.2
1600. The Captain must make this takeoff. (RVR 1600 is the
lowest allowable First Officer takeoff.)
Takeoff Begin the takeoff roll with the control wheel approximately T 3.2.2
centered. Throughout the takeoff roll, gradually increase control
wheel displacement into the wind only enough to maintain
approximately wings level.
Excessive control wheel displacement during rotation and liftoff
increases spoiler deployment. As spoiler deployment increases,
drag increases and lift is reduced which results in reduced tail
clearance, a longer takeoff roll, and slower aircraft acceleration.
Takeoff During takeoff in headwinds of 20 knots or greater, Throttle Hold T 3.1.2.4
may be reached before the autothrottles can make final thrust
adjustments. In that case, set required takeoff power manually.
Takeoff For takeoff in gusty winds or strong crosswinds, consider the use T 3.2.4
of a higher thrust setting than the minimum required.
When the prevailing wind is at or near 90° to the runway, the
possibility of a wind shift to a tailwind during rotation or liftoff
increases. During this condition, consider using a thrust setting
close to or at maximum takeoff thrust.

158
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Takeoff If you have been holding in position on the runway for more than T 2.4.1.4
90 seconds, or upon seeing a potential conflict, contact the
tower.
When assigned a departure at an intersection, state the intersection
departure during the clearance and read back.
Takeoff Maximum takeoff weight is either Ramp Weight or Takeoff APB 19.9.4
Weight.
When maximum takeoff weight is based on Ramp Weight:
• Ramp Weight is less than Climb and RATOW limits
• the actual takeoff weight must be less than or equal to ramp
weight and
• the actual wind for takeoff must not be worse than the Wind
column
When maximum takeoff weight is based on Takeoff Weight:
• Ramp Weight is greater than either Climb or RATOW limits
• "Taxi Fuel Burn Required" will be printed
• the actual takeoff weight must be less than or equal to
Takeoff Weight and
• the actual wind for takeoff must not be worse than the Wind
column
Takeoff Use of Company climb performance data on a Normal Takeoff T 3.10.6
Profile (Distant/ICAO NADP 2) ensures compliance with Class
C and D airspace speed restrictions.
Takeoff A standing takeoff is required whenever engine anti-ice is on and V 5.16.2.7
the OAT is 3°C or below.
Takeoff After takeoff thrust is set, the Captain’s hand must remain on the V 3.4.13
thrust levers until V1.
Takeoff When a Special Takeoff (Close-In/ICAO NADP 1) noise V 5.11.18
abatement takeoff is planned, ensure “3000” is entered on the
ACCEL HT line on Takeoff page 2 in the FMS.
Takeoff To prevent engine surge, a rolling takeoff is strongly advised when T 3.2
crosswinds exceed 20 knots or tailwinds exceed 10 knots.
Takeoff By definition, all V1 speeds result in the accelerate-go distance T 3.7
being equal to the accelerate-stop distance. A balanced field
condition occurs when the accelerate-go/stop distance equals the
length of the available runway.
Takeoff (757) On a Flaps 5 takeoff, the nose (yoke) will feel heavy. Not true at T 3.1.3
other takeoff flap settings on the 757 or at any takeoff flap
setting on the 767.
Takeoff Configuration During the Takeoff Configuration Test, the only EICAS messages GS
Warning should be for flaps and possibly the parking brake if it is set.
Unnecessary RTOs have occurred because the speedbrake lever
was slightly out of the detent and triggered the warning on
takeoff roll. A proper test would have caught that during
preflight.

159
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Takeoff Configuration The Takeoff Configuration Warning will be activated when V 5.15.8
Warning advancing power and:
• flaps are not in a takeoff position, or
• speedbrakes are not down, or (4 items)
• the stabilizer set greater than the green band, or
• the parking brake is set
Takeoff Minimums Standard takeoff minimums are RVR 5000 (1500 m) or 1 statute A 4.3.1
mile (1600 m).
When RVR reports are available for a particular runway, TDZ
controls and other RVRs are advisory. Mid RVR may be used for
inoperative TDZ RVR.
Takeoff Minimums Only apply takeoff minima as low as published on the airport page A 4.3.2
unless authorized by NOTAM or a flight plan remark.
Takeoff Trim FMS trim data may be used if within 0.2 units of the WDR value. V 3.4.10
Takeoff: Assumed Temperature Do not use assumed temperature thrust reductions when: T 3.3.1
• restricted at particular airports noted in the Company Pages
• unstable weather conditions exist
• AWABS is inoperative
• the runway is contaminated with standing water, slush, snow
or ice
• certain MEL procedures prohibit its use, or
• an assumed temperature thrust setting is not authorized by
the WDR
Takeoff: Assumed Temperature When conducting an assumed temperature takeoff, if more thrust T 3.3.4
is needed (up to maximum thrust) when thrust is in THR HLD
mode, thrust levers must be advanced manually. If conditions
are encountered during the takeoff where additional thrust is
needed, such as a windshear condition, the crew should not
hesitate to manually advance thrust levers to maximum thrust.
Takeoff: Assumed Temperature If the Thrust Management Computer automatically reduces the V 5.7.1.4
assumed temperature to a cooler value, accept the cooler value
but use the V speeds for the entered temperature. For example, if
you enter AT57 but the thrust rolls back to AT53, use AT53
thrust for takeoff and the V speeds for AT57.
Report the actual temperature used in the logbook or via ACARS.
Takeoff: Assumed Temperature TAT probes are aspirated with bleed air from the engines, APU or V 5.16.7
ground external air (huffer air, not conditioned air). During hot
weather operations, the FMS may not accept an assumed
temperature derate if bleed air is not available due to high TAT
probe temperatures. In that case, delay selecting an assumed
temperature derate until after bleed air is applied.
Takeoff: Autopilot Engage any of the three autopilots after takeoff. Regular use of T 3.10.4
Engagement each autopilot/FCC assists in fault detection.
Takeoff: Autopilot If the autopilot is desired after takeoff, it is normally engaged after T 3.10.4
Engagement a roll mode and VNAV are engaged.
Takeoff: Flaps 1 On the 757-200, Flaps 1 is a Boeing-allowed takeoff flap position, II
but Delta does not use it for takeoff. Therefore, if the flaps are
inadvertently set to Flaps 1 on a 757-200, you will not get a
Takeoff Configuration Warning on takeoff. Use caution!

160
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Takeoff: Flaps 1 Flaps 1 is not an approved takeoff flap setting at Delta but T 3.1.1
757-200 airplanes will not provide a takeoff configuration
warning if Flaps 1 is inadvertently set. Therefore, always
confirm that Flaps 5, 15 or 20 is set by checking the flap
indicator is at or between 12 and 3 o’clock.
Taxi Complex taxi clearances should be written down or entered into T 2.4.1.1
the MCDU scratchpad when received.
An airport diagram should be readily available to each
crewmember during taxi.
Be aware that hold short lines may be located as far as 400 feet
from a runway edge.
Taxi Carbon brake wear is primarily dependent on the total number of T 2.4.5.1
brake applications. One firm brake application causes less wear
than several light applications. Maximum carbon brake life can
be achieved during taxi by using a small number of long,
moderately firm brake applications instead of numerous light
brake applications. T 2.4.5.2
When the airplane is equipped with steel brakes, avoid prolonged
brake application to control taxi speed as this causes high brake
temperatures and increased wear of brakes. Steel brake wear is
directly proportional to the kinetic energy absorbed by the
brakes. Maximum steel brake life can be achieved by using a
large number of small, light brake applications, allowing some
time for brake cooling between applications. Differences
757s may have either carbon or steel brakes. All 767s have carbon
brakes.
Taxi If more than 80% N2 is necessary, ensure the area behind the T 2.4.3
aircraft is clear.
Taxi Differential braking and braking while turning should be avoided T 2.4.5
under normal circumstances.
Taxi Avoid stopping the airplane in a turn because excessive thrust is T 2.4.7
required to start taxiing again.
Taxi Delays When necessary to return to the gate for DOT 3-hour or 4-hour F 4.1.6.1.1
compliance, pilots must use the terminology, “Due to the Tarmac
Rule we need to be expedited to the gate.” Using the term
“tarmac” triggers action on the part of FAA and ensures the
necessary priority is utilized by ground control.
Taxi Delays If all engines are shut down while off the gate, such as during a V 3.2.4
long taxi delay, all procedures and checklists will be performed
again starting with the Pushback checklist.
Taxi Delays Pilots should proactively send estimated takeoff (ETO) updates F 4.1.8
via ACARS when expected takeoff time exceeds planned
departure time plus taxi time by more than 15 minutes.
Pilots must provide an ETO when an ACARS takeoff delay uplink
is received. If additional delays exceed the previous ETO by 15
minutes, another ACARS ETO update is required.
Taxi Light Some 757s do not have a taxi light. Use the nose gear landing V 3.3.8.1
light instead.

161
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Taxi Speed Normal taxi speed is approximately 20 knots, adjusted for T 2.4.5
conditions.
On long, straight taxi routes, speeds up to 30 knots are acceptable,
but use caution with the nosewheel tiller at speeds above 20
knots to avoid over controlling the nosewheel.
Speed should be reduced when approaching a turn. On a dry
surface, use approximately 10 knots for turn angles greater than
those typically used for high-speed runway turnoffs.
Taxiway Contamination Consider starting both engines when anticipating taxi on slippery V 5.16.2.3
or contaminated surfaces.
Taxiway Contamination Avoid taxing in deep snow or slush because steering will be more V 5.16.2.5
difficult. Brakes, gear and flaps may also freeze after takeoff if
contaminated with snow or slush.
Taxi slowly, use small tiller and rudder inputs and apply minimum
thrust smoothly. Differential thrust may be used to help maintain
momentum during turns. At all other times, apply thrust evenly.
Taxiing on slippery taxiways or runways at excessive speed or
with high crosswinds may start a skid.
When operating the engines over significant amounts of standing
deicing or anti-icing fluid, limit thrust to the minimum required.
Excessive ingestion of deicing or anti-icing fluid can cause fluid
to build up on engine compressor blades resulting in compressor
stalls and engine surges.
TCAS Test IRUs must be aligned and in Nav mode for a TCAS test. V 5.15.9
Terminology "May" is used in a permissive sense to state authority or V 3.1.4
permission. Compliance is not mandatory.
"Should" is used to indicate that compliance is expected.
Deviations are permitted only where an operational requirement
exists.
"Will," "Shall" and "Must" are used in an imperative sense to state
the requirement to accomplish the act prescribed. Compliance is
mandatory unless an emergency situation exists where
compliance would not be in the interest of safety.
A “guide” is a document that assists the pilot in conducting a
normal procedure. The use of a guide is not mandatory.
Threat Plots (TPs) TP messages prevail over other sources, such as SIGMETs, Flight F 14.5.1
Weather Viewer (FWV), actual turbulence data, and other
forecast products. TPs may also include volcanic ash
information.

162
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Threat Plots (TPs) Delta Meteorology issues TP messages for all possible weather A 5.2.3
related hazards. There are three types of TP messages.
• Advisory indicates that a hazard exists (or has the potential
to develop) that is below a specified criteria for that hazard.
Avoidance is not required either during preflight by Flight
Control or enroute by crews.
• Alert indicates that a hazard exists (or has the potential to
develop) that has reached a specified criteria and avoidance
or action is recommended
• Avoid indicates that a hazard exists (or has the potential to
develop) that has reached or exceeded a specified criteria
and avoidance or action is required
Audible ACARS chimes are only enabled for “Avoid TPs” and are
inhibited for all others.
Thunderstorms Do not operate through an area of thunderstorms unless A 5.2.13.2.1
separations between individual thunderstorm cells are at least:
• 5 miles if below 10,000 feet
• 10 miles if between 10,000 and 25,000 feet
• 20 miles if at or above 25,000 feet
Avoid flying directly over the top of a thunderstorm cell within A 5.2.13.2.2
5,000 feet of the radar return.
When possible, detour between the cells of a squall line rather
than over them.
Visual observation is the most reliable way to determine storm
height. Airborne radar is usually unable to detect thunderstorm
tops which are made up of water vapor and ice crystals.
Deviate upwind when possible. A 5.2.13.2.3
Turbulence can be expected downwind from the storm 1 nm for
each knot of wind at altitude.
To avoid hail, do not fly under the anvil or in cirrus or cirrostratus
layers downwind of the storm top.
Hail has been encountered as much as 20 miles downwind from
large thunderstorms.
Thunderstorms If thunderstorms are approaching the intended runway of use or A 5.2.13.1
the assigned departure or arrival, the Captain shall assess the
potential for encountering the threats associated with convective
activity. These threats include:
• potential for or reports of shifting and gusting winds
• possible windshear
• heavy rain or hail
• roll clouds from underneath an area or line of thunderstorms
• cloud-to-cloud or cloud-to-ground lightning
• tornado or tornado warning
Thunderstorms If weather radar fails enroute, avoid areas of embedded A 5.2.13
thunderstorms and contact the dispatcher.
Tire Failure Consider continuing to the destination unless there is evidence Q 14.26
that other damage has occurred such as abnormal engine
indications, engine vibration or loss of hydraulic pressure or
quantity.
Continuing to the destination ensures a lighter landing weight and
allows the crew to plan and coordinate the arrival and landing
when workload is low.
Advise ATC of possible tire remnants on the departure runway.

163
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Tire Failure (757) Loss of two aft main gear tires on the 757 may cause the aircraft T 8.10.4
air/ground sensing system to remain in the air mode causing loss
of thrust reversers and the need to manually deploy the
speedbrakes.
TMC Reset Procedures to reset the Thrust Management Computer (TMC) are Q NNOI 1.7
listed in the back of the QRH. It is not required to contact MCC
before executing these procedures, however a logbook entry is
required.
Touchdown Zone The touchdown zone is defined as the first 3,000 feet or T 6.1
approximately 1/3 of the usable runway surface, whichever is
less.
Touchdown Zone Elevation Touchdown Zone Elevation (TDZE) is the highest elevation in the AIM PCG
first 3,000 feet of the landing surface.
Transponder Codes A 4.2.4
Departing VFR 1200
Oceanic 2000 (except in WATRS airspace and Reykjavik OCA)
Unlawful Interference 7500
Radio Failure 7600 (do not squawk 7700 first for simple lost comm)
Emergency 7700
Transponder Source Selector During preflight, set 1 or L if the left or center autopilot will be V 3.4.4
used and set 2 or R if the right autopilot will be used.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting beyond checklist directed actions is rarely helpful T 8.1.1
and has caused further loss of system function or failure. In
some cases, accidents and incidents have resulted. The crew
should consider additional actions beyond the checklist only
when completion of the published checklist steps clearly results
in an unacceptable situation.
Turbulence Altitudes just below the tropopause can be turbulent. GS
Tropopause altitudes are printed on the flight plan in the winds
section.
If the tropopause is rising, you are flying toward a high pressure.
Descend to minimize tropopause turbulence.
If the tropopause is descending, you are flying toward a low
pressure. Climb to get above the tropopause and minimize
turbulence.
Turbulence Wake turbulence vortices descend at 300-600 fpm. GS
With the wind on the nose or tail, expect wake turbulence when
16 miles behind an aircraft 1,000 feet above your altitude.
Turbulence When dealing with turbulence associated with jet stream winds: GS
• consider changing altitude or course if the wind is a
headwind or tailwind
• maintain course if the wind is a crosswind and consider
climbing if the OAT is rising and descending if the OAT is
decreasing
Turbulence Severe or greater turbulence should be avoided if at all possible F 5.2.7.4.3
and any encounter with severe or greater turbulence requires a
logbook write up and a maintenance inspection.

164
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Turbulence Some Delta aircraft automatically report turbulence but PIREPs A 5.1.4
continue to be important and flight crews should use the
ACARS “Turbulence” page to provide turbulence or other
weather information when encountered. At a minimum,
turbulence reports should be transmitted at every DAL POSN
RPT waypoint. Reports of smooth air are important, especially
when transiting a TP forecast area or an area where turbulence
has been reported at other altitudes.
Turbulence WPR downlinks do not report turbulence. Flight crews should V 5.5.4.4
report any significant turbulence to Flight Control via the
ACARS Turbulence Report Page. These reports will supplement
the TP system and provide better turbulence avoidance
information.
Turbulence Unforecast turbulence should be reported to flight control. A 6.4.2.8.6
Turbulence The autopilot may remain engaged during light to moderate V 5.16.12
turbulence unless airspeed, altitude or attitude deviations require
manual control.
Normally fly the turbulent air penetration speed (290 kts/.78 M,
whichever is less), but below 10,000 feet MSL a speed of
240250 knots provides adequate buffet margin.
Severe turbulence should be avoided if at all possible, but if it
cannot be avoided, descending approximately 4,000 feet below
optimum altitude will increase buffet margin.
Autothrottles should be off in severe turbulence.
Place the Engine Start Selectors in CONT in severe turbulence.
If an approach must be made in severe turbulence, delay
extending the flaps as long as possible. The airplane can
withstand higher gust loads in the clean configuration.
Diversion to another airport is the best policy if severe turbulence
persists in the area.
Turbulence If turbulence is anticipated on the arrival, consider an early cabin V 3.4.17
chime signal so that flight attendants can be seated.
Turbulence Turbulence at any altitude can momentarily increase the airplane’s T 1.14
angle of attack and activate the stick shaker
Unauthorized Activity Pilots will not read material or engage in activity not directly F 10.3.5
related to aircraft operation while at their duty stations.
Documents contained in AeroDocs may be viewed provided it
does not interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
During cruise on international flights, a jumpseater may, at the
Captain’s discretion, fully relax and read material unrelated to
flight provided this activity does not disrupt the working pilots.
Upset Parameters An upset can generally be defined as unintentionally exceeding T 7.7.1
the following conditions:
• pitch attitude greater than 25° nose up, or
• pitch attitude greater than 10° nose down, or
• bank angle greater than 45°, or
• within above parameters but flying at airspeeds inappropriate
for the conditions
Complete the All-Attitude Upset Recovery Strategy.
Valve Lights All Valve lights on the flight deck indicate a disagreement GS
between the valve position and the commanded position.
165
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 VASI and PAPI T 6.2
Two-Bar VASI Two-bar VASIs should not be used. Red over white is low.
Three-Bar VASI Three-bar VASIs can be used. Red over two whites is on
PAPI glidepath, but may result in landing farther down the runway.
PAPIs can be used. Two white and two red is on glidepath, but T 6.3
may result in landing farther down the runway.
Vertical Speed Approaches Use one of the following methods to determine the descent rate GS
required for a non-precision approach using vertical speed:
• use the table on approach chart, if available
• use ground speed divided by two, times ten (e.g. if
groundspeed is 140 knots, then 140/2 = 70 and 70 x 10 = 700
fpm)
• HAT x airspeed (kts)/distance from FAF (nm) to rwy x 60
Vertical Speed Approaches Initiate descent approximately 0.2 nm prior to the FAF or descent T 5.3.15
point due to autopilot reaction time.
Set an initial vertical speed of approximately -700 to -900 fpm.
Vertical Speed Mode Vertical Speed mode has no automatic low speed (stall) protection V 5.4.1.6
and permits flight away from the selected altitude. Always select
a new level off altitude prior to engaging Vertical Speed mode.
VFR Climb VFR conditions and cloud clearances must be maintained A 4.7.2
throughout the VFR climb.
Pilots are responsible for:
• VFR traffic avoidance
• ensuring terrain and obstacle clearance
• any restriction issued by ATC
• intercepting the route of flight during or after completing the
VFR climb
VFR Pattern Left traffic at 1,500' AFE unless otherwise specified. A 4.7.5.5
Visibility Prevailing Visibility – the greatest horizontal visibility equaled or AIM PCG
exceeded throughout at least half the horizon circle which need
not necessarily be continuous.
Runway Visibility Value (RVV) – the visibility determined for a
particular runway by a transmissometer. The meter provides a
continuous indication of the visibility (reported in miles or
fractions of miles) for the runway.
Runway Visual Range (RVR) – an instrumentally derived value
that represents the horizontal distance a pilot will see down the
runway from the approach end. In contrast to prevailing
visibility and RVV, RVR is based on what a pilot in a moving
aircraft should see looking down the runway.
Visibility: First Officer A CAT I approach, either ILS or non-precision, is the lowest A 4.4.17.1
approach a First Officer may conduct. Captain’s must conduct
all CAT II and CAT III approaches.
RVR 1600 (500 m) or RVV of ¼ sm (400 m) are the lowest
minimums for a First Officer takeoff.
Visibility: Minimum Takeoff: RVR 500 (150 m) with HIRL and CL A 4.1.3.1
Landing: RVR 300 (75m) with CAT III autoland A 4.1.3.3
Visibility: Takeoff If RVR or RVV is reported, it controls for the specified runway. A 4.1.3.1
If RVR or RVV is not reported, use Prevailing Visibility.

166
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Visual Approaches Charted Visual Flight Procedures (CVFP) depict prominent A 4.7.5.2
landmarks, courses, and recommended altitudes to specific
runways.
Pilots must have a charted visual landmark or preceding aircraft in
sight, and weather must be at or above the published minimums
before ATC will issue a CVFP clearance. ATC will clear pilots
for a CVFP if the reported ceiling at the airport of intended
landing is at least 500' above the MVA/MIA, and the visibility is
3 sm or more, unless higher minimums are published. When
accepting a clearance to follow a preceding aircraft, pilots are
responsible for maintaining a safe approach interval and wake
turbulence separation. Pilots must advise ATC if unable at any
point to continue a charted visual approach or if the pilot loses
sight of the preceding aircraft.
Visual Approaches RNAV Visual Flight Procedure (RVFP) are visual approaches that A 4.7.5.3
capitalize on the capabilities of RNAV systems. The differences
from other visual approaches are:
• most RVFPs have published approach procedures and
guidance
• RVFPs are visual approaches that must be requested from ATC
unless previously coordinated
• the RVFP must be retrievable from the FMS by name. Pilots
are not authorized to build these procedures manually
• pilots must report the airport or preceding traffic in sight to
receive clearance for an RVFP
• pilots must fly the published RVFP route and, unless otherwise
cleared by ATC, comply with charted mandatory altitudes and
speeds
• ATC may allow an aircraft to join the procedure at other than
the initial fix. However, ATC may not vector an aircraft to the
initial fix of an RF leg nor to any intermediate location on the
RF leg
• by accepting an RVFP clearance, pilots also accept the
requirements and responsibilities associated with a visual
approach clearance such as visibility minimums and cloud
clearances
Visual Approaches Fly at an altitude of 1,500 feet above the runway elevation and T 5.5.5
enter downwind with Flaps 5 and at Flaps 5 maneuver speed.
Maintain a track parallel to the landing runway approximately 2
nm abeam.

167
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Visual Approaches If there is no underlying approach available, select an approach T 5.5.6
from the FMS that has the runway end (RWXX) as a waypoint
on the procedure. In the absence of an approach to the runway,
select the runway to be used in the FMS. Input the TDZE + 50
feet and airspeed for the RWXX waypoint (e.g., TDZE 1,026
feet + 50 feet = RW09R 140/1,080 feet). Make the runway the
active waypoint and set the intercept course to the inbound
course (runway heading). Use the cross track indication to
establish the desired downwind leg displacement. Use the
VNAV path pointer (football) to reference the vertical path to
the runway. Reference the RWY symbol on the ND (10 mile
scale) for the turn to base leg. Just prior to the RWY symbol
disappearing from the bottom of the ND, begin configuring and
initiate the base turn. Initiate the turn to final just prior to the
Position Trend Vector touching the runway extended centerline
(magenta line).
Visual Approaches When using LNAV and VNAV on Charted Visual Approaches, set V 4.3.11
the Touchdown Zone elevation or the Runway Threshold
elevation rounded up to the next highest 100 feet in the MCP
altitude window.
Visual Approaches (ICAO) When IMC conditions exist, an ICAO visual approach is A 4.7.5.4
equivalent to a US Contact Approach and is not authorized. Be
aware that the ICAO term “visual approach” does not
necessarily mean VMC conditions exist.
When VMC conditions exist, all US visual approach limitations
and restrictions apply.
Visual Approaches (US) A visual approach is an ATC authorization for an aircraft on an A 4.7.5
IFR flight plan to proceed visually to the airport of intended
landing. A visual approach is not an IAP.
Before issuing a visual approach clearance, the controller must
verify that pilots have the airport or a preceding aircraft that they
are to follow in sight. In the event pilots have the airport in sight
but do not see the aircraft they are to follow, ATC may issue the
visual approach clearance but will maintain responsibility for
aircraft and wake turbulence separation. Once pilots report the
aircraft in sight, the flight crew assumes responsibilities for their
own separation and wake turbulence avoidance.
Pilots must maintain VFR cloud separation at all times when
conducting a visual approach. In Class B airspace, flight
visibility must be 3 sm or greater and the aircraft must remain
clear of clouds. In Class C, D, and E airspace, flight visibility
must be 3 sm or greater and the aircraft must be no closer than
500' below, 1000' above, and 2000' horizontally from clouds.
While conducting a visual approach, the pilot is responsible for
providing safe obstacle clearance.
A visual approach is not an IAP and therefore has no missed
approach procedure. If a go-around is necessary, aircraft
operating at controlled airports will be issued instructions from
the controller. At uncontrolled airports, aircraft are expected to
remain clear of clouds and complete a landing as soon as
possible (e.g. fly a VFR pattern normally at 1,500' AFE).

168
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Visual Approaches (US) Flight crews may accept a visual approach provided: A 4.7.5
• the aircraft is within 35 nm of the destination airport
• the flight remains in controlled airspace, or the airspace
underlying those areas is used for transitions and is under the
control of an ATC facility
• reported VFR conditions exist in accordance with FAR
91.155 (1000' ceiling and 3 miles visibility), or as specified
on the charted visual procedure
• the flight maintains VFR cloud separation
• visual contact is established and maintained throughout the
approach with the airport, the traffic to be followed, or a
charted visual flight procedure landmark
Unless otherwise authorized by ATC, a flight operating to or from
a primary airport for which a Class B area is designated must
operate at or above the designated floors of the Class B airspace
while within the lateral limits of the Class B airspace.
VNAV Approaches On some approaches where the runway is not the end of descent T 5.3.30
point, VNAV path guidance transitions to level flight once the
missed approach point is passed. (e.g. SXM)
VNAV Approaches The VNAV PTH mode contains no path deviation alerting. For T 5.3.19.1
this reason, the autopilot should remain engaged until suitable
visual reference has been established.
VNAV Approaches The VNAV path does not assure obstacle clearance below the A 4.4.16.8
MDA in the visual segment of a non-precision approach
procedure.
VNAV Approaches For approaches where both the FAF and the fix prior to the FAF T 5.3.28
are coded with "at or above" altitude constraints, consider
changing the altitude constraint for the fix prior to the FAF to a
hard altitude. This creates a shallower path just prior to the FAF
to allow for slowing and configuring.
VNAV to the FAF When using VNAV prior to the FAF in order to ensure altitude V 4.3.2
constraints prior to the FAF are met, set the MCP altitude to the
FAF altitude for ILS approaches and to the DA/DDA rounded up
to the nearest 100 feet for Non-ILS approaches.
Voice Recorder Test On some airplanes, observe the monitor needle moves to the green V 5.5.1
band. The test will last approximately 5 seconds.
On some airplanes, observe the Status light flashes once.
On all airplanes, a tone may be heard with a headset plugged into
jack on the panel.
Volcanic Ash Aircraft should not operate into or out of airports where there is V 5.16.13
falling ash and/or ash-covered runways/ taxiways.
Procedures for volcanic ash during ground operations are in
Volume 1 if operation is necessary.
Volcanic Ash Volcanic ash clouds cannot always be differentiated from regular A 5.2.19
clouds and, depending on conditions, weather radar may not
return any depiction of a volcanic ash cloud.
A briefing between the Captain and the dispatcher is required A 5.2.19.1.2
whenever volcanic ash information is present on the flight plan.

169
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Volcanic Ash Indications of volcanic ash include: Q 0.39
• a static discharge around the windshield
• a bright glow in the engine inlets
• smoke or dust on the flight deck
• an acrid odor
Exit the area immediately. Consider a 180º turn. Consider a
descending turn.
Refer to the checklist in the QRH.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes V 1.2.8
Warning A Warning is an instruction about a hazard that if ignored could
result in injury, loss of aircraft control, or loss of life.
Caution A Caution is an instruction concerning a hazard that if ignored
could result in damage to equipment.
Note A Note provides amplified information, instruction, or emphasis.
Water and Waste Tanks Potable water tanks should be serviced to 75% or greater for V 3.4.1
domestic operations and to 100% for international operations.
Waste tanks should be at an acceptable level for domestic flights.
For international flights, waste tanks should be empty; however,
it is acceptable for the waste quantity gauge to display up to ⅛
full due to pre-charge.
Weather Briefings Products from Delta Meteorology are to be used as the primary A 5.1.1
source for decisions regarding hazardous weather avoidance for
Delta operations.
Weather Briefings If a Metro Briefing Message can’t be delivered to the flight before A 5.1.2
departure time, a verbal briefing from the dispatcher to the
Captain is acceptable. In these rare occasions, the FARs are met
if the Captain records the weather information provided by the
dispatcher and the dispatcher records the data given the crew in
the flight history record.
Weather Briefings An Updated Weather Briefing is automatically printed when the F 14.5.2
Flight Attendant Departure Report is generated. It includes the
current release number and the most current weather information
subsequent to the Weather Briefing.
The Updated Weather Briefing is required for pushback.
Weather Briefings Each flight will receive a Metro Briefing Message (MBM) as part A 5.1.3
of the initial pre-flight paperwork. The MBM will always
include the minimum required weather information.
A Metro Briefing Update (MBU) is printed for each flight just
prior to departure. This contains any additional or revised
weather observations or TAFs for origin, destination, or alternate
airports. Any new or revised TP messages affecting the route are
also included. If no information is printed on the MBU then no
new information is available since the initial MBM was issued.
Weather Briefings Whether VMC or IMC, pilots will not takeoff from or conduct F 14.5.4
approaches to any airport without a valid weather report.
Dispatch without a destination weather report is permitted
provided a valid weather report can be obtained prior to
commencing the approach. F 14.5.4.1
A valid report must be current and from an approved source.

170
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Weather Radar Expect attenuation anytime weather targets reach Level 3 (red), V 5.11.5.13
when the radome is wet or ice covered, or when operating within
precipitation.
Attenuation may be identified by:
• crescent-shaped returns, concave on the back side
• absence of returns or shadow beyond the target
Use ground returns to confirm radar penetration and locate radar
shadows.
Radar shadows are areas of unknown weather intensity. Never
penetrate a storm that produces a radar shadow.
When convective storms reach Level 3 (red), expect moderate to V 5.11.5.14
severe turbulence in all areas of the storm, including Level 1
(green) and Level 2 (yellow) areas.
Absence of indicated turbulence in TURB mode does not mean it
is safe to penetrate a weather area that by other indications is
hazardous.
Weather Radar and Terrain Whenever the possibility exists for adverse weather and terrain/ GS
Display obstacles near the intended flight path, one pilot should monitor
the weather radar display and the other pilot should monitor the
terrain display.
Weather Radar Status Message To prevent nuisance WXR SYS status messages, turn the weather V 5.11.2
radar on first and off last, and turn the HSI weather display on
last and off first.
Weather Radar Test The IRUs must be aligned and in NAV mode. V 5.11.2
Weather Radar: Conventional At reduced levels of Gain, some weather targets will disappear V 5.11.5.12
from the indicator. Targets which are displayed will understate
the true strength of the weather. Always return Gain to Auto
immediately after using manual Gain.
Weather Radar: MultiScan The Automatic mode is the standard mode of operation for this V 5.11.4.1
radar. The automatic antenna tilt and gain, Ground Clutter
Suppression, Path Attenuation Compensation and Over Flight
protection features are enabled in this mode.
Wind Components Maximum gust velocity and least favorable direction will be used A 4.1.1
to compute the crosswind component.
Steady state wind velocity will be used to compute the headwind
or tailwind component.
Windows Refer to the checklist in the QRH if a side window opens during Q 1.25
takeoff or in flight. It may be necessary to completely open the
window before closing to reset the locking mechanism.
Windows If both forward windows delaminate or forward vision is T 8.16
unsatisfactory, accomplish an ILS autoland, if available.
If the forward windows are damaged, forward visibility can be
maintained by looking out an open side window using care to
stay clear of the airstream although noise levels may interfere
with crew communications.
Windshear It is Delta’s policy to avoid known or probable severe low altitude A 5.2.14
windshear.

171
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Windshear Takeoffs and landings are not permitted unless the runway and A 5.2.14
intended flight path are clear of known or probable severe low
altitude windshear.
Windshear Windshear is a change of wind speed and/or direction over a short T 7.14
distance along the flight path.
Windshear may be indicated by thunderstorm activity, virga,
PIREPS or Low Level Windshear alerts.
If windshear is confirmed, delay takeoff or do not continue an
approach.
Precautions in case of inadvertent encounter include:
• on takeoff, use full power and the longest suitable runway.
Use the flap setting selected by AWABS for the runway in
use. Rotate at the normal rate to the normal all-engine pitch
attitude. Minimize reductions to the normal pitch attitude.
Respect the stick shaker.
• on approach, use either Flaps 25 or Flaps 30 for landing. Use
the most suitable runway and use a glidepath (ILS, VNAV,
PAPI, etc.). Add airspeed up to a maximum of 20 knots if the
autothrottles will be off for landing. Avoid large thrust
reductions or trim changes in response to sudden airspeed
increases as these may be followed by airspeed decreases.
Windshear and Microburst A windshear alert will be generated for an estimated loss of A 5.2.15.2
Alerts airspeed between 15-29 knots or any estimated gain of airspeed.
A microburst alert will be generated for an estimated loss of
airspeed 30 knots or greater.
Windshield Wipers Do not use on a dry windshield. V 5.3.3
Wingspans Wingspans (rounded up) II
• 757-200 with a conventional wing – 125 feet
• 757-200 with winglets – 135 feet
• 757-300 with a conventional wing – 125 feet
• 757-300 with winglets – 135 feet
• 767 with a conventional wing – 157 feet
• 767 with winglets – 167 feet
Worn Tire Notify maintenance if: V 3.4.2
• any tread groove is worn away completely around the tire
• any tire is worn beyond limits, damaged or the tread is
separating
• any layer of cord showing
• a questionable cut exists
• any appearance of improper inflation
• any wheel through-bolt or nut is missing or damaged
WPR If a Direct To modification with Abeam Points is used, WPR V 5.5.4.1
function may be restored for the abeam points with a WPR
Reset only if the abeam points are not more than 65 nm from the
original flight plan waypoints. If in doubt, send a manual
ACARS position report.

172
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 WPR Waypoint Position Reporting (WPR) will automatically send V 5.5.4
position reports at every DAL POSN RPT fix on the flight plan
provided the airplane actually passes over the fix. If the fix is
bypassed with a direct routing, manually send a position report
with the Company Send prompt in the FMS as soon as possible
after passing abeam the fix. Do not send the report early or the
Delta computers won’t update.
WPR Reset A WPR Reset should be accomplished if: V 5.5.4.2
• ACARS reports that a company position report was not
received for more than one DAL POSN RPT waypoint
• the dispatcher advises WPR is not working
• DAL POSN RPT fixes are replaced or changed due to a track
or route change
To accomplish a WPR Reset, enter the phrase WPR RESET in the
text box of the MISC RPT page, enter 0 in the Code box, and
send.
Yaw Damper INOP Lights Yaw Damper INOP lights remain illuminated until the IRUs are V 3.4.4
aligned.

173
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Systems Review

Overhead Panel Lights

the forward equipment bay and/or the electrical equipment (E/E) door is not closed,
ACCESS DOORS latched and locked
AIL LOCK (767) the aileron lockout actuator disagrees with the commanded position
ANTISKID a fault is detected in the antiskid system
AOA a probe is not being heated
AUTO SPDBRK a fault is detected in the automatic speedbrake system
CARGO DOORS a cargo door is not closed, latched and locked
EMER DOORS an emergency door or a wing slide door is not closed, latched and locked
ENTRY DOORS an entry door is not closed, latched and locked
MACH SPD TRIM (757) the Mach/speed trim system is inoperative
PITOT a probe is not being heated
RUDDER RATIO the rudder ratio system is inoperative or not receiving left system hydraulic pressure
SPOILERS one or more spoiler pairs are not in the commanded position
STAB TRIM stabilizer trim rate is ½ the normal control wheel trim rate
TAT the TAT probe is not being heated
UNSCHED STAB TRIM an uncommanded stabilizer motion is detected

174
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Forward Panel Lights
A/P DISC an autopilot was automatically or manually disconnected
A/T DISC the autothrottles have disconnected
ALT ALERT between a 250' and a 750' deviation from the selected altitude
a degraded operating condition exists in the engaged autopilot. An alternate autopilot
AUTO PILOT may be available.
AUTOBRAKES autobrakes are disarmed or inoperative
BRAKE SOURCE both normal and alternate brake system pressures are low
BRAKE TEMP a brake temperature is in the high range (5 or higher)
CABIN ALT cabin altitude has exceeded 10,000 feet
CONFIG a configuration warning exists
ENG OIL PRESS oil pressure is at or below minimum or a switch has malfunctioned
FIRE an engine, APU, wheel well or cargo fire is detected
FMC there is a message in the FMC scratchpad
GND PROX a ground proximity caution exists
OVRSPD the airplane is exceeding Mmo or Vmo
the GPWS barometric or radio altitude descent rate is excessive or a look-ahead
PULL UP terrain warning (if installed) is active
the speedbrakes are extended while airborne with the flaps in a landing position or
SPEED BRAKES when the radio altitude is 800' or below
WHL WELL FIRE a fire is detected in one or both main gear wheel wells
WINDSHEAR a windshear condition is detected

175
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
The sequence of information in the Systems Review follows the general sequence in Volume 2 and may therefore
seem a little disjointed because Volume 2 covers controls and indicators before system descriptions.

Airplane General, Emergency Equipment, Doors and Windows

To avoid inadvertent system actuation, the flight crew should not attempt to replace light bulbs. Contact
maintenance instead.
Fasten Seat Belt selector in Auto – if the selector is in Auto, the Fasten Seat Belt signs will be on when:
• the landing gear is not up and locked, or
• the flap lever is not up, or
• cabin altitude is above 10,000 feet, or
• passenger oxygen is on (not true for some 767s)
The No Smoking selector works differently on different airplanes, but we always leave it in the On position so the
rather complicated description is omitted here.
In general, the No Smoking and Fasten Seat Belt signs automatically illuminate and the Return to Seat signs in the
lavs extinguish any time the passenger oxygen system is activated. There are variations however.
The Light Override switch overrides and illuminates the forward panel flood lights, illuminated indicator lights,
glare shield flood lights, aisle stand lights and dome lights at maximum intensity.
There is one landing light in each wing root and two landing lights on the nose gear on all airplanes. Nose gear
landing lights will not illuminate unless the nose gear is down and locked.
The 757 has two runway turnoff lights on the nose gear that will not illuminate unless the nose gear is down and
locked. The 767 has one runway turnoff light in each wing root that will illuminate with the gear up or down.
Most 757s have either one or two taxi lights on the nose gear and the 767 has two taxi lights on the nose gear. Taxi
lights will not illuminate unless the nose gear is down and locked.
Some 757s do not have a taxi light. Use the nose landing light instead.
Logo lights are installed on some airplanes, but not on others. If installed, leave logo lights on if the airplane is
powered.
If normal electrical power is lost, the magnetic compass light, forward panel flood lights, and integral lights for
essential instruments on the left forward, center forward and overhead panels are automatically switched to the
Standby AC bus.
There are sensors on the center forward instrument panel that will automatically override the Dim position of the
indicator lights switch and illuminate the indicator lights full bright if the light level in the cockpit is high.
The emergency lighting system is powered by remote batteries charged by the airplane’s electrical system. A fully
charged battery provides at least 15 minutes of operation.
Emergency Lights switch:
• Off – prevents the emergency lights system from operating if electric power fails or is turned off
• Armed – all emergency lights illuminate if DC power fails or is turned off
• On – all emergency lights illuminate
Emergency Lights Unarmed light – the Emergency Lights switch is not in the Armed position.
If the Emergency Lights switch in the cockpit is armed and an armed entry door or emergency door is opened, only
the emergency lights on that side of the aircraft will illuminate. The idea is to show the fire department from which
side of the airplane the passengers are evacuating, but flight attendants are trained to turn on all emergency lights
during an evacuation so this really won’t give the fire department any useful information.
The Passenger Cabin Emergency Lights switch on the flight attendant panel bypasses the cockpit emergency lights
switch and turns on all interior and exterior emergency lights.
Passenger oxygen is supplied by individual oxygen generators in the overhead Passenger Service Units (PSUs) and
lasts 12 minutes. Oxygen begins flowing when a mask hanging from the PSU is pulled down, which pulls the pin
on a chemical oxygen generator.
The oxygen generators will get extremely hot while producing oxygen and burn all the dust in the overhead
compartments. It may appear there is a fire in the cabin.
Oxygen masks will automatically drop from the PSUs if cabin altitude exceeds 14,000 feet and can be manually
dropped from the flight deck by pushing the Passenger Oxygen switch.
The Passenger Oxygen On light indicates the signal has been sent to open the PSU doors.
Do not activate the passenger oxygen system during a smoke or fumes situation. It mixes cabin air with oxygen and
therefore does not provide any protection for the passengers. It is also an extreme fire hazard.
An Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) is located in the cockpit on most airplanes and should be taken by the
First Officer after ditching. ELTs are also installed in slide/raft bustles and automatically transmit when submerged
in water. There may be a portable ELT in the cabin on some airplanes as well.
176
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Flight deck windows can be opened from inside for emergency escape, but cannot be opened from outside the
airplane. No rescue from outside.
Flight deck windows can also be opened and closed in flight at speeds below 250 knots (below clean speed
recommended) if the airplane is unpressurized. If the forward windows are damaged, forward visibility is possible
by looking out an open side window.
The flight deck door will unlock when power is removed from the airplane. Decompression panels in the door will
open to equalize pressure in the event of a rapid decompression.
Entry doors have power assist to aid in opening the door and deploying the slide in the event of an emergency.
Escape slides at the entry doors are also configured as life rafts. There may be an additional life raft stored in a
ceiling compartment.
Wing slides are not life rafts and may not be used as flotation devices.
Emergency door slides on 757 ships 68xx are not life rafts, but may be used as auxiliary flotation devices.
Escape slides have manual inflation handles in case the slide does not automatically inflate.
On the 757, the slide rafts are too small to hold a survival kit, so the survival kit is stored in an overhead
compartment near each entry door. Don’t forget it.
If armed, the escape slide automatically disarms if the door is opened from outside the airplane.
Entry Doors – there are six on the 757 and either four or six on the 767. If an entry door is not closed, latched and
locked, the Entry Doors light on the overhead panel will illuminate and EICAS will show which door(s) are open.
Emergency Doors – there are four overwing emergency doors on most 757s, two emergency doors aft of the wing on
some 757s, and either two or four overwing emergency doors on the 767. Emergency doors are armed at all times
and opening an emergency door will automatically deploy the door slide or the wing slide. If an emergency door or
a wing slide door is not closed, latched and locked, the Emer Doors light on the overhead panel will illuminate and
EICAS will give the location. If more than one door is open, a single EICAS message will indicate multiple doors.
Cargo Doors – there are two cargo doors (forward and aft) on the 757 and three cargo doors (forward, aft and bulk)
on the 767. If a cargo door is not closed, latched and locked, the Cargo Doors light on the overhead panel will
illuminate and EICAS will give the location. If more than one door is open, a single EICAS message will indicate
multiple doors.
Forward and aft cargo doors are normally operated electrically (Ground Handling bus), but may be operated
manually if necessary. The bulk cargo door on the 767 is operated manually.
Access Doors – there are two access doors (forward equipment bay and electrical equipment (E/E) compartment) on
all airplanes. If an access door is not closed, latched and locked, the Access Doors light on the overhead panel will
illuminate and EICAS will give the location. If both doors are open, the EICAS message will be Access Doors.
Potable water is stored in a single tank behind the aft cargo compartment. There are two water service panels – one
on the right forward fuselage just behind and below the 1R door and one at the rear of the aircraft on the bottom
centerline under the aft entry doors.
Each lav and each galley has a water shutoff valve and a drain valve for isolation purposes.
Water from galley and lav sinks is drained overboard through two heated drain masts on the bottom of the airplane.
Lavs on some 757s have individual, self-contained waste tanks that are serviced individually from panels on the
outside of the aircraft.
Lavs on 767s and some 757s use a vacuum pump or cabin differential pressure to route lav waste to storage tank(s)
located in the cargo compartment.
On some airplanes, the flight deck speakers are muted when any transmission is made with a boom mike or a hand
mike so at least one pilot must have his headset on to monitor the radios if a boom mike or hand mike is used for
PAs or interphone communication. The speaker does not mute if the handset on the aft pedestal is used or if the
audio panel mike switch is in OXY.

177
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Air Conditioning
Two identical air conditioning packs cool bleed air from the engines, APU or high-pressure air from a ground source
(huffer cart). Bleed air is pre-cooled before entering a pack.
The two packs are controlled by two identical pack controllers and pack output is automatically increased during
high pack demand times (failed opposite pack or failed recirc fan) and inhibited during times of high bleed air
demand (failed engine).
With the pack selector in Off, the pack valve is closed and the Pack Off light is illuminated.
With the pack selector in Auto, pack output temperature is determined by the compartment requiring the coolest air
and then warm trim air is added to the other compartments as determined by their individual zone temperature
controllers to maintain the desired temperature in those compartments.
With the pack selector in the Standby mode (not in Auto), pack output temperature is determined by the position of
the pack selector:
• N (normal) – pack output is a constant, moderate temperature
• C (cool) – pack output is full cold
• W (warm) – pack output is full warm
The Pack Inop light and a PACK TEMP EICAS message will illuminate for all pack control system faults and
overheats. If the problem was an automatic control system fault or a pack outlet temperature overheat, the pack
will continue operating in an uncontrolled, degraded mode and flight crew action is necessary. If the problem was
an internal pack overheat, the pack valve will close and the Pack Inop light will be accompanied by a Pack Off
light and a PACK OFF EICAS message. This is the classic pack trip and the pack may be reset with the pack reset
switch after it has cooled to a temperature below the overheat level.
• Pack Inop light only – controller fault or outlet overheat
• Pack Inop and Pack Off lights – pack trip caused by an internal overheat
Air from the packs flows to a mix manifold where it is mixed with returning air from the recirc fans and distributed
to the cabin, however the flight deck receives 100% fresh air from the left pack at a slightly higher pressure to
keep smoke and fumes out of the flight deck. If the left pack is inop, the flight deck receives air from the mix
manifold.
The terms “compartment” and “zone” are used interchangeably in the Boeing manuals for the temperature control
compartments.
The 757-200 is divided into three compartments (flight deck, forward cabin, aft cabin) and the 757-300 and 767 are
divided into four compartments (flight deck, forward cabin, mid cabin, aft cabin). Each compartment has a
temperature controller to control the temperature in that compartment by adding warm trim air to the pack output
air if necessary. The 757 temperature controllers have Auto and Off positions for all compartments and the 767
temperature controllers have Auto and Manual positions for the flight deck compartment and Auto and Off
positions for the other zones. The manual position allows manual control of the flight deck trim air valve, if
necessary, and there is a trim air valve position indicator next to the control.
Compartment Temperature Controls:
• Auto – automatic temperature control selectable between 65ºF and 85ºF (18ºC and 30ºC)
• Off – compartment trim air valve is closed (all compartments except 767 flight deck)
• Man – compartment trim air valve is controlled manually (767 flight deck compartment only)
The Compartment Temperature Inop light will illuminate to indicate:
• a fault in zone temperature controller
• the zone temperature controller switch is off (except a flight deck controller on the 767)
• the trim air switch is off (all compartment Inop lights will be on in this case)
If the trim air switch is off, the cabin temperature controller attempts to maintain all compartments at an average
temperature.
Recirc fans allow the packs to be operated at a reduced flow by returning cabin air to the mix manifold. On the 757,
the left recirc fan exhausts air from the forward E/E system and should not be turned off because that will cause
the overboard exhaust valve to latch open requiring maintenance action to reset. Other recirc fans may be turned
off to provide a more rapid exchange of air in the cabin.
The gasper system (if installed) draws air from the forward cabin overhead air conditioning ducts and discharges it
from the gasper outlets in the passenger service units.
Shoulder heaters electrically warm the air in the cockpit side window diffusers. The High setting is only available in
flight, but the Low setting is available in flight or on the ground.
Foot heaters electrically warm the cockpit floorboards (no air flow) and are only available in flight.

178
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Equipment Cooling - 757
On the 757, the equipment cooling system supplies cooling air to the forward equipment racks and flight deck
avionics. The system has a supply fan (actually two fans; normal and alternate) that draws air from the cabin and
forces it through the equipment racks and avionics and then the left recirc fan returns the air to the air conditioning
mix manifold. If differential pressure is low (e.g. on the ground), the overboard exhaust valve automatically opens
and most of the air is exhausted overboard. As previously mentioned, the left recirc fan should not be turned off
because the overboard exhaust valve will latch open and requires maintenance action to reset.
The Overheat light indicates insufficient airflow for equipment cooling due to a failure of the supply fan or the
overboard exhaust valve is not open with the left recirc fan off or failed. The Overheat light is accompanied by the
EQUIPMENT OVERHEAT EICAS message and a ground crew call horn if the airplane is on the ground. If the
Overheat light remains illuminated, avionics not on the Standby busses (e.g. EFIS flight instruments) are subject to
imminent failure. Avionics on the Standby busses (e.g. standby flight instruments) are reliable for 90 minutes. On
some airplanes, an auxiliary fan operates automatically to cool essential avionics if both supply fans are inop.
The Alternate position of the Equipment Cooling switch turns on the alternate supply fan or opens the overboard
exhaust valve as necessary.
The Smoke light indicates smoke is detected in the equipment cooling ducts and the system automatically attempts
to remove it by turning the recirc fans off, switching one or both packs to high flow, and latching the overboard
exhaust valve open. Smoke removal is completely automatic, however the source of the smoke should be
investigated.

Equipment Cooling - 767

Just like the 757, the equipment cooling system supplies cooling air to the forward equipment racks and flight deck
avionics on the 767.
System operation is automatic with the Equipment Cooling selector in Auto. On the ground, the system considers
engine and pack operation, skin temperature and outside air temperature to determine the correct system
configuration and a supply fan and an exhaust fan either recirculate cooling air or port it overboard as necessary. In
flight, only the exhaust fan operates and cooling air is recirculated.
Equipment Cooling Selector (Schoolhouse answer):
• Auto – positions the cooling system for “automatic operation” and provides “best cooling for the conditions”
• Standby – positions the cooling system for “inboard air flow” and provides “maximum cooling”
• Override – positions the cooling system for “reverse air flow” and provides “differential pressure cooling”
The No Cooling light indicates no reverse airflow through the E/E compartment avionics after selecting Override.
The light is only active in Override. If the No Cooling light remains illuminated, avionics not on the Standby
busses (e.g. EFIS flight instruments) are subject to imminent failure. Avionics on the Standby busses (e.g. standby
flight instruments) are reliable for 90 minutes.
A Valve light indicates equipment cooling valves are not in their commanded position.
The Overheat light indicates high temperature or low airflow is detected in the equipment cooling system.
The Smoke light indicates smoke is detected in the forward equipment cooling ducts.
In general, for Equipment Cooling non-normals on the 767, “point the switch at the light.”
• for Valve or Overheat lights – go to Standby
• for the Smoke light – go to Override

Cargo Heat
Cargo heat on the 757 is completely automatic.
On the 767, bleed air is used to heat the forward, aft and bulk cargo compartments. With the Cargo Heat switches
on, bleed air is ducted to each compartment through a shutoff valve and a heat control valve. The heat control
valve modulates to maintain the temperature in the compartment within a “standard control range,” the lower limit
of which is above approximately 45ºF. (The actual range is not specified.) If the temperature exceeds the standard
control range, as would happen if the heat control valve failed open, the Overheat light illuminates. If the
temperature continues to rise and exceeds approximately 90ºF, the shutoff valve closes and bleed air is removed.
When the temperature decreases back into the standard control range, the Overheat light extinguishes, the shutoff
valve reopens and bleed air is reapplied. Cargo compartment temperature will then cycle between the standard
control range and 90ºF.

179
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
The Bulk Cargo Heat selector on the P-61 panel reprograms the Heat Control valve for the bulk cargo compartment
to maintain above approximately 65ºF (instead of 45ºF) and turns on a vent fan to allow carrying animals. It
should be left in the Vent position at all times.

Pressurization
Pressurization is controlled by adjusting the discharge of cabin air through the outflow valve.
Positive and negative pressure relief doors protect the fuselage against excessive differential pressure.
The index mark on the Cabin Altitude Auto Rate control programs approximately a 500 fpm climb and a 300 fpm
descent.
If the selected automatic mode of the cabin altitude mode selector (Auto 1 or Auto 2) fails, control is automatically
switched to the other auto controller.
If both auto controllers fail or if the mode selector is placed to Manual, the Auto Inop light illuminates and the
CABIN AUTO INOP EICAS message is displayed. In Manual, the outflow valve is powered by the Standby DC
bus and is controlled manually by the switch on the pressurization panel.
The system automatically applies a small positive pressure to the cabin before takeoff and the outflow valve
automatically opens at touchdown to depressurize the airplane. During flight, the system uses the higher of either
the landing altitude or the scheduled cruise altitude as the programmed cruise altitude for the cabin.
If the cabin altitude exceeds 10,000 feet, the Cabin Altitude lights illuminate, the warning siren sounds and the
CABIN ALTITUDE EICAS message is displayed. The lights extinguish and the message blanks when the cabin
descends below 8,500 feet.
In Auto mode (and in Manual mode on some airplanes), if the cabin altitude exceeds 11,000 feet, the outflow valve
closes automatically.
If the cabin altitude exceeds 14,000 feet the passenger oxygen masks will drop.

Bleed Air Systems

Bleed air can be supplied by the engines, the APU or a ground air source and is used for:
• air conditioning
• pressurization
• engine start
• wing and engine anti-ice
• hydraulic reservoir pressurization
• cargo heat
• Air-driven Demand Pump (767 only)
• thrust reversers (some 767s only)
Engine bleed air comes from either the low-pressure or high-pressure engine compressor section. Low-pressure air
is used during high power settings and high-pressure air is used during descent and other low power settings.
Engine bleed air valves are armed when the switch is on, but are pressure actuated and remain closed until engine
bleed air pressure is sufficient to open them. They may close by themselves during times of low bleed air demand
such as during a Packs Off takeoff. The Off light illuminates and the ENG BLEED OFF EICAS message displays
when the bleed valve is closed either manually, due to a system fault, or due to low airflow.
Bleed, Overheat and Hi Stage lights mean different things on different airplanes. The Delta Schoolhouse answer is
that all are considered “bleed air malfunctions.”
APU bleed air is available up to approximately 17,000 feet.
A check valve in the APU supply line prevents reverse flow of bleed air into the APU.
The APU Valve light illuminates when the APU bleed valve disagrees with the commanded position.
Two ground pneumatic carts (huffer carts) or one “super huffer” with two hoses is required for engine start if the
APU is inop.
On the 757, one ground pneumatic connector connects to the left bleed duct and one connects to the right bleed duct.
On the 767, both ground pneumatic connectors connect to the left bleed duct.
Isolation valves, except for the center isolation valve on the 767, are normally closed except during engine start and
during single-bleed operation. The center isolation valve on the 767 is normally open to supply the ADP. An
isolation Valve light illuminates when the valve position disagrees with the commanded position.
The Duct Leak light illuminates when a high-temperature bleed air leak is detected. On the 757, the left duct leak
detector also watches most of the crossover duct and the APU duct. On the 767, the left duct leak detector watches
most of the crossover duct and the center duct leak detector watches the APU duct.
180
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
On the 767, flight longer than 6 hours with a Bleed Duct Leak or Body Duct Leak light illuminated may result in
structural damage.

Anti-Ice and Rain

Engine anti-ice systems provide bleed air to the engine cowl inlets and may be operated in flight or on the ground.
“TAI” will appear near the N1 gauge on EICAS when the engine anti-ice valve is open.
Do not attempt to anti-ice an engine or engines with APU bleed air. Always use bleed air from the respective engine
instead. APU bleed air will turn on the TAI indication and everything will look normal, but there isn’t enough air
to actually anti-ice the engine and ice may form and cause serious damage.
Wing anti-ice systems provide bleed air to the three mid-wing leading edge slats on the 757 and the three outboard
leading edge slats on the 767. Wing anti-ice is inhibited on the ground and only operates in flight.
The Valve light for both wing and engine anti-ice systems will illuminate when the valve position disagrees with the
commanded position.
The Icing light (if installed) on manual anti-ice systems illuminates when icing is detected by a single sensor on the
nose of the aircraft. It is advisory only and flight crew action is required to activate or deactivate anti-ice systems.
Some (but not all) 767s have an automatic anti-icing system. Two icing detectors are installed on the nose of the
aircraft and signal the wing and engine anti-ice valves to open or close as needed. The automatic system only
works in flight. It is inhibited on the ground and engine anti-ice must be manually selected on or off during ground
ops as necessary. Wing anti-ice is inhibited on the ground on all airplanes, including the 767.
On the automatic system, the Icing light will illuminate only when icing is detected and a wing and/or engine anti-
ice valve is not open either because the switch is Off (not in Auto) or the valve has failed closed. (It’s indicating
that icing is detected and anti-icing is not on.) The Ice Det light will illuminate if both ice detector systems have
failed.
On all airplanes, the supply to wing anti-ice is downstream of the engine bleed valve. You can’t anti-ice a wing from
its engine with the bleed valve closed, but you can anti-ice a wing from the opposite engine if the bleed valve is
failed closed or if its engine is shut down.
On the 757, the supply to engine anti-ice is downstream of the engine bleed valve. You can’t anti-ice an engine from
itself with the bleed valve closed, but you can anti-ice that engine from the opposite engine if the bleed valve is
failed closed or if the engine is shut down.
On the 767, the supply to engine anti-ice is upstream of the engine bleed valve. You can anti-ice an engine from
itself with the bleed valve closed provided the engine is operating, but you can’t anti-ice that engine from the
opposite engine.
All flight deck windows are electrically heated. The forward windows have anti-icing and anti-fogging protection
and the side windows have anti-fogging protection only. The forward windows also have supplemental anti-
fogging protection provided by conditioned air. The Window Heat Inop light illuminates when a window is not
being heated.
Rain repellent is deactivated on all airplanes.
The probe heat system is fully automatic. Power is supplied to electrically heat all probes anytime an engine is
running. An individual probe heat light will illuminate when that probe is not being heated.

Automatic Flight
On the ground with no autopilot engaged and both flight director (F/D) switches off, the first F/D switch turned on
arms the flight director in the takeoff pitch and roll modes (wings level, 8º nose up). The second F/D switch turned
on displays the steering bars on the second ADI.
If the F/D switches are turned on in flight with the autopilot off, the flight director engages in V/S and HDG HOLD.
If the autopilot is on, the flight director engages in the current autopilot mode.
The flight director bars will automatically display, even if the F/D switches are off, if the G/A switch is pressed and
the flaps are not up and the airspeed is above 80 knots.
The autopilot engages in the current F/D mode except for TO and G/A. If the flight directors are off, the autopilot
engages in V/S and HDG HOLD or in V/S and ATTITUDE mode on some 757s if bank angle is less than 5°.
If the airplane attitude at Control Wheel Steering (CWS) engagement (if installed) exceeds autopilot limits (limits
vary by airplane, but are rather excessive), the autopilot returns the airplane to within autopilot limits. If the
control wheel is released with less than 3º of bank under normal conditions, or less than 1º of bank after localizer
capture, the autopilot rolls wings level and holds heading.

181
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
There are five autothrottle modes – N1/EPR, SPD, VNAV, FLCH and G/A. Note that they are the four buttons
surrounding the IAS/MACH selector on the MCP plus the G/A switches on the throttles. Pressing any of those
buttons or switches will engage the autothrottles if they are disengaged, provided the A/T Arm switch is on.
There are five reasons the autothrottles will disconnect:
• A/T Arm switch is turned off
• A/T Disconnect switch on a throttle is pushed
• a thrust reverser is deployed
• TMC failure
• loss of the primary engine parameter (EPR or N1) in an EEC
When the N1/EPR switch is pressed the autothrottles drive to and hold the reference N1/EPR displayed on EICAS
subject to maximum speed limits.
When the SPD Switch is pressed the autothrottles maintain the speed or Mach displayed in the MCP window subject
to maximum and minimum speed limits.
IAS changes to Mach in climb at approximately .80 M, and Mach changes to IAS in descent at approximately 300
KIAS.
LNAV will engage if the airplane is within 2½ nm (767) or within the airplane’s turn radius (757) of the active route.
Otherwise it just arms.
LNAV will maintain the present heading when:
• passing the last waypoint prior to a route discontinuity
• passing the last active route waypoint
• passing the last offset route waypoint
• activating an inactive route or activating an airway intercept and not within LNAV capture criteria
In Vertical Speed mode, the airplane will fly away from a captured altitude and there is no high or low speed
protection. Use with caution.
With the Bank Limit Selector in Auto, the bank used in HDG SEL mode varies with airspeed from 15-25º. It has no
effect on other roll modes such as LNAV.
Heading Hold switch – the autopilot or flight director will roll wings level and then hold that heading.
Altitude Hold switch – the autopilot or flight director will hold, or return to, the altitude at the time the switch was
pressed.
LOC capture can occur when the intercept track angle is within 120º of the localizer course.
G/S capture can occur when the intercept track angle is within 80º of the localizer course.
Either LOC or G/S can be captured first.
To disarm Approach mode:
• if neither LOC or G/S has been captured, press the APP switch again or select another pitch or roll mode
• with only LOC or G/S captured, select another roll or pitch mode (as appropriate) other than LNAV or VNAV
• after LOC and G/S capture, the only way to deselect Approach mode is to disengage the autopilot and cycle
both flight director switches or to select G/A mode.
On a backcourse localizer approach, press the B/CRS switch before the LOC switch because, if LOC is armed first,
it’s possible for the autopilot or flight director to capture the front course in the instant before B/CRS is pushed and
the airplane will proceed in the wrong direction. Push the buttons in alphabetical order or in the same order as you
say the name of the approach, i.e. “Backcourse Localizer.”
Auto Pilot light – if an autoflight failure affects only the active mode, the autopilot will remain engaged in an
attitude stabilizing mode, the discrete Auto Pilot light will illuminate and an amber line will be drawn through the
degraded mode annunciation. If the fault is not common to all autopilots, a different autopilot may be operational
and should be selected.
A/P Disconnect light – an autopilot was automatically or manually disconnected.
A/T Disconnect light – the autothrottles were disconnected.
Three independent Flight Control Computers (FCCs) control three independent sets of autopilot servos to the
ailerons and elevators.
Autopilot rudder control is used only during multiple-autopilot ILS approaches.
Nosewheel steering is used by the autopilot during landing rollout after an autoland.
During an ILS approach with all three autopilots engaged, separate electrical power sources power the three FCCs
and autopilots. The left autopilot is on the left main system, the center autopilot is on the battery/standby system
(Hot Battery bus and Standby AC bus through the standby inverter) and the right autopilot is on the right main
system. See the Electrical section for more information.
Changes to autoland status below 200' RA are inhibited except for a transition to NO AUTOLAND.

182
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
On takeoff, the flight director commands V2 + 15 knots or liftoff speed + 15 knots, whichever is greater. If the
current speed remains above the target speed for 5 seconds, the target speed resets to the current speed up to a
maximum of V2 + 25 knots.
Go-Around arms in flight when the flaps are extended (flap lever not up) or at glideslope capture. Pressing a G/A
switch engages the autothrottles to provide a climb of at least 2,000 fpm, causes the autopilot and/or flight director
to command a climb at current airspeed or MCP airspeed, whichever is higher, and maintain the ground track at
time of engagement. If the airspeed increases above the initial target speed and remains there for 5 seconds, the
target speed resets to the current airspeed up to a maximum of MCP speed plus 25 knots. If the initial go-around
speed was above MCP speed plus 25 knots, that speed is maintained.
Elevator authority is limited during single autopilot operation, such as on a non-ILS approach, and may not be
sufficient to counteract pitch up or pitch down during go-around or level off under certain conditions. Always be
prepared to disconnect the autopilot and fly manually if necessary.
Altitude capture from a climb that requires a significant airspeed increase or thrust reduction may result in the
autopilot descending away from the selected altitude in an attempt to increase airspeed. Once again, always be
prepared to disconnect the autopilot and fly manually if necessary.
If LAND 2 is displayed on the ASA, the autopilot will automatically apply nose-up pitch trim as the airplane
descends below 330' RA for 757-200s and below 100' RA for 757-300s and 767s. If the autopilot is then
disengaged, it will take 20-30 pounds of forward pressure to counter the added pitch trim. If an automatic go-
around is accomplished, the added trim is automatically removed.
During an autoland, G/A is inhibited after 2 seconds at or below 5' RA. If a G/A switch is pushed after that time, the
flight director will command go-around pitch, but the autothrottles will not advance.
During a multiple-autopilot approach and missed approach, the autopilots control the rudder. If on single engine, be
prepared to manually apply rudder at the first change of either pitch or roll mode or if the autopilots are
disengaged because the rudder will quickly move to its trimmed position and the airplane will roll abruptly.

Communications
Nav Filter Selector – filters VOR, ADF and ILS audio:
• Voice – only voice transmissions can be heard
• Both – both voice and station identifiers can be heard
• Range – only station identifiers can be heard
The Flight Interphone switch on the overhead panel (if installed) connects the flight and cabin interphone systems
together.
The Service Interphone switch on the P-61 panel will add additional external (unpressurized area) headphone jacks
to the cabin interphone system. The jack on the APU ground control panel on the nosewheel strut is part of the
flight interphone system, however, and will work with the Service Interphone switch off.
The Alert Call switch calls all flight attendant stations.
The Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) records continuously when electrical power is applied to the airplane. During a
test, the needle (if installed) displaces to the green band if all four channels are operating. To erase the CVR, hold
the erase switch for 2 seconds while on the ground with AC power applied and the parking brake set.
The Flight Recorder is on anytime an engine is running or anytime in flight with electrical power available.
HF radios (if installed) use a common antenna. When one radio is transmitting, the antenna is disconnected from the
other radio and it cannot be used to transmit or receive. Both radios can receive simultaneously, however, if neither
is transmitting. Decreasing HF sensitivity too far prevents reception, including SELCAL reception.
Cabin PA priorities:
• flight deck announcements
• cabin announcements made from a flight attendant station
• pre-recorded announcements
• boarding music

183
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Electrical

Simplified Electrical System

This diagram does not show all electrical components, such as the HDG and AC Transfer busses, if installed. It also
shows a Center AC and a Center DC bus that are not mentioned in Volume 2 but help explain bus separation and bus
isolation during ILS approaches. Source: Delta Ground School Handouts.

184
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
The entire airplane electrical load can be powered by any two airplane AC power sources (left IDG, right IDG, APU
generator) or by external power.
Power sources operate isolated from each other.
An Integrated Drive Generator (IDG) incorporates a generator and a constant speed drive in a single casing.
The right IDG normally powers the right AC bus and the left IDG normally powers the left AC bus.
The APU generator is electrically identical to the IDG generators and can power either or both main AC busses and
may be used in flight as a replacement for a failed IDG.
The priority for powering main AC busses is the respective IDG, APU generator and then the opposite IDG.
If the APU is started with the APU Generator Control Switch on, the APU will automatically power both main AC
busses only if they are unpowered. The APU will not automatically disconnect other power sources. For example,
if external power is powering the main AC busses and APU power becomes available, external power will
continue powering the busses until deselected.
If starting an engine with external power connected, the engine generator will automatically take over its busses,
leaving the opposite busses on external power. If the second engine is started while on external power, its
generator will automatically take over its busses and the external power On light will extinguish. The Avail light
will be on until external power is removed. There is no load shedding during engine start from external power.
If starting an engine with APU power, the engine will automatically take over its busses, leaving the opposite busses
on the APU. Both Utility busses will shed during start of the first engine and re-power once the engine is supplying
power. During start of the second engine, only the Utility bus on that side will shed and automatically re-power
once the engine is supplying power. That engine will also automatically power its busses after engine start and the
APU will be disconnected, however the APU generator Off light will not illuminate and the APU will continue
running.
The main purpose of the bus tie system is to make sure the AC and DC busses are powered by any available source.
Functions of the bus tie system (PPI+3):
• prevents paralleling
• powers AC busses
• isolates faults
• allows the DC bus tie breaker to close with the loss of DC power
• allows the Captain’s flight instruments to remain powered with loss of the left AC bus
• allows the First Officer’s flight instruments to remain powered with loss of the right AC bus
A fault on a bus will illuminate the bus tie Isolation light and lock the bus tie breaker open, unpowering the bus. The
bus tie breaker will not close until the fault is corrected.
The Captain’s flight instruments are powered by the Captain’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus, which is normally
powered by the left AC bus. The First Officer’s flight instruments are powered by the First Officer’s Flight
Instrument Transfer bus, which is normally powered by the right AC bus. If the Bus Tie switches are in Auto and a
main AC bus becomes unpowered, the affected Flight Instrument Transfer bus automatically switches to the other
main AC bus and remains powered.
The left and right Utility busses are powered by their respective main AC busses.
Galley busses are powered by their respective Utility busses.
The Ground Handling Bus provides power for cargo doors, cargo handling and fuel servicing. It can only be
powered on the ground by either the APU or external power and will be powered whenever the APU is running or
when the external power Avail light is illuminated. The APU or external power does not have to be selected on. If
starting at the gate with an inop APU, late bags cannot be added to the forward or aft cargo compartments after
pushback because neither the APU or external power is available.
The Ground Service bus powers the main battery charger, the APU battery charger and misc. cabin and system
loads. (BELL: battery chargers, equipment cooling fan, left forward boost pump, lights.) It is normally powered by
the right AC bus whenever the right electrical system is powered. If the right electrical system is not powered, the
ground service switch on the forward flight attendant panel will switch the Ground Service bus to the Ground
Handling bus and allow the APU or external power to power it on the ground.
Autopilot power sources:
• the left and center autopilots are normally powered by the left main system and the right autopilot is normally
powered by the right main system
• when Approach mode is selected at any altitude, the autopilot power sources separate (Bus Separation). The
left main system powers the left autopilot and the Captain’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus. The right main
system powers the right autopilot and the First Officer’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus, and the battery/
standby system (Hot Battery bus and Standby AC bus through the standby inverter) powers the center
autopilot.
185
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 • if a single generator fails above 200' RA on the approach, the bus tie breakers close to power the unpowered
AC and DC busses, the center autopilot switches back to the left main system and NO LAND 3 appears on the
Autoland Status Annunciator (ASA)
• below 200' RA on the approach, the bus tie breakers will not close if a generator is lost (Bus Isolation). The left
or right AC bus and the associated left or right autopilot will remain unpowered, the flight instruments will
remain powered through the Flight Instrument Transfer bus system, and the autoland will continue using only
two autopilots. The ASA is inhibited from changing to NO LAND 3 below 200' RA, but it can change to NO
AUTOLAND if additional failures occur.
• if the APU is running, it can power an unpowered left or right AC bus in the event of a generator failure
• Bus Separation and Bus Isolation only occur on ILS approaches after Approach mode is selected
• when the autopilots are disengaged or when another pitch or roll mode is selected after an autopilot go-around
is performed, the electrical system reverts to normal, non-isolated operation
Bus Separation – if you’re “separated,” you might get back together.
Bus Isolation – if you’re “isolated,” you won’t get back together and your wife gets the house.
Electrical load shedding occurs automatically to ensure power is available to critical and essential equipment.
The load shedding priority is Galley busses first, then Utility busses. Utility busses are followed by individual
equipment items powered by the main AC busses. When additional power becomes available, systems are restored
in the opposite order.
Load shedding examples:
• C2 electric hydraulic pump prior to engine start
• center tank fuel pumps prior to engine start
• Utility bus or buses during engine start
• Utility busses after a generator or engine failure
• center tank fuel pump after an engine failure
• cabin ceiling lights after an engine failure
Utility bus load shedding conditions (BOSS):
B – both thrust levers advanced to the takeoff range on the ground when on a single power source
O – overload (electrical loads exceed the power available)
S – starting engines with the APU providing electrical power
S – single generator in flight (the cabin will go dark)
DC busses are powered by Transformer-Rectifier Units (TRUs) which are powered by their respective main AC bus.
If a TRU fails, its DC bus is powered by the opposite DC bus through the DC bus tie if the Bus Tie switches are in
Auto. There are no flight deck controls for the main DC system.
If the Standby Power switch is in Auto, the left DC bus powers the Battery bus, which powers the Standby DC bus.
With the Battery switch On and the Standby Power switch in Auto, the main aircraft battery can act as a backup
source of power for the Hot Battery bus, Battery bus, Standby DC bus, and Standby AC bus through the standby
inverter for approximately 30 minutes (90 minutes for some 757s) after the loss of all generators. Flight beyond 30
minutes (90 minutes for some 757s) in this situation will result in complete electrical failure. (On some aircraft,
the battery should never be the only source of electric power due to the Hydraulic Driven Generator.)
On a 767, complete electrical failure will result in the inability to extend the gear and flaps because the ADP requires
DC power to operate and when the battery is depleted, the ADP air supply valve will close and the center hydraulic
system will depressurize. Gear and flaps will not extend by either the normal or alternate method if this happens.
(Center system hydraulics will not be available for normal gear and flap extension and electric power will not be
available for alternate gear or flap extension.)
If the airplane is on Standby power, all the CRT screens will be blank. (“Nobody can watch TV.”) If any CRT screen
is powered (“If anybody can watch TV”), the airplane is not on Standby power.
Normally the IRUs operate on AC power from the left and right electrical systems and the main aircraft battery is an
alternate power source. The ON DC light illuminates if the AC power source is lost and DC power is being used.
The DC FAIL light illuminates if the DC power source is lost and normal AC power is being used. Both lights will
be extinguished if both AC and DC power are either available or not available.
Aircraft without an HDG – on Standby power, the left and center IRUs will shut down after 5 minutes to save
battery power and the right IRU will operate until the battery is depleted. (The right IRU is needed to provide
heading information to the Captain’s RDMI card, which is available on Standby power.)
Aircraft with an HDG – on Standby power, the right IRU will shut down after 5 minutes to save battery power and
the left and center IRUs will continue operating until battery depletion. If the HDG is operating, however, the
aircraft will not be on Standby power and the left IRU will be powered by the Left AC Transfer Bus and the center
IRU will be powered by the Hot Battery Bus.
186
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
With the aircraft powered normally, turning the Standby Power switch off will only unpower the Standby AC and
DC busses.
The Battery position on the Standby Power switch insures the battery can power the Standby busses in case the
automatic feature fails. It also disconnects the battery charger from the battery system, so the Standby busses will
be powered by the battery even if normal power is available. In this case, the Standby busses will be unpowered
when the battery is depleted after 30 minutes (90 minutes for some 757s) even though generator power may be
available, however airplanes are being modified so the battery charger will remain connected with the switch in the
Battery position so the battery will not be depleted.
The battery/standby system consists of:
• the Hot Battery bus
• the Battery bus (4 busses)
• the Standby AC bus
• the Standby DC bus
The Hot Battery bus powers items that must be continuously powered, such as the clock, and is powered by the main
battery prior to establishing electrical power. After establishing electrical power, the Hot Battery bus is powered by
the main battery charger which is powered by the Ground Service bus, which is powered by either the right AC
bus or the Ground Handling bus.
The Battery bus is powered by the main battery through the Hot Battery bus prior to establishing electrical power if
the Battery Switch is on. After establishing electrical power, the left DC bus powers the Battery bus and the main
battery provides a backup source of power through the Hot Battery bus.
The Standby AC bus is normally powered by the left AC bus, but can be powered by the main battery through the
Hot Battery bus, Battery bus and standby inverter. If the Standby Power Selector is in BAT, the main battery
powers the Standby AC bus through the standby inverter and the battery charger is removed from the circuit on
unmodified airplanes.
The Standby DC bus is normally powered by the left DC bus through the Battery bus, but can be powered by the
main battery through the Hot Battery bus and Battery bus. If the Standby Power Selector is in BAT, the main
battery powers the Standby DC bus and the battery charger is removed from the circuit on unmodified airplanes.
On some 757s, the main battery and the APU battery are paralleled to power the battery/standby system if necessary.
The combined batteries will last 90 minutes instead of 30 minutes for the main battery alone.
Items available on Standby Power until battery depletion:
• adequate lighting • center ILS
• all IRUs for 5 minutes • Captain’s marker beacon lights
• either the right IRU or the left and center IRUs • Captain’s RDMI card and number 1 needle
after 5 minutes • gear handle and half the green gear down lights
• fuel quantity indications • flap operation but no indication
• manual pressurization controls and indicators • alternate stab trim
• left VOR (no DME) • manual speedbrakes
• Master Warning and Caution • fire detection and protection
• standby flight instruments • left VHF comm
• standby engine instruments • PA
• engine oil pressure lights • interphone
APU and Engine Generator Control switches arm the generator breakers to close automatically when generator
power is available. Turning the switch off opens the generator breaker and resets fault trip circuitry. The switches
are normally left on.
The APU Generator Off light indicates the APU generator breaker is open due to a fault with the APU running or the
switch is selected off. The light is normally off when the APU is off.
The Engine Generator Off light indicates the engine generator breaker is open due to a fault or the engine is shut
down. The light is normally on when the engine is shut down.

187
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Bus Tie Switches in Auto:
• arm the automatic AC bus tie circuits
• arm the automatic DC bus tie circuits
• arm the automatic Flight Instrument Transfer bus circuits
Turning the Bus Tie Switches Off commands the AC bus tie, the DC bus tie and the Flight Instrument Transfer bus
tie to open and resets fault trip circuitry.
The AC Bus Isolation light indicates the bus tie switch is off or a fault has occurred automatically opening the bus
tie breakers and isolating the busses.
The AC Bus Off light indicates the left or right main AC bus is unpowered.
The External Power Avail light indicates external power is plugged in and power quality is acceptable.
The External Power On light indicates external power is powering a bus or busses.
The External Power switch manually applies or removes external power from the electrical system. It has priority
and will trip off any existing power source.
Utility Bus switches connect or disconnect the Utility busses and Galley busses from the main AC busses and reset
overload and load shed circuitry.
The Utility Bus Off lights indicate the Utility busses and Galley busses are unpowered.
The Generator Drive lights indicate high oil temperature or low oil pressure in the Integrated Drive Generator
(IDG).
Generator Drive Disconnect switches disconnect the IDG from the engine. IDGs can only be reconnected on the
ground.
The Battery Switch On allows the main battery to power the Battery bus and the Standby AC and DC busses if main
AC power is lost. It also allows the APU to be started.
The Battery Switch Off light indicates the battery switch is off.
The battery discharge light indicates the battery is discharging.
If the main battery is the only source of electrical power, it should power the standby system for approximately 30
minutes (90 minutes on some 757s). On the 767, when the battery is depleted after 30 minutes, the gear and flaps
cannot be lowered.
Standby Power Selector:
• Off – Standby AC and DC busses are unpowered
• Auto – Standby AC and DC busses automatically transfer to battery power if normal AC power is lost
• Bat – Standby AC and DC busses are manually connected to the main battery even if normal power is available
The Standby Power Bus Off light indicates the Standby AC and/or Standby DC bus is unpowered.

767 Differences
The 767 has a Hydraulic Driven Generator (HDG) as an additional source of electric power. If both main AC busses
are lost, after a 10-15 second delay, the HDG will automatically power the busses necessary for ETOPS operation,
including either the Captain’s or First Officer’s EFIS, without a time limit. The Air-driven Demand Pump (ADP)
will turn on anytime the HDG is operating because the center electric hydraulic pumps will be unpowered. The
HDG will automatically shut down if power from an engine generator or the APU is restored. If the HDG fails, the
aircraft main battery will power the Hot Battery bus, the Battery bus and Standby AC and Standby DC busses for
30 minutes. Only standby flight instruments and other items powered by Standby Power will be available in that
case.
The HDG is powered by the center hydraulic system and starts automatically if both left and right AC busses are
unpowered. The HDG provides power to:
• the Hot Battery bus
• the Battery bus
• the Standby AC bus (7 busses)
• the Standby DC bus
• the left AC Transfer bus
• the right AC Transfer bus
• either the Captain’s or First Officer’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus
The HDG provides less DC power than the main battery so when the HDG first starts operating the Battery
Discharge light may illuminate until the battery drains to the power level produced by the HDG.
Left and right AC Transfer busses power items necessary for ETOPS that are not powered by the battery/standby
system. They are normally powered by the left and right AC busses but will be powered by the hydraulic driven
generator if both AC busses are unpowered. They do not transfer to the opposite main bus like the Flight
Instrument Transfer busses, but only to the HDG if both main AC busses are unpowered.
188
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Flight Instrument Transfer Busses – if power is lost to both main AC busses, either the Captain’s or the First
Officer’s flight instruments are powered by the HDG depending on the position of the Flight Instrument Bus
Power switch. If the switch is off, the Captain’s instruments will be powered. If the switch is placed to the ALTN
position, the First Officer’s flight instruments will be powered after a 10-15 second loss of all electronic flight
instruments.
If on HDG power, the EFIS screens may blank on a go-around as the gear is retracted.

757 Differences
757 aircraft certified for ETOPS also have an HDG as an additional source of electrical power. It is powered by the
left hydraulic system and activates automatically (10-15 second delay) when both left and right main AC busses
are unpowered.
The HDG on the 757 supplies power to the same seven busses as the HDG on the 767, with one exception. There is
no Flight Instrument Bus Power switch on the 757. If the HDG is operating, it will provide power to the Captain’s
Flight Instrument Transfer bus with no option to power the First Officer’s instruments.
The 757 HDG also provides less DC power than the main battery so when the HDG first starts operating the Battery
Discharge light may illuminate until the battery drains to the power level produced by the HDG.

Electrical System Summary

Bus or Component Normal Power Source Backup Power Source(s)

Left AC bus Left IDG APU or right AC bus through the bus tie
Right AC bus Right IDG APU or left AC bus through the bus tie
Capt Flt Inst Transfer bus Left AC bus Right AC bus or HDG if both busses unpowered*
F/O Flt Inst Transfer bus Right AC bus Left AC bus or HDG if both busses unpowered*
Ground Service bus Right AC bus Ground Handling bus through switch on F/A panel
Ground Handling bus External power or APU None, only powered on the ground
Left Utility bus Left AC bus None
Right Utility bus Right AC bus None
Left Galley bus Left Utility bus None
Right Galley bus Right Utility bus None
Left TRU Left AC bus None
Right TRU Right AC bus None
Left DC bus Left TRU Right DC bus through the bus tie
Right DC bus Right TRU Left DC bus through the bus tie
Main Battery Charger Ground Service bus None
APU Battery Charger Ground Service bus None
Hot Battery bus Main Battery Charger Main Battery or HDG**
Battery bus Left DC bus Main Battery through the Hot Battery bus or HDG**
Standby AC bus Left AC bus Main Battery through Standby Inverter or HDG**
Standby DC bus Battery bus Main Battery or HDG**
HDG Aircraft Only

189
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Left AC Transfer bus Left AC bus HDG only if both AC busses unpowered
Right AC Transfer bus Right AC bus HDG only if both AC busses unpowered
* Either the Captain’s or First Officer’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus on 767 aircraft with an HDG installed. On the
757 with an HDG installed, only the Captain’s Flight Instrument Transfer bus can be powered from the HDG.
** If installed.

190
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Engines
The 757-200 is powered by two Pratt & Whitney PW2037 engines rated at 37,000 pounds of takeoff thrust each.
The 757-300 is powered by two Pratt & Whitney PW2040 engines rated at 40,000 pounds of takeoff thrust each.
The 767 is powered either by two General Electric CF6-80C2 engines or by two Pratt & Whitney PW4060 engines,
both of which are rated at 60,200 pounds of takeoff thrust each.
The N1 and N2 rotors are mechanically independent. The N2 rotor drives the accessory gearbox.
EPR, N1 and EGT are the primary engine indications for Pratt & Whitney engines and N1 and EGT are the primary
engine indications for General Electric engines. Primary engine indications are always displayed on the upper
EICAS display.
Secondary engine indications (N2, fuel flow, oil pressure, oil temperature, oil quantity and vibration) are
automatically displayed on the lower EICAS display when:
• the displays initially receive electrical power
• a secondary engine parameter is exceeded
TAI will be displayed near the N1 indicator on EICAS when engine anti-ice is on.
On the 757, if only a single source of engine bleed air is available, a TAI bug will be displayed on the appropriate
N1 gauge showing the minimum N1 required for anti-ice operation.
Normal operating ranges are displayed on engine instruments in white.
Oil pressure (except 767 P&W engines) and oil temperature have caution ranges indicated by amber bands. If the
caution range is reached, the readout, readout box and pointer all change to amber.
EGT has a max continuous limit indicated by an amber band. If EGT reaches the max continuous limit, the readout,
readout box, pointer and dial all change to amber, however the EGT indication is inhibited from changing to amber
for five minutes during takeoff or go-around. On some engines, the inhibit is extended to 10 minutes after an
engine failure.
N1, EGT, N2, oil pressure and oil temperature have operating limits indicated by red lines. If an operating limit is
reached, the readout, readout box and pointer all change to red.
Maximum EPR or maximum N1 is the maximum certified thrust limit for all phases of flight and varies with
ambient conditions. It is calculated by the Electronic Engine Controller (EEC) or by the Thrust Management
Computer (TMC). If the EEC is operating normally, the thrust levers can be moved to the full forward stop and
max EPR or max N1 will not be exceeded.
Maximum EPR/N1 is indicated by an amber line on the EPR/N1 dial and indications do not change color when the
maximum is reached.
The “crow’s foot” is the reference or target EPR/N1. If it’s green, it’s a reference EPR/N1 calculated by the Thrust
Management Computer. If it’s magenta, it’s a target EPR/N1 calculated by the FMC.
The command sector is a white band that shows the difference between commanded thrust and actual thrust during
throttle movement.
REV is displayed above the EPR/N1 gauge when the reverser is activated. It will be amber when the reverser is in
transit and green when the reverser is fully deployed.
The Thrust Management Computer calculates the reference EPR/N1 for takeoff, climb, cruise, continuous and
goaround thrust. These modes can be selected on the Thrust Mode Select Panel (TMSP).
Assumed temperature for a reduced power takeoff may be set on the TMSP or in the FMS.
Reference EPR/N1 can be manually set for one or both engines using the knob on the engine indication control
panel, however the autothrottles will not respond to a manually set EPR/N1.
Electronic Engine Controller (EEC) Summary:
• all EECs are powered by a dedicated permanent magnet alternator which is independent of airplane power
• all EECs are Full Authority Digital Electronic Control (FADEC) except on some 767s with GE engines
(engines with the On-Inop switch). The thrust system on those airplanes is a hydromechanical engine fuel
control with an EEC unit that provides trim inputs to drive the engine to an EEC-computed thrust level
• EPR is the primary mode for P&W engines and N1 is the primary mode for GE engines
• autothrottles need the primary mode. If the primary mode is lost, the autothrottles won’t work.
• on the 757, the EEC switch is a power switch. It allows maintenance to power the EEC with ship’s power.
• on some 767s with GE engines, the EEC switch is an On-Off switch
• on some 767s (P&W and GE), the EEC switch is a mode switch. It allows switching to the Alternate mode
• no EECs will prevent EGT overtemps
• P&W EECs will prevent EPR overboosts
• all EECs will prevent N1 and N2 overspeeds
• EECs on 767 aircraft have Supplemental Control Units to automatically transfer EEC power to the Hot Battery
bus if the permanent magnet alternator fails
191
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
On some 757s, if N2 overspeeds to 105% due to a malfunction, the engine will roll back to 85% N2 and be
uncontrollable. The throttle will not control the engine and the engine will remain at 85% N2 until shut down. That
would be exciting on takeoff and, according to a ground school instructor, every time it’s happened the airplane
ran off the runway. On some airplanes with a more advanced fuel control unit, however, throttle control of the
engine may be regained after the roll back. There is no way for a pilot to tell which fuel control unit is installed.
On the 767 P&W, if N2 overspeeds due to a malfunction, the engine rolls back to idle.
On the 757, the fuel control selects minimum ground idle, minimum flight idle and approach idle, as necessary.
On the 767, there are only two idle speeds and the EEC selects either minimum idle or approach idle as necessary.
On some airplanes, rotating the engine start selectors to CONT will manually select approach idle.
With the Standby Engine Indicator switch in Auto, the display will be blank with AC power on the airplane and
EICAS is operative, but standby engine indications will be automatically displayed when:
• AC power is lost (i.e. on Standby power)
• EICAS has failed
• either CRT has failed and Status is selected on the ground
On all airplanes, the start valves are downstream of the engine bleed valves. You can start an engine with its bleed
valve closed, which is what we normally do.
A max start limit (red radial) is displayed on the EGT indicator when the fuel control is in Cutoff and remains
displayed during start until the engine stabilizes in idle. (Not really; it often disappears before the EGT peaks.) The
EGT indication changes to red if the EGT start limit is reached during starting.
During start, the Engine Start Selectors control the start valve and the Fuel Control Switches control ignition and
fuel flow.
Minimum N2 for selecting Run during start is displayed as a magenta “Fuel On” command bug on the N2 indicator,
even though normal fuel-on N2 is 25%.
Max motoring speed is defined as when engine acceleration is less than 1% in 5 seconds.
Placing the Fuel Control Switch to Run opens engine and spar fuel valves and activates selected igniters if armed.
The Engine Start Valve light indicates the start valve is not in the commanded position or the valve is open with N2
above 50%.
Igniter Selector:
• 757s and some 767s – selects one igniter (1 or 2) or both igniters in each engine to operate when directed by
the Engine Start Selector
• some 767s – selects one igniter (Single) or both igniters in each engine to operate when directed by the Engine
Start Selector. In Single, the igniter automatically alternates with each engine start.
• on all airplanes, both igniters operate when the Engine Start Selector is in FLT regardless of this switch
position
Engine Start Selector:
• GND – opens the start valve and arms the selected igniter(s). It is magnetically held until 50% N2.
• AUTO – released to AUTO at 50% N2 on start. Closes the start valve and terminates ignition. Selected igniters
(one or both) operate when flaps are extended (flap lever not up) or when the engine anti-ice is on.
• OFF – no ignition
• CONT – selected igniters (one or both) operate continuously. No time limit.
• FLT – both igniters operate continuously regardless of Ignition Selector position. No time limit.
Starter Duty Cycle:
• continuous for 5 minutes
• cool 30 seconds for each minute of operation
Stable start – 1, 2, 3, 6, 1 on the engine instruments for EPR (if installed), N1, EGT, N2 and fuel flow respectively.

192
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Starter Re-Engagement:
• recommended starter re-engagement speed (moving Engine Start Selector to GND) is 0% N2
• normal starter re-engagement speed is 0-20% N2
• engaging the starter with N2 above 20% is not recommended except in case of fire
• engaging the starter with N2 above 30% may result in starter or gearbox damage
The Inflight Start Envelope is displayed inflight when the fire handle is in, the fuel control switch is in cutoff, N2 is
below idle, and both Primary and Secondary EICAS screens are displayed. If the current airspeed is too low for a
windmilling start, X-BLD is displayed above the N2 gauge and the Fuel On command bug is displayed on the N2
gauge.
Some 767s with GE engines have an auto relight feature. In flight or on the ground, if N2 drops below idle speed,
the EEC will energize both igniters in that engine.
Each engine has two igniters. Dual igniters are always used for inflight starts.
Main AC is the normal power source for the igniters and Standby AC is the backup source.
Engine and Spar fuel valves are controlled by the fuel control switch and the fire handle.
Eng Valve and Spar Valve lights illuminate momentarily as the valves open or close. Constant illumination indicates
the valve does not agree with the commanded position.
Fuel filters and oil filters will bypass if they become clogged.
767s and some 757s display an EICAS message if a fuel filter is clogged, but on some 757s, the only indication of a
clogged fuel filter is a Status message.
Oil heats the fuel and fuel cools the oil in the fuel/oil heat exchanger. Automatic full-time fuel heat.
There are two independent oil pressure sensors. One supplies information to the oil pressure gauge and the other
supplies information to the discrete oil pressure light on the forward panel and for the EICAS low oil pressure
message. Actual low oil pressure would show on all three.
The white band at the bottom of the oil quantity indication is for crew awareness only. There is no minimum oil
quantity inflight, so there are no flight crew procedures based solely on low oil quantity.
Thrust Reversers are hydraulically operated on the 757 and some 767s, and pneumatically operated on some 767s.
They are available only on the ground. An interlock prevents inadvertent actuation and electromechanical locks
protect in the event of additional system failures.
767s have an auto restow feature to apply hydraulic or pneumatic pressure if an uncommanded thrust reverser
unlock is sensed.
When the reverse thrust levers are pulled aft to the interlock position, the autothrottles disengage, if engaged, and the
speedbrakes deploy if not already deployed.
On the 767, the REV ISLN light above the fuel control switches indicates a fault is detected in the thrust reverser
system. It will be accompanied by a REV ISLN VAL EICAS message. Additional system failures may cause
inflight deployment, however the light and the associated EICAS messages are inhibited in flight. On the 757,
there is no discrete light above the fuel control switches, but the EICAS message will be displayed if on the
ground.
On the Vibration indicator, the vibration source with the highest vibration (N1 or N2 for P&W engines; FAN, LPT or
N2 for GE engines), is displayed. If the vibration source is unknown, the average vibration is displayed and BB,
for “broadband,” is indicated.
There are no vibration limitations and no flight crew procedures based solely on vibration indications.

APU
The APU generator can supply power for all of the airplane’s electrical needs up to the maximum operating altitude.
The APU can also supply bleed air to run both air conditioning packs or start a single engine. Bleed air is available
up to approximately 17,000 feet.
Fuel is provided from the left wing tank through a DC fuel pump if only battery power is available or from the left
forward AC fuel pump if AC power is available.
The aircraft battery (with the Battery switch On) and the APU battery are required to start the APU on the ground.
The purpose of the APU battery is to start the APU without draining the aircraft battery.
Placing the APU switch to Start begins a start cycle which opens the APU inlet door, opens the APU fuel valve and
turns on the AC or DC electric fuel pump. The APU Fault light will flash momentarily during start as the fuel
valve opens. The Run light will flash twice, the first time is a self-test and the second time is starter engagement.
The APU Run light will illuminate when the APU is at operating speed.
The APU starter duty cycle is three start attempts in a 60-minute period.

193
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Turning the APU switch off will close the APU bleed valve if open and start a 90 second cool down. If the APU
bleed valve has been closed for 90 seconds or more before the switch is turned off, the APU will shut down
immediately.
The APU Fault light will illuminate momentarily during start and shut down as the fuel valve opens or closes.
If the APU is turned off and the APU Run light is still illuminated (during the cool down), turning the switch to Start
and releasing it to On will cancel the shutdown signal and the APU will keep running.
If a fault is detected, the APU Fault light on the APU panel and an APU FAULT EICAS message will illuminate and
the APU will shut down without the 90-second cooling period.
The APU Fault light and APU FAULT EICAS message are inhibited when the APU switch is Off.
The fault system can be reset by turning the APU switch to Off and then back to On. If the Fault light is
extinguished after selecting On, one restart may be attempted. However, if an APU Fuel Valve message is
displayed on EICAS, the fuel valve disagrees with the commanded position and a restart should not be attempted.
The APU will shut down automatically without the 90-second cool down if a fire is detected when on the ground
with both engines shut down.

Fire Protection
The discrete Fire Warning light on the forward panel indicates an engine, APU, wheel well or cargo fire is detected.
The discrete Wheel Well Fire warning light on the forward panel indicates a fire is detected in one or both main gear
wheel wells. There is no detection in the nose gear wheel well. (Because there are no brakes on the nose wheels.)
The Engine Overheat light on the Engine Fire Panel indicates an engine overheat is detected.
The Engine Fire Warning light in the Engine Fire Switch indicates an engine fire is detected.
The Fuel Control Switch Fire light indicates an engine fire is detected.
The Engine Bottle Discharged light indicates the bottle has discharged or has low pressure.
Engine Fire Switch:
• arms both engine fire bottles
• silences the fire bell
• closes the engine and spar fuel valves (6 items)
• closes the engine bleed valve
• trips the generator
• shuts off hydraulic fluid to the engine-driven hydraulic pump
The APU Fire Bottle Discharged light on the Cargo and APU Fire Panel indicates the bottle has discharged or has
low pressure.
The APU Fire Warning light in the APU Fire Switch indicates an APU fire is detected.
APU Fire switch:
• arms the APU fire bottle(s)
• silences the fire bell
• shuts down the APU (6 items)
• closes the APU fuel valve
• closes the APU bleed valve
• trips the APU generator
The Cargo Fire Warning light indicates smoke is detected in the associated cargo compartment (FWD or AFT).
The Cargo Fire Bottle Discharged light indicates the bottle has discharged or has low pressure.
Forward Cargo Fire Arm switch:
• arms all cargo fire bottles for the forward cargo compartment
• turns off both recirc fans
• silences the fire bell
• configures the equipment cooling system to Smoke mode on some 757s
• shuts down the nitrogen generation system, if installed

194
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Aft Cargo Fire Arm switch:
• arms all cargo fire bottles for the aft cargo compartment
• turns off the right recirc fan on some 757s and both recirc fans on the 767 and some 757s
• silences the fire bell
• shuts down the nitrogen generation system, if installed
• inhibits high flow from both packs (767 only)
There are fire detection and extinguishing systems for the engines, APU, cargo compartments and lavs, and overheat
detection systems for the engines, struts and pneumatic ducts in the wing and body areas.
Fire and overheat bells and beepers can be silenced, but warning or caution lights remain illuminated as long as the
fire or overheat is detected.
The SYS FAIL light indicates complete failure of the detection system for an engine fire, engine overheat, APU fire
or cargo fire detection system, but not for the wheel well fire detection system. Note the vertical white line on the
Fire/Overheat Test Panel between the WHL WELL test switch and the ENG/APU/CARGO test switch. It indicates
the wheel well detection system is not included in system fail monitoring.
The System Fail Reset switch extinguishes the Fail light and resets the system to monitor the other non-failed fire/
overheat systems.
The engines have two detector loops in each nacelle that detect both fire and overheat. A fire is a warning and an
overheat is a caution. Both loops must sense a fire or overheat before the signal is sent.
The APU has two detector loops in the APU compartment that detect fire only. Both loops must sense a fire before
the signal is sent.
Each cargo compartment has two smoke detectors. Both detectors must sense a fire (detect smoke) before a fire
signal is sent.
The main wheel wells have a single-loop fire detection system, but no extinguishing system (except lowering the
landing gear). The detection system will not trigger on hot brakes without an associated fire. The nose gear wheel
well does not have a detection system or an extinguishing system (except lowering the gear).
There are two engine fire bottles. Either or both bottles can be discharged into either engine.
Some airplanes have two APU fire bottles and some airplanes have only one APU fire bottle.
The APU automatically shuts down if a fire is detected on the ground if both engines are shut down.
In addition to the cockpit warnings for APU fire, the horn on the nose gear strut sounds intermittently and the fire
warning light on the APU ground control panel illuminates if a fire is detected on the ground.
The engine and APU fire switches are mechanically locked down to prevent inadvertent activation. If a fire is
detected, the switch is electrically unlocked and may be pulled up. The fire switch may also be manually unlocked
by pushing the override switch located beneath it.
On the 757-200, pressing the Number 1 cargo fire discharge switch discharges the first bottle into the selected
compartment immediately. The second bottle is manually discharged at a later time into the same compartment to
maintain the required concentration of extinguishing agent in the compartment.
On the 757-300 and 767, there is only one cargo fire discharge switch. Pressing the switch discharges the first bottle
into the selected compartment immediately. The second bottle is automatically discharged at a later time at a
reduced discharge rate into the same compartment. The 767 actually has three fire extinguisher bottles. The second
and third ones are discharged automatically at a later time.
Since the cargo fire detectors detect smoke, the fire-extinguishing agent may cause the detectors to indicate a fire
still exists even after it has been extinguished.
Each lavatory has a single smoke detector that will sound in the lavatory if smoke is detected. Some 757-200 aircraft
will annunciate in the cabin as well and 757-300 aircraft have a LAV SMOKE light in the cockpit. Each lavatory
also has a single fire extinguisher in the waste container that will discharge automatically if necessary.
The engine and APU fire detectors are continuously monitored for faults and tested automatically whenever power is
first applied or transferred from one source to another, and may also be tested manually with the test switch.
The cargo compartment smoke detectors are tested only when power is first applied or transferred from one source
to another or when tested manually with the test switch.
The wheel well fire detection system is not monitored and is tested only when the test switch is pressed.

195
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Flight Controls
Moving the control column opposite the direction of trim will stop the stab from trimming.
Some airplanes have Alternate Stab Trim levers and some have Alternate Stab Trim switches on the control stand.
Both will override or neutralize conflicting trim commands. The levers mechanically signal stab movement and the
switches electrically signal stab movement.
The green band on the Stab Trim indicator indicates the allowable takeoff trim range.
An Off flag in the Stab Trim indicator means the indicator is inop. Missing data in the indicator means other
malfunctions exist.
With Stab Trim Cutout switches in Norm, hydraulic pressure is supplied to the related stab trim control module. In
Cutout, hydraulic pressure to the stab trim module is shut off.
The Unscheduled Stab Trim light indicates an uncommanded stabilizer motion is detected.
The Stab Trim light indicates the stabilizer trim rate is ½ the normal control wheel trim rate (only one trim module).
The Mach Speed Trim light (757 only) indicates the Mach/speed trim system is inoperative.
The Yaw Damper switches turn the yaw dampers on and off.
The Yaw Damper Inop light indicates the yaw damper is off or inoperative.
The Rudder Ratio light indicates the rudder ratio system has failed or left hydraulic system pressure is not available.
The Flight Control Shutoff switches on the Accessory panel open and close the flight control hydraulic valves to the
wings and tail.
The Speed Brakes light indicates the speedbrakes are extended while airborne with the flaps in a landing position or
when the radio altitude is 800 feet or below. On the 757-300 the light will also illuminate if the speedbrakes are
extended and an engine thrust lever is forward of flight idle for more than 15 seconds.
The Auto Speedbrake light indicates a fault is detected in the automatic speedbrake system or, on aircraft with
blended winglets, a fault in the speedbrake load activation system is detected.
The Spoilers light indicates one or more spoiler pairs are not in the commanded position.
The Aileron Lockout light (767 only) indicates the aileron lockout actuator disagrees with the commanded position.
The Trailing Edge light indicates a flap disagree or asymmetry exists or the flap load relief system is not operating
when required.
The Leading Edge light indicates a slat disagree or asymmetry exists.
There is no manual reversion on these airplanes.
Spoilers operate differentially to assist ailerons for roll control and symmetrically as speedbrakes.
The control columns and yokes are connected through jam override mechanisms. If a jam occurs, applying force to
the other column or yoke will overcome the jam, although some control effectiveness may be lost.
The rudder pedals are rigidly connected between the two sides.
All airplanes have two elevators, a moveable horizontal stabilizer, and a single rudder. The 757 has two ailerons and
ten spoilers. The 767 has four ailerons and 12 spoilers.
The 757 has a Mach/speed trim system that automatically moves the stabilizer when the autopilot is not engaged to
improve speed stability.
Aircraft with blended winglets have a Speedbrake Load Alleviation System to protect the wing from a high gross
weight, high speed, pitch up maneuver. Under certain circumstances, speedbrake lever travel is restricted to 50%.
If the speedbrake lever is moved past the 50% position, it will automatically return to 50%. The pilot may override
the system with additional force and hold the lever at positions greater than 50%. (Probably a bad idea.)
Two elevator feel systems provide artificial feel forces to the control columns. The 757 elevator feel system uses the
center and right hydraulic systems and the 767 elevator feel uses the left and center hydraulic systems. (These are
the same hydraulic systems used by stab trim and they’re printed on the console under the stab trim cutout
switches.) Mechanical springs provide elevator feel if both hydraulic systems to the elevator feel system are inop.
Stab trim is powered by the center and right hydraulic systems on the 757 and by the left and center hydraulic
systems on the 767. (Just look at the console; the hydraulic systems are printed under the cutout switches.) There
are two trim modules, one for each hydraulic source.
The Stab Cutout switches can be used to remove hydraulic power to the trim control modules.
Types of trim:
• Electric trim uses the dual pitch trim switches on the control wheel
• Alternate trim uses the levers or switches on the control stand. Alternate trim overrides or neutralizes any other
conflicting trim inputs
• Automatic trim is used by the autopilot. Automatic trim uses only one control module and trims at ½ the
normal control wheel or alternate trim rate.
Mach/speed trim (757 only) applies automatic trim when the autopilot is not engaged using one control module at ½
the normal control wheel trim rate to improve speed stability. All other trim methods inhibit Mach/speed trim.
196
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
The left autopilot can only use the trim module under the left cutoff switch (center hydraulics on the 757, left
hydraulics on the 767) and the right autopilot can only use the trim module under the right cutoff switch (right
hydraulics on the 757, center hydraulics on the 767). The center autopilot, however, can use the trim module under
either cutoff switch.
If a single autopilot is engaged, electric trimming causes it to disengage.
If multiple autopilots are engaged, the electric trim switches are inhibited.
Alternate trimming does not cause autopilot disengagement, but will cause the Unscheduled Stab Trim light to
illuminate.
The Pitch Enhancement System (767 only) uses a hydraulic motor in the right hydraulic system to drive a pump in
the left system (a Power Transfer Unit) that uses trapped left trim fluid to trim the stabilizer. It automatically
operates if both left and center hydraulic systems fail and uses the electric trim switches to trim the stab at ¼ the
normal rate. Alternate and automatic trim will be inoperative.
Roll control is provided by ailerons and spoilers. Control wheel forces increase as control displacement increases.
One of the three hydraulic systems is necessary to set aileron trim.
If aileron trim is changed with an autopilot engaged, the control wheel and ailerons will move to the new trimmed
position when the autopilot is disengaged. Prohibited by airplane limitations.
The aileron lockout system (767 only) permits full travel of the outboard ailerons at low airspeeds and locks them
out at high airspeeds. The AIL LOCK light indicates the aileron lockout actuator is not in the commanded position.
There may be too much or too little movement of the outboard ailerons available.
The rudder ratio system uses left hydraulic pressure and inputs from the air data computer to reduce rudder
displacement at high airspeeds. The RUDDER RATIO light indicates the system has failed and the left hydraulic
actuator to the rudder has been automatically depressurized to reduce rudder throw at high airspeeds.
The yaw dampers improve turn coordination and Dutch roll damping. The Inop light illuminates when a yaw
damper is inoperative or when the IRUs are not aligned.
On the 757, the number 4 and 9 spoiler panels do not operate in flight, but all panels extend on the ground. On the
767, all panels extend both in flight and on the ground.
If the speedbrakes are armed, the lever will move to Up and the speedbrakes will extend on landing when the main
gear are on the ground (not tilted) and the thrust levers are at idle. If the speedbrakes are not armed, the lever will
move to UP and the speedbrakes will extend when on the ground (landing or rejected takeoff) and either thrust
lever is moved to the reverse idle detent.
The Auto Speedbrakes light will illuminate to indicate a fault in the auto speedbrake system that may result in the
loss of auto speedbrake extension. If the speedbrake lever is armed, the light may indicate a fault that could extend
the speedbrakes in flight. Place the lever in the Down position and operate the speedbrakes manually.
Flaps are measured in units, not degrees.
Flaps 1, 5, 15 and 20 are Boeing-allowed takeoff flap positions for the 757-200 and the 767. (Delta does not use
Flaps 1 for takeoff.) The 757-300 does not use Flaps 1 for takeoff. Flaps 25 and 30 are normal landing flap
positions. Flaps 20 is used for some non-normal landings.
757 Slat and Flap Sequencing:
• Up to 1: flaps move to 1, slats move to the midrange position after the flaps have moved some
• 1 to 5, 15 and 20: slats stay in the midrange position, flaps move to the commanded position
• 20 to 25: slats move to the landing position, flaps move to 25
• 25 to 30: slats stay in the landing position, flaps move to 30
• the sequence is reversed during flap retraction
767 Slat and Flap Sequencing:
• Up to 1: slats move to the midrange position, flaps stay up
• 1 to 5, 15 and 20: slats stay in the midrange position, flaps move to the commanded position and inboard
ailerons droop
• 20 to 25: slats move to the landing position, flaps move to 25
• 25 to 30: slats stay in the landing position, flaps move to 30
• the sequence is reversed during flap retraction
The gate at Flaps 20 prevents inadvertent retraction of flaps beyond the go-around position. The gate at Flaps 1
prevents inadvertent retraction of the slats.
Flap Load Relief – on the 757 and a few 767s, if the flaps are at 30 and Flaps 30 speed is exceeded, the flaps
automatically retract to 25. On most 767s, if the flaps are at 25 or 30 and the placard airspeed is exceeded, the
flaps automatically retract to 20. The flaps will automatically re-extend when airspeed is reduced. If the Flap Load
Relief fails to operate when it should, the Trailing Edge light will illuminate and the FLAP LD RELIEF EICAS
message will display.
197
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
Autoslats (757 only) – if the slats are in the midrange position and a stall signal is received from the stall warning
system, the slats will automatically extend to the landing position. The slats will automatically retract to the
midrange position a few seconds after the stall signal is removed.
Control Column Nudger (767 and 757-300 only) – if the flaps are retracted and the angle of attack continues to
increase after a stall warning, a control column nudger moves the control column forward. Flaps must be up for the
nudger to operate.
The Alternate Flaps switch “removes hydraulic power and arms the selected electric actuator.” (Schoolhouse
answer.)
The Alternate Flap switches:
• disable normal control
• arm the alternate mode
• engage the electric motors
• the flap lever no longer controls both the flaps and slats (757) or the selected flaps or slats (767)
On the 757, there is only one hydraulic shutoff valve and either ALTN TE or LE switch shuts off hydraulics to both
the flaps and slats. The flap lever no longer controls the flaps and slats when either ALTN switch is selected.
On the 767, there are two hydraulic shutoff valves, one for the flaps and one for the slats. The ALTN switch shuts off
either the flaps or the slats, depending on which switch is selected. The flap lever will continue to control
whichever system is not selected.
Alternate flap and slat extension is limited to Flaps 20.
On the 757, the LE slats extend to the landing position at Flaps 20 when the alternate extension system is used.
Flap and slat operating times are greatly increased when using the alternate mode.
Flap and slat operating times are also greatly increased in the normal mode when the HDG is operating.
A Leading Edge Slat Disagree indicates the slats are not driving toward their commanded position and disagree with
the flap lever. On the 757, hydraulic power to both flaps and slats is automatically shut off. On the 767, hydraulic
power to the slats is automatically shut off.
A Leading Edge Slat Asymmetry indicates the slats are not extending symmetrically. On the 757, hydraulic power to
both flaps and slats is automatically shut off. On the 767, hydraulic power to the slats is automatically shut off.
A Trailing Edge Flap Disagree indicates the flaps are not driving toward their commanded position and disagree
with the flap lever. On the 757, hydraulic power to both flaps and slats is automatically shut off. On the 767,
hydraulic power to the flaps is automatically shut off.
A Trailing Edge Flap Asymmetry indicates the flaps are not extending symmetrically. On the 757, hydraulic power
to both flaps and slats is automatically shut off. On the 767, hydraulic power to the flaps is automatically shut off.
Leading Edge and/or Trailing Edge Disagreements may occur if the flap lever is out of a detent for an extended
period of time. In this case, putting the lever into the detent will solve the problem.

Flight Management and Navigation

The FMS is a “goes to” machine. It only goes direct to waypoints or goes inbound on a course to a waypoint. All
courses entered on the LEGS page must be courses inbound to a waypoint, never the radial away from a waypoint.
Waypoint Format Examples:
• Place Radial/Distance – LAX090/50
• Place Radial/Place Radial – LAX360/SBA090
• Latitude and Longitude – N3739.5W08245.8
• Waypoints along route – LAX/50 or LAX/-25
Altitude Constraints on the Legs page:
• Cross at 2,000 or FL350 – enter 2000 or 350
• At or below 14,000 – enter /140B
• At or above 14,000 – enter /140A
• Between 14,000 and 16,000 – enter /140A160B (A before B – alphabetical order)
Speed constraints must be accompanied by an altitude constraint, but altitude constraints don’t require a speed
constraint.
When CLB DIR or DES DIR are executed, all altitude constraints between the airplane’s current altitude and the
MCP altitude are deleted and the airplane climbs or descends directly to the MCP altitude.
Any changes to a holding pattern made after entering holding will become effective after the airplane passes the
holding fix again, i.e. during the next turn in holding.
When Exit Hold is executed the airplane will turn immediately toward the holding fix, terminate the holding pattern,
and continue on the programmed route.
198
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
To delete a holding pattern before you get to it, use waypoint bypass or the delete waypoint procedure on the Hold
At line.
If the FMS Offset route is more than 2½ miles from the original course, the FMS computes a 45° intercept to it. If
the offset route is 2½ miles or less from the original course, the FMS computes a 10° intercept. The same intercept
angles are used when returning to the original route from an offset. To delete an offset, use the Delete key or enter
a 0 for the offset mileage on Route page 1.
Pressing the Activate button for RTE 2 automatically brings up the DIR/INTC page for Route 2 so you can select the
appropriate fix before executing the new route.
Fuel quantity USE prompts on Progress page 2 are only displayed if the difference between the Totalizer and
Calculated fuel is 3,000 pounds or more. There will be an alert message in the scratch pad directing you to
Progress page 2 in this case. (You might have a fuel leak.)
If an FMC fails, its associated LNAV and VNAV functions will be inop. Select the opposite autopilot and opposite
FMC to use LNAV and VNAV from the other FMC.
Some aircraft have two independent alternate navigation systems in case both FMCs fail. Select CDU-L and CDU-R
to access the IRS-based alternate navigation systems. Only the IRS-Legs page and IRS-Progress page will be
operational and all new waypoints must be entered as latitude and longitude.
Three Inertial Reference Units (IRUs) are installed on 757-200s and 767s. The 757-300 has three Air Data/Inertial
Reference Units (ADIRUs) that combine the functions of an IRU with an Air Data Computer (ADC).
The IRUs provide data to the RDMI, HSI, ADI and VSI. (You can remember this because IRU starts with “I” and all
the other instruments end with “I.”)
The left IRU provides data to the Captain’s ADI, HSI, VSI and the First Officer’s RDMI.
The right IRU provides data to the First Officer’s ADI, HSI, VSI and the Captain’s RDMI.
The center IRU is an alternate source of data for either or both pilot’s instruments.
Full alignment requires present position to be entered and takes 10 minutes to complete. Quick alignment takes 30
seconds. (Alignment actually depends on latitude. It will be faster than 10 minutes at the equator and the IRUs
won’t align at all at the North Pole.)
Track, wind and heading on the overhead IRS panel are all referenced to True North.
Flashing Align lights indicate:
• the IRUs have been in align mode for more than 10 minutes without a present position entered
• an incorrect present position was entered (a significant difference from the shutdown position)
• the airplane was moved during alignment
The ON DC light during alignment means the IRU is testing its backup source of DC power.
The ON DC light during operation means the IRU has lost its primary source of power (AC) and is operating on
backup DC power.
The DC FAIL light indicates the IRU has lost its backup source power (DC) but is operating normally on AC power.
After loss of both AC and DC power to the IRU, all lights for the IRU on the overhead panel will be out and flags
will appear in the affected instruments (ADI, HSI, VSI, opposite RDMI).
The IRU FAULT light indicates a fault is detected and the IRU must be considered unreliable.
When on Standby power, some airplanes will depower the right IRU after 5 minutes and some airplanes will
depower the left and center IRUs after 5 minutes to save battery power. The remaining IRU or IRUs will stay
powered until battery depletion. Refer to the Differences section in Volume 1.
IRUs cannot be realigned in flight, but if power is restored after they have shut down, they can be re-powered and
used in Attitude mode. Maintain straight and level flight for 30 seconds while attitude is measured. Heading must
be entered manually on the overhead panel.
Two Air Data Computers (ADCs) are installed on 757-200s and 767s. The ADCs receive pitot and static inputs from
their respective pitot static probes and ports. 757-300s have three ADIRUs instead, as described above.
Airspeed indicators and altimeters receive information from their respective Air Data Computer, with the opposite
ADC serving as an alternate source.
The light on the altimeter indicates approaching an MCP selected altitude. It comes on 750 feet prior to the selected
altitude and goes off 250 feet prior to the selected altitude. The light on the altimeter, the Altitude alert light on the
forward panel, an EICAS message, the Master Caution light and beeper activate when deviating 250 feet from the
MCP altitude. Cautions and alerts are inhibited with the gear down except for the light on the altimeter.
Each VSI receives inputs from its respective IRU, which gets inputs from its respective ADC, with the center IRU
serving as an alternate source.
757-200s and 767s have a Standby Attitude Indicator, Standby Altimeter and Standby Airspeed Indicator. Some
757300s have an Integrated Standby Flight Display (IFSD) which combines all three instruments into one display.

199
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
On the Standby Attitude Indicator/IFSD the ILS/APP and B/CRS positions display information from the center ILS.
Bars on the Standby Attitude Indicator/IFSD are deviation indicators only. They are not flight director commands
and will not guide you to the course or glideslope.
The Standby Altimeter/IFSD uses the alternate static source with no ADC corrections.
The Standby Airspeed Indicator/IFSD uses the alternate static source and an aux pitot boom with no ADC
corrections.
The Flight Recorder is on anytime an engine is running or anytime in flight with electrical power available.
The Cockpit Voice Recorder continuously records all inputs anytime electrical power is applied to the airplane.
During test, the needle (if installed) displaces to the green band if all four channels are operating. To erase, hold
the erase switch for 2 seconds while on the ground with AC power applied and the parking brake set. (Erased and
recorded-over conversations can often be recovered, however, so don’t be too confident.)
The Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) consists of an ADI and an HSI for each pilot.
There are three Symbol Generators to create images on the EFIS.
The left Symbol Generator receives inputs from the left IRU, left ILS and left radio altimeter.
The center Symbol Generator receives inputs from the center IRU, center ILS and center radio altimeter.
The right Symbol Generator receives inputs from the right IRU, right ILS and right radio altimeter.
Normally the left Symbol Generator supplies inputs to the Captain’s EFIS and the right Symbol Generator supplies
inputs to the First Officer’s EFIS. The center Symbol Generator can be used as a backup for either or both.
“SIR EFI” is a good way to remember what the EFI source switch controls. It will select the center symbol
generator, the center ILS and the center radio altimeter.
The ADI receives attitude and ground speed information from its respective IRU through the symbol generator.
Instrument Source Selectors:
• for F/D flags or no F/D bars, select a different flight director
• for Map or Vtrack on the HSI, select the alternate FMC
• for symbol generator, ILS or Radio Altimeter problems, select the alternate EFI
• for attitude, heading, vertical speed and opposite RDMI heading problems, select the alternate IRS
• for airspeed, altimeter and flight instrument problems, select the alternate Air Data Computer
The Thrust Management Computer provides inputs to the Fast/Slow speed indicator on the ADI.
Radio altitude is displayed in the upper right corner of the ADI when below 2,500 feet AGL.
DH alerting resets when climbing 75 feet above the set DH on a go-around or after touchdown on landing. Selecting
a negative DH hides the DH display.
LOC and G/S scales appear when an ILS frequency is tuned. The LOC pointer appears when the signal is received
and the G/S pointer appears if the signal is received and on a front course intercept heading.
The runway symbol appears when below 2,500' AGL and rises to meet the airplane symbol when below 200' AGL.
Two Flight Management Computers (FMC) are installed.
In flight, the Flight Management System will automatically tune two DMEs from a VOR or Localizer to create a
radio position. The radio position is averaged with the inertial position from the IRUs to create the FMS position,
which the FMS assumes is the airplane’s actual position.
The FMS will auto tune the DMEs only when in the Map or Plan mode.
Anytime a VOR or Localizer is tuned, either manually or automatically, the correct DME is also tuned.
The Captain’s HSI receives map data from the left FMC through the left symbol generator. The First Officer’s HSI
receives map data from the right FMC through the right symbol generator.
In Full and Expanded VOR and ILS modes the actual heading is at the top of the case, the magenta Captain’s bars
are the MCP heading and the white drift angle pointer is the aircraft’s actual track computed by the IRS.
In Map mode, the aircraft track (not heading) is at the top. The white line in the middle of the HSI is the aircraft
track, the white triangle is aircraft heading, and the magenta Captain’s bars are MCP heading.
Each segment on the trend vector is 30 seconds long. A maximum of three will be displayed.
Green NAVAIDs (two) displayed on the HSI are the ones being automatically tuned for DME updating by the FMS
or were manually tuned from the VOR panel.
Full deflection on the VNAV vertical deviation scale (football) indicates a deviation of 400 feet or more.
With NAVAID selected, all NAVAIDs are displayed if the range is set at 40 nm or less. If the range is set at greater
than 40 nm only the high-altitude NAVAIDs are displayed.
With Airport selected, all airports in the FMC database are displayed if in range.
With Waypoint selected, waypoints (not necessarily those on the flight path) are shown in blue if range is 40 nm or
less.
Data from the left VOR is displayed on the Captain’s HSI if a VOR mode is selected and data from the right VOR is
displayed on the First Officer’s HSI if a VOR mode is selected.
200
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
All three ILS receivers are simultaneously tuned with the panel on the pedestal. Left LOC and G/S are displayed on
the Captain’s ADI and HSI and right LOC and G/S are displayed on the First Officer’s ADI and HSI. Center LOC
and G/S raw data is displayed on the Standby Attitude indicator when ILS is selected on the instrument.
Each ILS receiver supplies data to its respective Flight Control Computer (FCC).
Turning the ILS tuning knob to the Park position turns off the ILS receivers, removes displays from the instruments,
and shows Park or dashes in the tuning window.
DME on the RDMI is controlled by the HSI mode selector. In VOR, MAP and PLAN modes the DME is to the
VOR station currently tuned, either manually or automatically. In ILS modes, the DME is to the tuned ILS and an
L for “Localizer” is indicated before the mileage number. Dashes appear if the DME information is not available
and the window is blank if the DME is inop.
The ADF sends bearing information to the RDMI. ANT is for better audio reception, but no bearing data is sent. The
Tone switch should normally be off.
Except for the 767, only a left ADF is installed, but the control head still has two windows and a transfer switch.
Selecting ADF on the right pointer on the RDMI freezes the wide needle in its last position and the Bearing
Pointer flag appears. On the 767, two ADFs are installed and bearing to tuned ADF stations is displayed on the
HSI (green arrows) regardless of HSI mode selection. The RDMIs will show bearing to both stations if ADF is
selected for both pointers. To park the ADF and remove the green arrows from the HSI, tune to frequency 100.0.

Fuel
Do not reset any fuel boost pump circuit breaker.
The main tank pump Press lights indicate the pump output pressure is low. The pump switch may be on or off.
The center tank pump Press lights indicate the pump output pressure is low or the associated engine N2 is below
50% with the pump switch on. Center tank Press lights and EICAS messages are inhibited when the pump
switches are off.
The Crossfeed Valve light indicates a crossfeed valve is not in the commanded position.
Fuel Config light:
• 757: 1,800 lb. fuel imbalance
• 767: 2,000 ± 500 lb. fuel imbalance
• less than 2,200 lbs. in either main tank (LOW FUEL EICAS message too)
• center tank pumps off with more than 1,200 lbs. in the center tank
Fuel temperature is measured in the right main fuel tank (757) or the left main fuel tank (767).
Each fuel tank has two AC-powered fuel pumps. A single pump can supply sufficient fuel pressure to operate one
engine under all conditions.
Center tank pumps have approximately twice the output pressure of the main tank pumps and will override them so
that center tank fuel is used before main tank fuel.
To reduce electrical loads, center tank pumps are inhibited when the associated engine N2 is below 50%, so a center
tank pump will be off, even with the switch on, when the respective engine is shut down. When the engine
accelerates through 50% N2 on start, the pump will operate if the switch is on. (But we don’t start engines with the
center tank pump switches on to prevent UFI lockout.)
LEFT and/or RIGHT FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE EICAS messages will display if all fuel pumps have low output
pressure or if all fuel pumps on one side have low output pressure and the crossfeed valve(s) is closed. Fuel pump
low pressure messages are inhibited by low fuel system messages.
APU fuel is supplied from the left fuel manifold. The left main fuel tank has a DC-powered fuel pump to
automatically supply the APU when AC power is not available and the APU selector is on. There are no controls or
indications for this pump. If AC power is available and the APU selector is on, the left forward AC fuel pump
operates automatically regardless of switch position and the DC pump is turned off.
Some airplanes have two crossfeed valves and some airplanes have one crossfeed valve. On airplanes with two
valves, only one is required to successfully crossfeed. A Valve light indicates the valve does not agree with the
commanded position.
Fuel system low pressure messages are inhibited with the crossfeed valve(s) open.
757 aircraft are equipped with a center tank fuel scavenge system which transfers fuel from the center tank to the left
main tank beginning when the left main tank is approximately half empty.
767 aircraft are equipped with a center tank fuel scavenge system which transfers fuel from the center tank to both
main tanks beginning when the main tanks are approximately half empty.
Engines may suction feed directly from the fuel tanks if fuel pump pressure is low, however, at high altitude, thrust
deterioration or flameout may occur due to dissolved air in the fuel coming out of solution and restricting fuel flow
201
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 through the suction feed line. Eventually, the dissolved air in the fuel will be depleted and the engine may be
capable of suction feed at cruise power.
Fuel Jettison (767 only) – fuel will jettison at approximately 1,300 ppm and fuel will jettison on the ground if the
system is activated. There is no ground safety switch.
The FMC discontinues fuel value calculations and uses the totalizer value during fuel jettison. When fuel jettison is
complete the calculated value will reset to the totalizer value.

Fuel Tank Capacities

Airplane Left Main Right Main Center Total

Some 757-200s 14,600 14,600 46,200 75,400
Some 757-200s 14,600 14,600 46,400 75,600
Some 757-200s 14,579 14,579 46,391 75,549
Some 757-200s 14,981 14,981 47,021 76,983
Some 757-200s 15,000 15,000 47,000 77,000
757-300 14,921 14,921 47,980 76,822
767 41,000 41,000 80,400 162,400

Hydraulics
The System Pressure light indicates system pressure is low.
The Reservoir light indicates reservoir quantity or pressure is low on the 757. On the 767, it indicates only the
reservoir quantity is low.
Turning the Engine Pump switch on allows the pump to pressurize when the engine rotates. Off depressurizes the
pump but cooling fluid is still circulated through it.
The Electric Pump switch turns the electric pump on or off.
Electric and Air Demand Pump switches (767):
• Off – the pump is off
• Auto – the left and right electric pumps operate only when engine pump pressure is low. The center ADP pump
will operate only when both center electric pump pressures are low or when high load items are selected or
when the left center electric pump is isolated.
• On – the pump operates continuously
The Pump Pressure light indicates pump output pressure is low. For demand pumps, the light only illuminates if the
pump has been signaled to operate and its output pressure is low.
The Pump Overheat light indicates pump temperature is high.
Hydraulic quantity of 1.00 is the normal service level. RF is displayed when the reservoir requires refilling.
The Ram Air Turbine (RAT) switch manually deploys the RAT. The RAT will deploy in the air or on the ground.
The Ram Air Turbine Unlocked light indicates the RAT is not stowed and locked.
The Ram Air Turbine Pressure light (green) indicates the RAT is deployed and is producing hydraulic pressure.
There are three independent hydraulic systems; left, center and right.
Flight controls are distributed so that any one hydraulic system can provide adequate controllability.
Hydraulic system reservoirs are pressurized by the bleed air system.
Fluid to engine-driven hydraulic pumps flows through a shutoff valve controlled by the engine fire switch. Pulling
the fire switch shuts off the flow of fluid to the pump. This is different than turning the pump switch off. Cooling
fluid still circulates when the pump is turned off, but all fluid is shut off when the fire switch is pulled.
High load hydraulic items are flaps, slats, landing gear and nosewheel steering (“flaps, slats, gear and steer”). On the
767, ground spoilers are high load items when describing when the ADP operates.

757 Hydraulic Systems

202
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 Left Center Right
One engine-driven pump Two electric pumps One engine-driven pump
One electric pump One electric pump

Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls

Left autopilot Center autopilot Right autopilot
Flaps and slats Stab trim Stab trim
Landing gear Elevator feel Elevator feel
Alternate brakes Ram Air Turbine Normal brakes
Nosewheel steering Reserve brakes
Left thrust reverser Autobrakes
Rudder ratio Brake accumulator
HDG (some 757s only) Right thrust reverser
Tailskid (757-300 only) PTU to transfer hydraulic power to
PTU to receive hydraulic power the left system
from the right system

A 10% standpipe protects fluid for A 10% standpipe protects fluid for A 10% standpipe protects fluid for
use by the PTU for the flaps, slats, the RAT in case of a center system use by the Reserve brakes in case
gear, and nosewheel steering in leak. of a right system leak.
case of a left system leak.

A Hydraulic Driven Generator (HDG) is installed on some 757s and is automatically powered by the left hydraulic
system when electrical power is lost to both main AC busses.
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is a hydraulic motor-pump that transfers hydraulic power from the right system to
the left system if necessary. It is automatically activated if the left engine fails or if the left engine-driven pump
output pressure is low. When activated, the PTU supplements the left electric hydraulic pump to operate the flaps
and slats, landing gear, and nosewheel steering (“flaps, slats, gear and steer”) and the HDG, if installed. PTU
operation is inhibited if the right engine is not operating.
If the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) switch is Off, the PTU only operates when automatically activated. If On, the PTU
operates if the right engine is operating.
The standpipe in the left system protects fluid to operate the flaps, slats, landing gear and nosewheel steering with
the PTU in case of a left system leak.
The Ram Air Turbine will provide hydraulic power to the flight control portion of the center hydraulic system only.
It deploys automatically in flight if both engines fail (N2 below 50%) and will provide adequate hydraulic power
at airspeeds above 130 knots. The RAT is inhibited from automatically deploying on the ground and once deployed
in flight, it cannot be retracted.
The standpipe in the center hydraulic system protects fluid for the RAT in case of a center system leak.
The standpipe in the right hydraulic system protects fluid for the reserve brakes in case of a right system leak.
Pushing the Reserve Brakes switch configures the system to use the protected fluid, activates the right system
electric pump regardless of switch position, and isolates the pump output to the reserve brakes. (Reserve brakes on
the 757 are just the normal brakes powered by the standpipe fluid and isolated output from the electric pump.)
All standpipes on the 757 protect approximately 10% of the hydraulic fluid quantity.

767 Hydraulic Systems

Left Center Right

203
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 One engine-driven pump Two electric pumps One engine-driven pump
One electric demand pump One Air Demand Pump (ADP) One electric demand pump

Flight controls Flight controls Flight controls

Left autopilot Center autopilot Right autopilot
Stab trim Stab trim Normal brakes
Elevator feel Elevator feel Autobrakes
Rudder ratio Landing gear Brake accumulator
Left thrust reverser (some 767s) Flaps and slats Right thrust reverser (some 767s)
PTU to receive hydraulic power for Nosewheel steering PTU to transfer hydraulic power for
the Pitch Enhancement System Alternate brakes the Pitch Enhancement System
Reserve brakes and steering
Ram Air Turbine
HDG
Tailskid

There is no standpipe. A 50% standpipe protects fluid for There is no standpipe.

the Reserve Brakes and Steering
in case of a center system leak.

The electric demand and air demand pumps provide additional hydraulic power either on demand or continuously
during periods of high system demand. They are also backups for the engine-driven and electric hydraulic pumps.
The left electric demand pump is inhibited during the start of either engine on the ground when only one generator
is operating.
The Air-driven Demand Pump (ADP) operates as a demand pump when center electric pump output pressures are
low or as an anticipatory pump when high load items (flaps, slats, landing gear, nosewheel steering and ground
spoilers) are selected. It also operates continuously when the HDG (if installed) is operating.
If center hydraulic quantity is sensed low (approximately 50%), the center number one (C1) electric pump is
automatically isolated. Pressing the Reserve Brakes and Steering switch allows the C1 pump to use standpipe fluid
to power the reserve brakes and steering system. (Reserve brakes on the 767 are just the alternate brakes powered
by the standpipe fluid and the isolated C1 pump.)
The Reserve Brakes and Steering Isolation light on the P-61 panel indicates the center number one (C1) electric
hydraulic pump is isolated to provide hydraulic pressure to the reserve brakes and steering system.
The Reserve Brakes and Steering Reset/Disable switch on the P-61 panel resets or disables the automatic isolation
feature of the center hydraulic system. In Norm, the isolation feature is armed for automatic operation.
A Hydraulic Driven Generator (HDG) is automatically powered by the center hydraulic system when electrical
power is lost to both main AC busses. The ADP will then operate continuously to ensure there is sufficient
hydraulic pressure to drive the HDG. (Actually, it will operate because the electric pumps are unpowered due to
electrical failure and center system pressure is low.)
The Ram Air Turbine provides hydraulic pressure to the flight controls on the center hydraulic system only. It
operates just like the 757 RAT except that fluid for the RAT on the 767 is not protected by a standpipe.

Landing Gear
The Doors light indicates a landing gear door is not closed.
The Gear light indicates the landing gear position disagrees with the landing gear lever position.
Nose, Left and Right Down lights indicate the associated landing gear is down and locked.
The Brake Temp light indicates a wheel brake is in the high range (5 or above).
The Tailskid light (757-300 and 767 only) indicates the tailskid position disagrees with the landing gear lever
position.
Gear Lever – Up retracts, Down extends and Off removes hydraulic pressure to the landing gear system.
Pushing the lock override releases the landing gear lever lock.
With the Alternate Gear Extend switch in Off, the landing gear lever operates normally. With the switch in Down,
the gear is extended by the alternate system.
The Autobrakes light indicates the autobrakes are disarmed or inop.
The Parking Brake light indicates the parking brakes are set.
204
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
The brake pressure indicator shows brake accumulator pressure. The amber band indicates the pre-charge only and
no brake pressure is available in this range.
The Brake Source light indicates both normal and alternate brake system pressures are low. If the light remains
illuminated after selecting Reserve Brakes (757) or Reserve Brakes and Steering (767), it indicates only
accumulator pressure is available for braking.
The Reserve Brakes switch (757) allows the use of reserve fluid protected by the standpipe in the right hydraulic
system. It activates the right electric hydraulic pump regardless of switch position and isolates the output of that
pump to power the normal brake system. (Reserve brakes use the normal brake system on the 757.)
The Reserve Brakes and Steering switch (767) provides pressure to the alternate brake system and nosewheel
steering using the C1 electric pump and isolated (standpipe) fluid in the center hydraulic reservoir. (Reserve brakes
use the alternate brake system on the 767.)
If the Reserve Brakes and Steering Valve light (767) is illuminated with the switch off, it indicates the valves
disagree with the position commanded by the automatic isolation feature. If the light is illuminated with the switch
on, the valves disagree with the manually selected position.
The Antiskid light on the overhead panel indicates a fault is detected in the antiskid system.
Antiskid switch on the overhear panel (some airplanes):
• on and off positions turn the antiskid system on and off
• the Off light in the switch indicates the antiskid is turned off, or the antiskid is inop due to a fault, or the
parking brake valve is not open with the parking brake released. (The parking brake valve closes to apply the
parking brake, so in the last case, the valve did not open when the parking brake was released and the parking
brakes are still applied. Do not push back or taxi.)
In reference to Antiskid lights, “Little light, little problem. Big light, big problem.” The little light on the overhead
panel is a fault and the big light in the antiskid switch on the overhead panel (if installed) means the antiskid is
inop or off.
Antiskid always stops working below 8 knots or you could never stop the airplane.
The Brake Temperature on EICAS (if installed) indicates the relative value of brake temperature. 0-2 is the initial
range (cool brakes); 3-4 is the normal range and the box turns white for the first brake on each truck that exceeds
2; 5-9 is the high range and the box and number are white for each brake 5 or above. Five or above also turns on
the Brake Temp light near the landing gear handle. The Brake Temperature Monitoring System is not installed on
some 757s.
The 757 normally uses the left hydraulic system to raise and lower the gear and the 767 normally uses the center
hydraulic system.
The air/ground system uses tilt sensors on each main landing gear to configure airplane systems to the appropriate
air or ground status. The nose air/ground system uses nose gear strut compression sensors to control stall warning
and portions of the caution and warning system. An EICAS message of AIR/GND SYS or NOSE A/G SYS
indicates that some portion of the sensing system has failed and some systems will not operate normally. Do not
take off.
The landing gear lever is held in the down position by the automatic lever lock while on the ground. The lever lock
is automatically released by air/ground sensing after takeoff and can also be manually released by pushing the lock
override button near the gear handle.
Gear Retraction – the doors open, the main gear tilt, automatic wheel brakes are applied, the Gear and Doors lights
illuminate, the gear hydraulically retracts into the wells and the doors close. After retraction, the gear are held in
place by uplocks and hydraulic pressure is removed from the system by placing the gear handle to Off. Lights and
EICAS messages will indicate any gear or door that is not fully retracted or closed after the normal transit time.
The 757 gear is held up by gear and door uplocks.
The 767 main gear is held up by locked gear doors. The nose gear is held up by gear uplocks.
Gear Extension – the doors open, the gear unlock, the Gear and Doors lights illuminate, the gear are hydraulically
powered down and locked, the trucks tilt to the flight position, and the doors close. Lights and EICAS messages
will indicate any gear that is not down and locked or any door that is not closed after the normal transit time.
757 Alternate Extension is “electro-hydraulic.” Alternate extension uses a dedicated DC electric hydraulic pump that
uses isolated fluid in the supply line to the pump to release all gear and door uplocks. The gear then free-fall to the
down and locked position and all hydraulically powered gear doors remain open.
767 Alternate Extension is “electro-mechanical.” Alternate extension uses an electric motor to trip the locking
mechanism for each gear. The gear then free-fall to the down and locked position and all hydraulically powered
gear doors remain open.
According to a ground school instructor, every time alternate extension has been used on a 767, the nose gear has
not locked down and collapsed on landing, usually at low speed with minor damage.
205
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
On the 767, flight beyond 30 minutes on Standby (battery) power will result in complete electrical failure and the
inability to extend the gear and flaps. The ADP requires DC power to operate and when the battery is depleted, the
ADP air supply valve will close and the center hydraulic system will depressurize. The gear and flaps will not
extend by either the normal method, due to lack of center system hydraulic pressure, or by the alternate method,
due to lack of electric power, if this happens. The HDG should keep the airplane off Standby power however.
Nosewheel steering is powered by the left hydraulic system on the 757 and the center hydraulic system on the 767.
The nosewheel tiller can turn the nose gear 65º in either direction and the rudder pedals can turn the nose gear 7º in
either direction. The tiller overrides rudder pedal steering.
757 Brake Sources: “Right – Left – Right” (as if marching, but starting on the wrong foot)
• Normal – right hydraulic system
• Alternate – left hydraulic system
• Reserve – right hydraulic system
757 Brake Systems:
• Normal – the normal brake system is powered by the right hydraulic system.
• Alternate – if the right hydraulic pressure is low, the alternate brakes on the left hydraulic system are
automatically selected and hydraulic pressure is routed through the alternate antiskid valves to the brakes.
• Reserve – if both normal and alternate brake system pressures (right and left hydraulics) are low, the Brake
Source light illuminates. Pressing the Reserve Brakes switch turns on the right system electric pump regardless
of pump switch position and configures that pump to use the isolated fluid protected by the standpipe in the
right hydraulic reservoir exclusively to pressurize the normal brakes. (The reserve brakes use the normal
brakes system.) The Brake Source light will extinguish when pressure is available. If it doesn’t, only
accumulator pressure is available.
• Accumulator – if normal, alternate and reserve brake hydraulic pressure is lost, the accumulator can provide
several braking applications or parking brake application. The amber band on the accumulator gauge represents
pre-charge pressure only and no braking is available in this range.
767 Brake Sources: “Royal Crown Cola” (a Southern soft drink for a Southern airline)
• Normal – right hydraulic system
• Alternate – center hydraulic system
• Reserve – center hydraulic system
767 Brake Systems:
• Normal – the normal brakes system is powered by the right hydraulic system.
• Alternate – if the right hydraulic pressure is low, the alternate brakes on the center hydraulic system are
automatically selected and hydraulic pressure is routed through the alternate antiskid valves to the brakes.
• Reserve – if both normal and alternate brake system pressures (right and center hydraulics) are low, the Brake
Source light illuminates. If the center hydraulic system quantity is sensed low, the C1 electric pump is
automatically isolated. Pressing the Reserve Brakes and Steering switch then uses the C1 pump and isolated
standpipe fluid in the center hydraulic system exclusively for the alternate brakes system and nosewheel
steering. (Reserve brakes use the alternate brakes system.) The Brake Source light will extinguish when
pressure is available. If it doesn’t, nosewheel steering is not available and only accumulator pressure is
available for the brakes. The Valve light in the switch will illuminate if the valves disagree with the
automatically or manually commanded position.
• Accumulator – if normal, alternate and reserve brake hydraulic pressure is lost, the accumulator can provide
several braking applications or parking brake application. The amber band on the accumulator gauge represents
pre-charge pressure only and no braking is available in this range.
On all airplanes, the only way to tell if normal brakes have failed and alternate brakes are selected is to observe a
Right System Low Pressure EICAS message. There are no other cockpit indications or controls.
The antiskid system requires three things: wheel speed from the transducers, the antiskid controller, and IRS data.
Antiskid brakes are available with normal, alternate, reserve and accumulator braking systems. Antiskid protection is
always available unless it’s turned off or failed.
The normal brake system provides individual antiskid protection to each main gear wheel and the alternate brake
system provides antiskid protection to laterally paired wheels. Touchdown, hydroplaning and locked wheel
protection are provided.
The autobrake system operates only when the normal brake system is functioning and antiskid protection is provided
during autobraking. (Theoretically, it’s possible to use autobrakes with reserve brakes on the 757 because reserve
brakes use the normal brakes system, but it’s prohibited by procedure.)
With RTO selected, the autobrakes will provide maximum braking on a rejected takeoff if:
• the airplane is on the ground
206
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 • groundspeed is above 85 knots
• both thrust levers are retarded to idle
If a rejected takeoff is initiated below 85 knots, the RTO function will not operate.
Autobrake application on landing begins when:
• both thrust levers are retarded to idle
• the wheels have spun up
On landing, autobrake deceleration is limited until the pitch angle is one degree or less and then increases to the
selected level.
On dry runways, the Max Auto position for landing is less than max braking produced by full rudder pedal braking.
The autobrake selector sets a deceleration rate and autobrake pressure is reduced as thrust reversers and spoilers
contribute to the total deceleration.
Autobrakes will disarm after application for (F-STOP):
F – faults in the autobrake or antiskid systems
S – if the speedbrake lever is moved forward
T – if either thrust lever is advanced
O – if the selector is moved to Off or Disarm
P – if a brake pedal is pressed
The parking brake may be set with either the normal or alternate brake system pressurized. If the normal and
alternate brake systems are not pressurized, parking brake pressure is maintained by the accumulator. The
accumulator is pressurized by the right hydraulic system on both airplanes and accumulator pressure is shown on
the Brake Press indicator.
Brake Temperatures (if installed):
• initial range is 0-2
• normal range is 3-4
• overheat range is 5-9 and the Brake Temp light illuminates
Brake temperatures are not instantaneous and will build for 10-15 minutes after brakes are applied.
The tailskid uses the main landing gear activation system and the left hydraulic system on the 757-300 and the
center hydraulic system on the 767.

Warning Systems
EICAS Event Record manually records the last EICAS event into memory. Only the last manually-recorded event
will be retained. EICAS will also automatically record events as necessary.
Auto on the EICAS Computer Selector selects the left EICAS computer, but control will automatically switch to the
right computer if the left one fails.
Cancel and Recall switches – Cancel displays the next page of EICAS messages when additional pages exist and
then cancels caution and advisory messages when the last page is reached. Warning messages will not cancel
however. Recall displays previously cancelled messages if the condition still exists.
The PULL Up light on the forward panel and on the ADI indicates the GPWS barometric or radio altitude descent
rate is excessive or a look-ahead terrain warning (if installed) is active.
The WINDSHEAR light on the forward panel and on the ADI indicates a windshear condition is detected.
The CONFIG light on the forward panel indicates a configuration warning exists.
The OVRSPD light on the forward panel indicates the airplane is exceeding Mmo or Vmo.
The ALT ALERT light on the forward panel indicates between a 250' and 750' deviation from the selected altitude.
The FLAP OVRD switch on the forward panel inhibits Too Low Flaps and Too Low Terrain cautions.
The GEAR OVRD switch on the forward panel inhibits Too Low Gear and Too Low Terrain cautions and inhibits
landing configuration siren.
The TERR OVRD switch on the forward panel inhibits EGPWS look-ahead terrain alerts and display (if installed).
The GND PROX light on the forward panel indicates a ground proximity caution exists and the GND PROX switch
will inhibit glideslope cautions below 1,000' RA.
A Terrain Caution (if installed) indicates 40-60 seconds from impact with terrain shown as solid amber on the HSI.
A Terrain Warning (if installed) indicates 20-30 seconds from impact with terrain shown as solid red on the HSI.
EICAS warnings are in red, cautions and advisories are in amber, and communication messages are in white.
Status messages indicate conditions requiring MEL reference for dispatch but are not considered crew alerts.
The most recent EICAS message is displayed at the top of its respective level, so the problem that initially triggered
the messages is at the bottom. Run that checklist first.

207
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
EICAS warnings can only be cleared by correcting the condition causing the warning. Cautions and advisories can
be cleared with the Cancel button.
The Master Caution lights and beeper are inhibited when the airplane is on the ground and both Fuel Control
switches are in cutoff.
Most new caution and advisory EICAS alerts are inhibited during ground engine start until the engine reaches idle
RPM or the start is aborted or 5 minutes elapse from the time of start switch engagement.
Takeoff Inhibits:
• Master Warning lights and fire bell are inhibited for fire from rotation until 400' RA or 20 seconds after takeoff,
whichever occurs first. EICAS messages will appear, but the Master Warning and fire bell will not activate
until after the inhibit expires.
• Master Caution lights and beeper are inhibited from 80 kts until 400' RA or 20 seconds after takeoff, whichever
occurs first. If the takeoff is rejected, the inhibit remains until airspeed is below 75 kts. EICAS messages
appear during the inhibit, but the Master Caution lights and beeper will not activate until out of the inhibit
range.
• advisory and communication alert messages may or may not be inhibited depending on the airplane
Landing Inhibits:
• communication alert messages, except Cabin Alert, are inhibited from 800' RA to 75 kts
The Takeoff Configuration Warning system is armed when the airplane is on the ground and thrust is in the takeoff
range on either engine. Any existing takeoff configuration warnings are terminated at main gear lift off.
Takeoff Configuration Warnings:
• flaps not in a takeoff position
• parking brake set (4 items)
• speedbrake lever not down
• stabilizer not in the green band
The Landing Configuration Warning activates if the airplane is in flight and any landing gear is not down and locked
and either:
• the flap lever is in a landing position (25 or 30) or
• any throttle is in idle below 800' RA.
The flap lever warning cannot be silenced, but pushing the Master Caution reset switch will silence the warning for
idle thrust.
Stall warning is provided by two independent stick shakers that are activated in flight and deactivated on the ground
through air/ground logic based on nose gear strut extension.
On the 757, if the slats are in the midrange position and the left hydraulic system is pressurized, the slats will extend
to the landing position during a stall warning and then retract back to the midrange position when the stall warning
ceases (Autoslat operation). The flap lever will not move.
On the 757, slats may extend during testing of the stall system if the left hydraulic system is pressurized. Use
caution on the ground.
On the 767, if the flaps are retracted and the angle of attack continues to increase after a stall warning, a control
column nudger moves the control column forward. Flaps must be up for the nudger to operate.
Overspeed Warning – Master Warning, EICAS message, discrete light and siren when airspeed exceeds Vmo/Mmo.
Altitude Alerting:
• ALT light on the altimeter 750' prior to a selected altitude
• ALT light clears 250' prior to a selected altitude
• Master Caution, Altitude Alert and ALT light if deviating more than 250' from a selected altitude
• if deviating more than 750' from the selected altitude, the alert cancels
• altitude alerting is inhibited in flight with all landing gear down and locked
There are two types of GPWS alerts:
• Altitude-Based Alerts (GPWS) – multiple warnings and cautions based on radio and baro altitude, altitude rate
of change and ILS glideslope deviations
• Look-Ahead Terrain Alerts (EGPWS) – multiple warnings and cautions based on aircraft position in reference
to an onboard terrain database. Be aware that:
▪ the database is unaware of man-made obstructions, except for 757 ships 6801-6823
▪ terrain more than 2,000' below the airplane’s altitude will not be displayed
▪ terrain within 400' of the nearest airport elevation will not be displayed
▪ terrain and weather radar cannot be shown on the same screen at the same time
▪ the Terrain Caution alerts 40-60 seconds from impact with terrain shown as solid amber on the HSI
▪ the Pull Up Warning alerts 20-30 seconds from impact with terrain shown as solid red on the HSI
208
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only
 ▪ the terrain ahead may exceed the airplane’s climb capability
▪ both types of GPWS alerts are inhibited by an actual windshear warning (airplane in windshear)
There are two types of windshear warnings:
• Reactive Windshear Warnings (airplane in windshear) are provided by the GPWS system and are available
below 1,500' RA on takeoff or landing. Detection begins at rotation.
• Predictive Windshear Alerts and Warnings use the weather radar to detect windshear ahead of the airplane. The
Predictive Windshear System is not installed on all airplanes. Be aware that:
▪ some level of moisture or particulate matter must be present for detection
▪ not all windshear will be detected
▪ predictive windshear alerts are issued below 1,200' RA
▪ the weather radar begins scanning automatically (even if turned off) when the thrust levers are set for
takeoff or when below 2,300' RA
▪ alerts are available 12 seconds after the radar begins scanning and can be enabled earlier on the ground by
manually turning on the weather radar
▪ new predictive windshear cautions are inhibited during takeoff and landing between 80 kts and 400' RA
▪ new predictive windshear warnings are inhibited during takeoff and landing between 100 kts and 50' RA
▪ predictive windshear alerts are inhibited by actual windshear warnings (airplane in windshear) and both
types of GPWS alerts
TCAS Proximate Traffic is traffic within six miles and 1,200' vertically.
A TCAS Traffic Advisory (TA) results from a prediction that another airplane will enter protected airspace in 35-45
seconds.
A TCAS Resolution Advisory (RA) results from a prediction that another airplane will enter protected airspace in
20-30 seconds.
All TCAS alerts are inhibited by GPWS and windshear warnings.
TCAS is inhibited during takeoff and landing. Increase Descent RAs are inhibited below 1,450' RA, Descend RAs
are inhibited below 1,100' RA and all RAs are inhibited below 1,000' RA. All TCAS voice annunciations are
inhibited below 500' RA.

Explicit hoc totum

Pro Christi da mihi potum

Translation: “That finishes the lot. For Christ’s sake, give me a drink!”
Found at the end of a long manuscript copied by a Mediaeval clerk.

209
Jeff Ricketts
March 17, 2021
www.convectivedigital.com
For Training Purposes Only